Operator's Handbook (3AL91670AAAATQZZA - ED02)

OPERATORS HANDBOOK
Alcatel
METRO OMSN Rel. 4.4B/5.2B
1640FOX Rel. 4.4B

STM1/4 Multiservice Node for Customer Premises
1650SMC Rel. 4.4B

STM1/4 Multiservice metro Node
1660SM Rel. 4.4B

STM16 Multiservice metro Node
1660SM Rel. 5.2B

STM64 Multiservice metro Node
VOL. 1/1
3AL 91670 AAAA Ed.02
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
METRO OMSN REL. 4.4/5.2A OPERATORS HDBK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Handbook applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3 Purpose of the handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4 Handbook configuration check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.1 Notes on Ed. 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.2 Notes on Ed. 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
3
4
5
5
5
2 PRODUCT-RELEASE HANDBOOKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1 First aid for electric shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Norms and labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
13
15
4 HANDBOOK DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
5 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.1 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Handbook supply to Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Aims of standard Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 Handbook Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N) . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.2 Supplying updated handbooks to Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.3 Changes due to a new product-release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5 Customer documentation supply on CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.1 Contents, creation and production of a CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.2 Use of the CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.3 CDROM identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.4 CDROM updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
23
23
24
24
24
02
050414
01
041119
ED
DATE
ECR 23082
CHANGE NOTE
C.FAVERO ITAVE
J. MIR S. MAGGIO
C.FAVERO ITAVE
J. MIR S. MAGGIO
P.GHELFI ITAVE
APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
ORIGINATOR
P.GHELFI ITAVE
METRO OMSN
Rel. 4.4/5.2A
OPERATORS HANDBOOK
ED
02
SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 91670 AA AA
24
1 / 24
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TABLES
Table 1. Handbooks related to the specific product hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2. Handbooks related to the specific product SW management and local product control . .
Table 3. Handbooks related to ATM specific product SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4. Handbooks related to PR_EA specific product SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5. Handbook related to ISAPR specific product SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6. Handbook related to ISAES specific product SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 7. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 8. Optional handbooks common to 16xxSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 9. Documentation on CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
02
7
8
9
9
9
10
10
11
11
SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 91670 AA AA
24
2 / 24

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK

1.1 General information
WARNING
ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable
for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or
special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
NOTICE
The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information
purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the
part of ALCATEL.
COPYRIGHT NOTIFICATION
The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied,
reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
1.2 Handbook applicability

This handbook applies to the following product-releases:
PRODUCT
ANV P/N
1640FOX (Rel. 4.4)
3AL 37491 AAAA
1650SMC (Rel. 4.4)
3AL 36641 AAAA
1660SM (Rel. 4.4)
3AL 36301 AAAA
1660SM (Rel. 5.2)
3AL 36301 AAAA
PRODUCT
RELEASE
VERSION
(N.B.)
ANV P/N
1640FOX
Rel.4.4
3AL 80997 AEAA
1650SMC
Rel.4.4
3AL 81018 AEAA
1660SM
Rel.4.4
3AL 81025 AEAA
1660SM
Rel.5.2
3AL 81407ACAA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
For further information on the Alcatel software product and its physical distribution support refer to the
Introduction section.
ED
02
SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 91670 AA AA
24
3 / 24
NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS

Handbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operators Handbooks) are not
modified unless the new software version distributed to Customers implies manmachine
interface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of the
explained procedures.
Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product-releases
version marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent version, if
the screen contents are unchanged.
1.3 Purpose of the handbook

This Handbook contains detailed information for the METRO OMSN 1640FOX, 1650SMC, 1660SM
equipment management. Unless otherwise specified, the menus have to be used for all the equipments.
This handbook describes the operations concerning commissioning, operation and maintenance that the
operators must carry out as indicated by the specific software application(s) referred to in this handbook
(see para. 1.2 on page 3).
This handbook must be used together with the associated Technical Handbook ( see Table 1. on page
7) and the 1320CT associated documentation ( see Table 7. on page 10) does not replicate information
contained into it.
In particular, all cautions relevant to safety, rules for EMC and ESD, as well as warnings regarding
operations that may cause damages to the equipment, are not duplicated here, but must be retrieved from
the Technical Handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
When using this handbook it is assumed that the Operators know:
ED
the structure (hardware composition) and all the possible operating modes of the equipment
(product-release) this handbook refers to.
how to use a PC and the Windows ambient applications
02
SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 91670 AA AA
24
4 / 24

N.B.
1.4 Handbook configuration check

This handbook is a collection of documents (each contained in a specific section) that can have
editions different from one another.
The Edition of the whole handbook is that of Section 1 (HANDBOOK GUIDE).
The edition of the enclosed documents indicated in the following table is that of the
corresponding original internal document.
HANDBOOK EDITION
01
REGISTER AND SECTION TITLE
02
03
04
05
SECTION EDITION
HANDBOOK GUIDE
01
02
INTRODUCTION MANUAL
01
02
NE MANAGEMENT MANUAL
01
02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
01
02
SIBDL MANUAL
01
02
1.4.1 Notes on Ed. 01

Ed.01 issued on NOVEMBER 2004, is the first released and validated version of the handbook.
1.4.2 Notes on Ed. 02
Ed.02 issued on APRIL 2005, is the second released and validated version of the handbook.
New description added:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
ISA ES48FE SMII mode and GMII mode
02
SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 91670 AA AA
24
5 / 24
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 91670 AA AA
24
6 / 24

2 PRODUCT-RELEASE HANDBOOKS
The list of handbooks given here below is valid on the issue date of this Handbook and
can be changed without any obligation for ALCATEL to update it in this Handbook.
Some of the handbooks listed here below may not be available on the issue date of this
Handbook.
The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the equipment whose
product-release-version is stated in para.1.2 on page 3 consists of the following handbooks:
Table 1. Handbooks related to the specific product hardware
HANDBOOK
REF
1640FOX Rel.4.4
Technical Handbook
Part Number
THIS
HDBK
3AL 91666 AAAA
1
Provide information regarding Equipment description, Maintenance,
Hardware setting documentation.
1640FOX Rel.4.4
Installation Handbook
3AL 91666 BAAA
2
Provide information regarding Equipment Installation, according to
AInstallation Engineering Dept. rules.
1640FOX Rel.4.4
Turnup & Commissionig Handbook
3AL 91666CAAA
3
Provide information regarding Equipment TurnOn, Test and Operation,
according to AInstallation Engineering Dept. rules.
1650SMC Rel.4.4
Technical Handbook
3AL 91667 AAAA
4
1650SMC Rel.4.4
3AL 91667 BAAA
5
1650SMC Rel.4.4
3AL 91667 CAAA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
02
SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 91670 AA AA
24
7 / 24
HANDBOOK
1660SM Rel.4.4
Technical Handbook
Part Number
THIS
HDBK
REF
3AL91668 AAAA
7
1660SM Rel.4.4
3AL 91668 BAAA
8
1660SM Rel.4.4
3AL 91668CAAA
9
1660SM Rel.5.2 Version B
Technical Handbook
3AL91669 AAAA
10
1660SM Rel.5.2
3AL 91669 BAAA
11
1660SM Rel.5.2
3AL 91669 CAAA
12
Table 2. Handbooks related to the specific product SW management and local product control
REF
HANDBOOK
METRO OMSN REL. 4.4 & 5.2 Version B
CT Operators Handbook
Part Number
THIS
HDBK
3AL 91670 AAAA
13
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Provides METRO OMSN SDH Craft Terminal screens and operational

procedures
ED
02
SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 91670 AA AA
24
8 / 24
Table 3. Handbooks related to ATM specific product SW

HANDBOOK

REF
Part Number
THIS
HDBK
or note
3AL 80814 AAAA
14
ATM Rel.1.2
Operators Handbook
15
ATM Rel.2.0
Operators Handbook
3AL 81826 AAAA
16
ATM Rel.2.1
Operators Handbook
3AL 89777 AAAA
17
ATM Rel.2.2
Operators Handbook
3AL 91714 AAAA
Provide ATM Terminal screens and operational procedures
Table 4. Handbooks related to PR_EA specific product SW
REF
HANDBOOK
Part Number
PR_EA Rel. 1.1

Operators Handbook
18
THIS
HDBK
or note
3AL 81062 BAAA
Provides Packet Ring Edge Aggregator Terminal screens and operational

procedures
Table 5. Handbook related to ISAPR specific product SW
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
REF
HANDBOOK
ANV Part No.
FACTORY
Part No.
19
ISAPR Rel. 1.0

Operators Handbook
3AL 81771 AAAA
20
ISAPR Rel. 1.1

Operators Handbook
3AL 91658 AAAA
21
ISAPR Rel. 1.2

Operators Handbook
3AL 91715 AAAA
THIS
HDBK
Provides ISA_PR board Craft Terminal screens and operational procedures
ED
02
SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 91670 AA AA
24
9 / 24
REF
HANDBOOK
ANV Part No.
22
ISAES1 Rel. 1.0

Operators Handbook
3AL 89872 AAAA
23
ISAES1/ES4 Rel. 1.1

Operators Handbook
3AL 89871 AAAA
24
ISAES1/ES4 Rel. 1.2

Operators Handbook
3AL 91804 AAAA
25
ISAES16 Rel. 2.0

Operators Handbook
3AL 89870 AAAA
26
ISAES16 Rel. 2.1

Operators Handbook
3AL 91716 AAAA
THIS
HDBK
Provides ISA_ES board Craft Terminal screens and operational procedures
Table 7. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform
HANDBOOK
REF
1320CT 3.x
Basic Operators Handbook
Part Number
THIS
HDBK
OR
NOTE
3AL 79551 AAAA
27
Provides general information and operational procedures common to all 1320CT
(Craft terminal) of Alcatel InfoModel Network Elements.
1330AS Rel. 6.5
Operators Handbook
3AL 88876 AAAA
28
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the alarm
Surveillance software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
ELB 2.X
Operators Handbook
3AL 88877 AAAA
29
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Provide detailed information and operational procedures regarding the Event

Log Browsing software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
ED
02
SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 91670 AA AA
24
10 / 24

Table 6. Handbook related to ISAES specific product SW
Table 8. Optional handbooks common to 16xxSM

REF
ANV Part No.
FACTORY
Part No.
3AL 78901 AAAA
955.100.692 N
HANDBOOK
S916xxSM
System Installation Handbook
THIS
HDBK
30
Provides general installation rules necessary to install the Optinex family
equipment in the S9 Rack .
Optinex RACK16xxSM
System Installation Handbook
3AL 38207 AAAA
955.110.202 L
31
Provides general installation rules necessary to install the Optinex family
equipment in the Optinex Rack .
N.B.
Handbooks REF. 30 and 31 are available only on paper support.
Table 9. Documentation on CDROM

See para. 5.5 on page 23
REF
CDROM TITLE
Part Number
METRO OMSN 4.4 & 5.2 CDROM EN
3AL 91671 AAAA
32
Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF. 1 to 13
1320CT 3.x BASIC CDROMDOC EN
3AL79552 AAAA
33
Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF. 27 to 29
ATM 1.2 CDROMDOC EN
3AL 80815 AAAA
34
Contains, in electronic format, the following handbook: REF. 14 on page 9
ATM 2.0 CDROMDOC EN
3AL 81829 AAAA
35
ATM 2.1 CDROMDOC EN
3AL 89778 AAAA
36
ATM 2.2 CDROMDOC EN
3AL 91714 AAAA
37
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

PR_EA 1.1 CDROM EN
3AL 81063 BAAA
38
ED
02
SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 91670 AA AA
24
11 / 24
CDROM TITLE
Part Number
PR 1.0 CDROM EN
3AL 81769 AAAA
39
PR 1.1 CDROM EN
3AL 91659 AAAA
40
PR 1.2 CDROM EN
3AL 91718 AAAA
41
ES1 1.0 CDROM EN
3AL89875 AAAA
42
ES1/ES4 1.1 CDROM EN
3AL89871 AAAA
43
ES1/ES4 1.2 CDROM EN
3AL91805 AAAA
44
ES16 2.0 CDROMDOC EN
3AL 89873 AAAA
45
Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF. 25 on page 10
ES16 2.1 CDROMDOC EN
3AL 91719 AAAA
46
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF. 26 on page 10
ED
02
SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 91670 AA AA
24
12 / 24

REF
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

3 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS

3.1 First aid for electric shock
Do not touch the patient with bare hands until the circuit has been opened.
Open the circuit by switching off the line switches. If that is not possible, protect yourself with dry
material and free the patient from the conductor.
ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION
It is important to start mouth to mouth resuscitation at once and seek doctor help immediately.
TREATMENT OF BURNS
This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed while
the artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present).
WARNING:
ED
Do not attempt to remove his clothing from the burnt parts;
Apply dry gauze on the burns;
Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.
02
SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 91670 AA AA
24
13 / 24
Lay the patient supine with his arms parallel with the body, if the patient is laying
on an inclined plane, make sure that his stomach is slightly lower than his chest.
Open the patients mouth and check that there are no extraneous bodies in his
mouth (dentures, chewinggum etc.),
Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Put

a hand under the patients head and one under
his neck (see fig.) Lift the patients head and let
it recline backwards as far as possible
Shift the hand from the patients neck to is chin:

place your thumb between his chin and his
mouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep the
other fingers closed together (see fig.). While
performing these operations take a good supply
of oxygen by taking deep breaths with your
mouth open.
With your thumb between the patients chin and

mouth keep his lips together and blow into his
nasal cavities (see fig.)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02

Mouth to mouth resuscitation method
While performing these operations observe if the

patients chest rises (see fig.) If not it is possible
that his nose is blocked: in that case open the
patients mouth as much as possible by pressing
on his chin with your hand, place your lips around
his mouth and blow into his oral cavity. Observe
if the patients chest heaves. This second
method can be used instead of the first even
when the patients nose is kept closed by
pressing the nostrils together using the hand you
were holding his head with. The patients head
must be kept sloping backwards as much as
possible.
Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of twelve/fifteen
expirations per minute. Go on like this until the patient has regained
consciousness, or until a doctor has ascertained his death.
SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 91670 AA AA
24
14 / 24

3.2 Norms and labels

Refer to the Technical Handbook associated to ALCATELs designed and manufactured equipment
to obtain the following information:
COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS.
SAFETY RULES
General rules
Harmful optical signals
Risk of explosion
Moving mechanical parts
Heatradiating Mechanical Parts
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGERS (ESD)
EQUIPMENT LABELS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Identical or similar information on Personal Computer, WorkStation etc., other than ALCATELs, loaded
with software applicative described in this Handbook, is supplied in the Constructors technical
documentation.
ED
02
SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 91670 AA AA
24
15 / 24
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 91670 AA AA
24
16 / 24
4 HANDBOOK DESCRIPTION

This handbook is composed of the following Manuals:

SECTION 1: HANDBOOK GUIDE (This document)
The Handbook Guide gives general information on the application and use of the Handbook. The
Handbook Guide includes the following chapters:
Chapter 1: Handbook structure and configuration check. This chapter gives information on the whole
handbook application, composition and evolution.
Chapter 2: Product-release handbooks. This chapter lists the handbooks the Operator should have
in order to carry out the tasks allowed by the specific productrelease this handbook refers to.
Chapter 3: Safety norms and labels
Chapter 4: Handbook description
Chapter 5: General on Alcatel Customer Documentation
SECTION 2: INTRODUCTION Manual

The Introduction Manual describes the main features of the graphical interface and provides a general
overview of the system architecture and the different functionalities provided by the Craft Terminal. The
Introduction Manual includes the following chapters:
Chapter 1: Introduction. This chapter gives the structure of this manual.
Chapter 2: General description of the Craft Terminal. The Craft Terminal is introduced and the
software product listed. The Craft Terminal main functionality in the NE management (EMLUSM)
are listed and briefly described.
Chapter 3: Acronyms and abbreviations. The acronyms used in all the operator manuals are listed.
Chapter 4: Glossary of terms. Definitions concerning the acronyms.
SECTION 3: NETWORK ELEMENT MANAGEMENT Manual
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The aim of this document is to describe the Craft Terminal view, inserting operative information.
The Network Element Manual includes the following chapters:
Chapter 2: General introduction on views and menus. The view organization is presented and the
menus available listed and briefly described.
Chapter 3: NE management supervision. This chapter is dedicated to the NE states and NE access.
Chapter 4: NE management general configuration. In this chapter general configuration referred to

the equipment management are described (CT access, NE Time, Alarm Configuration etc).
Chapter 5: Security Management. In this chapter configuration referred to the Security management
are described (ACD level and Manager list).
Chapter 6: External input and output points management. This chapter describes how to display and
set the input/output environmental alarm (housekeeping alarm).
ED
02
SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 91670 AA AA
24
17 / 24
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Chapter 7: Diagnosis management. In this chapter are specified: access to the Alarm Surveillance
to show the alarm condition, abnormal condition list (as result of operators command), access to the
Event and Alarm Log file and Internal Link Monitor.
Chapter 8: Communication and Routing management. In this chapter are presented the
communication and routing parameters, concerning the OSI and IP communication protocols for
the local NE, the OS and each other related NE in order to provide a global communication
capabilities inside the network
Chapter 9: Equipment management. This chapter deals mainly with the setting and changing of the
boards present on the Equipment and undertaking board protection operations.
Chapter 10: Board view. This chapter permits to show the physical port available in a specific board
(alarm synthesis and port symbol), to access the port view and to change the physical interface.
Chapter 11: Port view. This chapter permits to set and show the transmission resources referred to
the Port.
Chapter 12: Equipment Protection management (EPS). This chapter permits to manage the EPS
protection, setting the relevant configuration.
N.B.
EPS is not applicable in 1640FOX
Chapter 13: Multiplex Section protection management. This chapter permits to manage the MSP
protection.
Chapter 14: Transmission view. This chapter permits to show and set the Termination Point of the
equipment, thus having an overview of the complete signal flow of the various port.
Chapter 15: Cross connection management. This chapter permits to manage the connection of the
paths.
Chapter 16: Overhead management. This chapter permits to manage the Overhead, setting the
relevant configuration.
Chapter 17: Performance Monitoring management. This chapter permits to set and show
Performance Monitoring parameters and data.
Chapter 18: Synchronization management. This chapter permits to set and show Synchronization
parameters and status.
Chapter 19: MSSPRing Management. This chapter permits to set the MSSPRing protection of the
NE
N.B.
MSSPRing Management menu is available only for 1660SM
Chapter 20: ISA port Configuration. This chapter describes the operations necessary for the
ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet boards creation and the ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet TTPs creation.
Chapter 21: Software management. This chapter permits to update the NE by means download
procedure and to manage NE software.
ED
02
SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 91670 AA AA
24
18 / 24


SECTION 4: NETWORK ELEMENT MAINTENANCE Manual

This document aims at introducing the Maintenance procedure, inserting information useful to identify
alarms and troubleshoot the NE.
The Maintenance Manual includes the following chapters:
Chapter 2: Craft Terminal Maintenance Introduction.

This chapter:
list the maintenance steps;

for the Maintenance of the Personal Computer, refers to the personal Computer
manual;
describes the problem with Craft terminal (shutdown and restart of the PCis
indicated).
Chapter 5: Troubleshooting (Corrective Maintenance). Detection location and correction of failure

are presented.
Chapter 6: Unit replacement with spare. The replacement procedure is detailed.
Chapter 7: Upgrading with New Hardware. The Hardware upgrading procedure is detailed.
Chapter 8: FLASH card substitution. The FLASH card substitution procedure is detailed.
SECTION 5: SIBDL Manual
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This document describes the download procedure with SIBDL.

The SIBDL Manual includes the following chapters:
Chapter 1: Introduction
Chapter 2: Download with SIBDL configuration
Chapter 3: Configuration for SIBDL
ED
02
SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 91670 AA AA
24
19 / 24
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 91670 AA AA
24
20 / 24

5 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION

5.1 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation
A product is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole of
performance and services for which it is meant.
A product evolves through successive product-releases which are the real products marketed for
their delivery at a certain product-release availability date.
So, a productrelease defines a set of hardware components and a software package which, as a whole,
identify the possible network applications and the equipment performance which the specific
product-release has been designed, engineered and marketed for.
In some cases a product-release has further development steps, named versions, that are born to
improve or add some performance (mainly software) with respect to the previous version, or for bug fixing
purposes.
A product-release has its own standard Customer Documentation, composed by one or more
handbooks.
A new version of a product-release may or may not produce a change in the status of the Customer
Documentation set, as described in para.5.4 on page 22.
5.2 Handbook supply to Customers

Handbooks are not automatically delivered together with the equipment they refer to.
The number of handbooks per type to be supplied must be decided at contract level.
5.3 Aims of standard Customer Documentation

Standard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as plant-independent.
Plant-dependent documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to commercial criteria as far
as contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned (plant-dependent documentation is not
described here).
Standard hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel the possibility
and the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating and maintaining the equipment
according to AlcatelTelecom Laboratory design choices.
In particular the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on the
explanation of the man-machine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Consequently, no supply to the Customers of design documentation (like software source programs,
programming tools, etc.) is envisaged.
ED
02
SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 91670 AA AA
24
21 / 24
The handbooks associated to the productrelease are listed in para.2 on page 7.

Each handbook is identified by:
the name of the product-release (and version when the handbook is applicable to the versions
starting from it, but not to the previous ones),
the handbook name,
the handbook P/N,
the handbook edition (usually first edition=01),
the handbook issue date. The date on the handbook does not refer to the date of print but to the date
on which the handbook source file has been completed and released for the production.
5.4.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N)
The edition and date of issue might change on future handbook versions for the following reasons:
only the date changes (pointed out in the Table of Contents) when modifications are made to the
editorial system not changing the technical contents of the handbook.
the edition, hence the date, is changed because modifications made concern technical contents. In
this case:
the table in para.1.4 on page 5 indicates the section(s) edition change;
in each section, the main changes with respect to the previous edition are listed;
in affected chapters of each section, revision bars on the left of the page indicate modifications
in text and drawings (this is done after the first officially released and validated version).
Changes concerning the technical contents of the handbook cause the edition number increase (e.g. from
Ed.01 to Ed.02). Slight changes (e.g. for corrections) maintain the same edition but with the addition of
a version character (e.g. from Ed.02 to Ed.02A).
NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS
Handbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operators Handbooks) are not
modified unless the new software version distributed to Customers implies manmachine
interface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of the
explained procedures.
Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product-releases
version marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent version, if
the screen contents are unchanged.
5.4.2 Supplying updated handbooks to Customers
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Supplying updated handbooks to Customers who have already received previous issues is submitted to
commercial criteria.
By updated handbook delivery it is meant the supply of a complete copy of the handbook new issue
(supplying erratacorrige sheets is not envisaged).
5.4.3 Changes due to a new product-release
A new product-release changes the handbook P/N and the edition starts from 01. In this case the modified
parts of the handbook are not listed.
ED
02
SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 91670 AA AA
24
22 / 24

5.4 Handbook Updating
5.5 Customer documentation supply on CDROM

In the following by CDROM it is meant Customer Documentation on CDROM

5.5.1 Contents, creation and production of a CDROM
In most cases, a CDROM contains in readonly eletronic format the documentation of one
productrelease(version) and for a certain language.
In some other cases, the same CDROM can contain the documentation of different
productrelease(version)s for a certain language.
As a general rule:
CDROMs for Network Management products do not contain:
the Installation Guides
the documentation of system optional features that Customers could not buy from Alcatel
together with the main applicative SW.
CDROMs for Network Elements products do not contain:
the documentation of system optional features (e.g. System Installation Handbooks related to
racks that Customers could not buy from Alcatel together with the main equipment).
A CDROM is obtained collecting various handbooks and documents in .pdf format. Bookmarks and
hyperlinks make the navigation easier. No additional information is added to each handbook, so that the
documentation present in the CDROMs is exactly the same the Customer would receive on paper.
The files processed in this way are added to files/images for managing purpose and a master CDROM
is recorded.
Suitable checks are made in order to have a virusfree product.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
After a complete functional check, the CDROM image is electronically transferred to the archive of the
Production Department, so that the CDROM can be produced and delivered to Customers.
ED
02
SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 91670 AA AA
24
23 / 24
5.5.2 Use of the CDROM
The CDROM starts automatically with autorun and hyperlinks from the opened Index document permit
to visualize the .pdf handbooks
Other hyperlinks permit to get, from the Technical handbooks, the specific .pdf setting documents.
In order to open the .pdf documents Adobe Acrobat Reader Version 4.0 (minimum) must have been
installed on the platform.
The CDROM doesnt contain the Adobe Acrobat Reader program. The Customer is in charge of getting
and installing it.
ReadMe info is present on the CDROM to this purpose.
Then the Customer is allowed to read the handbooks on the PC/WS screen, using the navigation and
zooming tools included in the tool, and to print selected parts of the documentation through a local printer.
5.5.3 CDROM identification
Each CDROM is identified:
Each CDROM is identified:
1)
by the following external identifiers, that are printed on the CDROM upper surface:
the name of the productrelease(s) (and version if applicable)
a writing indicating the language(s),
the CDROM P/N (Factory P/N and ANV P/N),
the CDROM edition (usually first edition=01)
2)
and, internally, by the list of the source handbooks and documents (P/Ns and editions) by whose
collection and processing the CDROM itself has been created.
5.5.4 CDROM updating

The list of source handbook/document P/Nseditions indicated in previous para. 5.5.3 point 2 ) , in
association with the CDROMs own P/Nedition, is also loaded in the AlcatelInformationSystem as a
structured list.
Whenever a new edition of any of such handbooks/documents is released in the Alcatel archive system,
a check in the AlcatelInformationSystem is made to identify the list of CDROMs that must be updated
to include the new editions of these handbooks/documents.
This causes the planning and creation of a new edition of the CDROM.
Updating of CDROMs always follows, with a certain delay, the updating of the single handbooks
composing the collection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
END OF DOCUMENT
ED
02
SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 91670 AA AA
24
24 / 24

The CDROM can be used both in PC and Unix WS environments.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.1 Document scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.2 Target audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Reading rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1 Menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
3
3
3
3
2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE CRAFT TERMINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Alcatel software product and licence delivered to the customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 Software product and licences description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.2 1640FOX Software products and licences list and part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.3 1650SMC Software products and licences list and part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.4 1660SM Software products and licences list and part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 Craft Terminal main functionalities in the NE management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.1 Network Element management supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.2 Network Element general configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.3 Security Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.4 External input and output point management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.5 Diagnosis management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.6 Communication and routing management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.7 Equipment and board management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.8 Port management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.9 Protection management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.10 Transmission management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.11 Cross Connection management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.12 Performance monitoring management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.13 Synchronization management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.14 ISA port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.15 Software management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
5
6
6
7
8
9
10
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
12
12
13
13
13
13
13
14
3 ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
4 GLOSSARY OF TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
02
050414
01
041119
ED
DATE
ECR 23082
CHANGE NOTE
C. FAVERO ITAVE
J.MIR S.MAGGIO
C. FAVERO ITAVE
J.MIR S.MAGGIO
P.GHELFI ITAVE
APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
ORIGINATOR
P.GHELFI ITAVE
METRO OMSN
Rel. 4.4/5.2A
OPERATORS HANDBOOK
ED
02
SC.2:INTRODUCTION
3AL 91670 AA AA
22
1 / 22
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TABLES
Table 1. Software products part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2. Software licence part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
02
7
7
8
8
9
9
SC.2:INTRODUCTION
3AL 91670 AA AA
22
2 / 22


1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope
1.1.1 Document scope
The Introduction Manual present the Craft Terminal main functions and provides a general overview of the
different functionalities provided by the ELMUSM of the Craft Terminal for Info Model NE.
1.1.2 Target audience
The Introduction Manual is intended for all users.
The documents that should be read before starting this document are:
1320CT Basic Operators Handbook
1.2 Reading rules

1.2.1 Menu options
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
All the manuals describe menus, but not necessarily all the options of these menus. When a menu option
is not detailed in a manual, the information are surely given in another manual.
ED
02
SC.2:INTRODUCTION
3AL 91670 AA AA
22
3 / 22
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.2:INTRODUCTION
3AL 91670 AA AA
22
4 / 22

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE CRAFT TERMINAL

2.1 Introduction
The Craft Terminal is a project in charge of the local management of single network elements, providing
ITU compliant Information Model Interface to the Network Element.
Multiple NE management up to 32 Network element is possible obtaining a remote Craft Terminal
application.
The general information of the Craft Terminal are presented in the Basic Craft Terminal Operators
Handbook, that the operator have to read before this Handbook.
In the Basic Craft Terminal Operators Handbook are described all the general description of use, login,
navigation, rules, etc, common to all the NE using the same Craft Terminal.
Further, the same handbook contains the detailed description of common operations as Installation and
common screens as Network Element Synthesis view.
The Network Element Synthesis view is the first view presented to the operator entering the application.
Starting from this view it is possible login the NE and than enter the EMLUSM views.
This Operators Handbook deals with the EMLUSM views of the Craft Terminal, which directly
permit to manage the Network Element.
The management main functions of the EMLUSM are inserted at para. 2.3 on page 10.
A detailed description of the EMLUSM screens is given in Section Ne Management of this handbook.
From the Craft Terminal is possible to run other Specific Software applications.
These applications are in charge of the ISAATM, ISAPR and ISAPR_EA (Packet Ring Edge
Aggregator) management inside the NE such as crossconnection, Backup and Restore configuration
files etc.
Details information about Specific Application are described in the relevant Operators Handbook (see
Section 1 HANDBOOK GUIDE for the code).
The list and part numbers of the SDH software products distributed by Alcatel is inserted in para.2.2 on
page 6.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Craft Terminal characteristic (computer configuration) are listed in the Basic Craft Terminal Operators
Handbook.
ED
02
SC.2:INTRODUCTION
3AL 91670 AA AA
22
5 / 22
2.2.1 Software product and licences description

The software products are distributed by Alcatel in a CDROM.
In this CDROM are contained:
Software packages for NE management by means of the craft terminal
Software package of the NE, to be installed in the NE or update the NE (by means of download
function)
The software package used for management permits the dialogue between craft terminal and NE, to
realize all the functions of the NES and EMLUSM ).
The software package used for updating the NE must be installed on the PC and then downloaded on
the NE, thus following product evolution.
Alcatel typically offers several software licences on the software product.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
They are referred both to the Network Element software features and to the Craft Terminal software
features.
ED
02
SC.2:INTRODUCTION
3AL 91670 AA AA
22
6 / 22

2.2 Alcatel software product and licence delivered to the customer
2.2.2 1640FOX Software products and licences list and part numbers
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Every Software Product is identified by a denomination and a part number, listed on the following table.
Table 1. Software products part numbers
Name
SWP 1640FOX SDH R.4.4 CDROM
ANV Part Number
N.B.
3AL 89846 AA
Every Software licence is identified by a denomination and a part number, listed on the following table.
Table 2. Software licence part numbers
Name
ANV Part Number
N.B.
SWLA POINT 40FOX Rel. 4.4

LICENCE FEE / STM1
3AL89684 AJ
SWLB POINT 40FOX Rel. 4.4

LICENCE FEE / STM1
3AL 89684 AK
SWLC POINT 40FOX Rel. 4.4

LICENCE FEE / STM1
3AL 89684 AL
SWLA POINT 40FOX Rel. 4.4

LICENCE FEE / STM4
3AL 89684 AM
SWLB POINT 40FOX Rel. 4.4

LICENCE FEE / STM4
3AL 89684 AN
SWLC POINT 40FOX Rel. 4.4

LICENCE FEE / STM4
3AL 89684 AP
SWLLCT 40FOX Rel. 4.4 LICENCE FEE
3AL 89684 AQ
SWLRCT 40FOX Rel 4.4 LICENCE FEE
3AL 89684 AR
N.B.
Licence alternative for Network Element software features:
SWLA: full functionality set
SWLB: improved functionality set
SWLC: basic functionality set
N.B.
Licence alternative for Craft Terminal software features:
SWLLCT: local Craft Terminal functionality
SWLRCT: remote Craft Terminal functionality
ED
02
SC.2:INTRODUCTION
3AL 91670 AA AA
22
7 / 22
2.2.3 1650SMC Software products and licences list and part numbers
Name
SWP 1650SMC SDH R.4.4 CDROM
ANV Part Number
N.B.
3AL 89849 AA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Name
ANV Part Number
N.B.
SWLA POINT 50SMC Rel. 4.4

LICENCE FEE / STM1
3AL 89685 AF
SWLB POINT 50SMC Rel. 4.4

LICENCE FEE / STM1
3AL 89685 AG
SWLC POINT 50SMC Rel. 4.4

LICENCE FEE / STM1
3AL 89685 AH
SWLLCT 50SMC Rel. 4.4 LICENCE FEE
3AL 89685 AJ
SWLRCT 50SMC Rel 4.4 LICENCE FEE
3AL 89685 AK
N.B.
N.B.
ED
02
SC.2:INTRODUCTION
3AL 91670 AA AA
22
8 / 22

2.2.4 1660SM Software products and licences list and part numbers

Name
SWP 1660SM SDH R.4.4 CDROM
3AL 89852AA
SWP 1660SM SDH R.5.2A CDROM
3AL 89854 AA
SWP 1660SM SDH R.5.2B CDROM
3AL 89855 AA
N.B.
Name
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ANV Part Number
ANV Part Number
N.B.
SWLA POINT 60SM Rel. 4.4

LICENCE FEE / STM1
3AL 89686 AF
SWLB POINT 60SM Rel. 4.4

LICENCE FEE / STM1
3AL 89686 AG
SWLC POINT 60SM Rel. 4.4

LICENCE FEE / STM1
3AL 89686 AH
SWLLCT 60SM Rel. 4.4 LICENCE FEE
3AL 89686 AJ
SWLRCT 60SM Rel. 4.4 LICENCE FEE
3AL 89686 AK
SWLA POINT 60SM Rel. 5.2

LICENCE FEE / STM1
3AL 89686 AR
SWLB POINT 60SM Rel. 5.2

LICENCE FEE / STM1
3AL 89686 AS
SWLC POINT 60SM Rel. 5.2

LICENCE FEE / STM1
3AL 89686 AT
SWLLCT 60SM Rel. 5.2 LICENCE FEE
3AL 89686 AU
SWLRCT 60SM Rel. 5.2 LICENCE FEE
3AL 89686 AV
N.B.
N.B.
ED
02
SC.2:INTRODUCTION
3AL 91670 AA AA
22
9 / 22
In this chapter, are described the main functionalities of the Craft Terminal, referred to the Network Element
management views, obtained by means EMLUSM. The functionalities constitute the heading of each of
the paragraphs below.
2.3.1 Network Element management supervision
Deals with the NE state and access.
2.3.2 Network Element general configuration
Deals with the general configuration of the equipment.
Craft Terminal access state (allow or inhibit)
NE Time management
Alarms Configuration
Alarm Severity Assignment Profile management,
Allow/Inhibit alarm notification,
Alarm resynchronization.
Alarm Persistency configuration.
Restart NE
2.3.3 Security Management

Deals with the security configuration of the equipment.
Set Manager list
Set ACD level
2.3.4 External input and output point management
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Deals with housekeeping signals input from the external (station alarms) or forwarded (output) towards
the external.
Display External points
Configure External points
ED
02
SC.2:INTRODUCTION
3AL 91670 AA AA
22
10 / 22

2.3 Craft Terminal main functionalities in the NE management
2.3.5 Diagnosis management

For real time alarm reporting and subsequent fault localization and correction.
Alarm Surveillance
The alarms concerning a particular managed entity will be represented in a synthetic way in all the
views concerning the entity.
Alarms information are detailed in the Alarms Surveillance Manual
Abnormal Condition list ( as result of operators commands)
Event log Manager

Permits to have access to the Event Log file.
Remote Inventory (upload and view remote inventory)
Internal Link Monitor
Data Flow Analizer
2.3.6 Communication and routing management

This deals with the configuration parameters concerning the communication protocols for the local NE,
the OS and each other related NE. Different types of protection can be managed:
Local NE and OS addresses
NTP configurations
LAPD, Ethernet, MESA, RAP configurations
IP Configuration
Tunneling Configuration
2.3.7 Equipment and board management
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Deals with the presentation of the equipment and the hierarchical tree structure, permitting to define the
types of boards present. The Board view permits to access the Port view.
Set / modify / remove boards or subracks
Software information of the selected board.
Remote Inventory
ED
02
SC.2:INTRODUCTION
3AL 91670 AA AA
22
11 / 22
This permits to set and show the transmission resources (TP) referred only to the port (SDH PDH, HOA,
ISA).
It is used to check the detailed alarm of each TP and to configure them (many options are the same of
the Transmission view).
For each port a specific menu is available where various configuration of the specific port can be set, for
example:
Automatic Laser Shutdown
MSP protection
Loopback management and configuration
Single fiber configuration
TP Frame Mode Configuration
Retiming
Ethernet port configuration
Port view is also the entry point of other management functions :
Performance Monitoring management
Cross Connection management
For each port are presented:
the various ITUT functional blocks (i.e. PPI, RST, VC4).
details of alarm and state condition
TP role, connection, etc. information
2.3.9 Protection management

This deals with the protection mechanism that is possible to configure in the NE. Different types of
protection can be managed:
Equipment Protection Switching (EPS)

N.B.
Multiple Section Protection (MSP)
MSSPRing Protection 2 fibers ( 4 fibers is not operative in current release);

N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Not supported by 1640FOX
ED
02
MSSPRing Protection is available only for 1660SM
SC.2:INTRODUCTION
3AL 91670 AA AA
22
12 / 22

2.3.8 Port management

2.3.10 Transmission management

This permits to cover the management of the transmission resources, opening the views of all the specific
ports of the NE (SDH and PDH).
It supply an overview of the complete signal flow.
For all the ports are presented:
the various ITUT functional blocks (i.e. PPI, RST, VC4).
synthesis of alarm and state condition
TP role, connection, etc. information
For each port a specific menu is available similar to the Port view where various configuration of the
specific port can be set.
Also Transmission view is than the entry point of other management functions .
2.3.11 Cross Connection management
This deals with the connection of all the Termination Point (TP), which are the starting and terminating
points of a transmission segment. In this way the multiplex structures are created, managing the traffic
flow. Similar operation are made on the OverHead cross connections.
Create / modify cross connections
Activate / deactivate / switch cross connections
2.3.12 Performance monitoring management

This function deals with the set up, collect, log and display performance data associated with the managed
NE according ITUT G.826.It consists of a set of functions that evaluate and report on the behavior of the
NEs and their effectiveness relating to the communications taking place on the Network.
Set up the Performance Monitoring thresholds
Collect and display Performance Monitoring data
Performance Monitoring history
Display Maintenance Counter
2.3.13 Synchronization management

Deals with the management of the timing.
Timing source, SSU, T0, T4,T5 and T6 configuration
Protection commands
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
2.3.14 ISA port Configuration

Describes the operations necessary for the ATM/PR_EA/ETH boards and the ATM/PR_EA/ETH TPs
creation.
ED
02
SC.2:INTRODUCTION
3AL 91670 AA AA
22
13 / 22
2.3.15 Software management
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Software download refers to the NE software, permitting to charge the software in the relevant NE
to upgrade the NE software, thus following product evolution, or as a consequence of substitution
with a spare.
Backup and restore on the MIB of the NE.
02
SC.2:INTRODUCTION
3AL 91670 AA AA
22
14 / 22

Deals with the manipulation of the software package within NE.
3 ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

AIS: Alarm Indication Signal

APS: Automatic Protection Switching (MSP as alternative name)
ASAP: Alarm Severity Assignment Profile
ATM: Asynchronous Transfer Module
CDROM: Compact Disc Read Only Memory
CCITT: Telegraph and Telephone International Consultative Committee
CT: Craft Terminal
DCN: Data Communications Network
ECC: Embedded Communication Channels
EML: Element Management Layer
EPS: Equipment Protection Switching
FAD: Functional Access Domain
Gbit/s: Gigabits per second
GNE: Gateway Network Element
HMI: Human Machine Interface
IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IM: Information Manager
IP: Internet Protocol
ISA: Integrated Service Adapter (ISA board are the following unit: ATM, PR_EA, PR and ETHERNET)
Kbit/s: Kilobits per second
LAN: Local Area Network
LVC: Lower Order Virtual Container
MAC: Media Access Control
Mbit/s: Megabits per seconds
MIB: Management Information Base
MS: Multiplex Section
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MSP: Multiplex Section Protection

NAD: Network Access Domain
NAP: Network Access Point
ED
02
SC.2:INTRODUCTION
3AL 91670 AA AA
22
15 / 22
NE: Network Element

NML: Network Management Layer

NTP: Network Time Protocol
OS: Operation System
PI: Physical Interface
PR_EA: Packet Ring Edge Aggregator
SD: Signal Degrade
SF: Signal Failure
TMN: Telecommunications Management Network
TN: Telecommunications Network
TP: Termination Point
USM: User Service Manager
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
XC: CrossConnection
ED
02
SC.2:INTRODUCTION
3AL 91670 AA AA
22
16 / 22

4 GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Acknowledgment:
When an alarm is taken into account by the application, the operator has to acknowledge it to point out
that he has seen it and that he will react in the right way. During alarm configuration it is possible to set
a maximum delay for alarm acknowledgement. The operator can decide whether or not the alarm clear
has to be acknowledged.
Administrator:
A user who has access rights to all the Management Domains of the Craft Terminal product. He has access
to the whole network and to all the management functionalities.
Alarm:
An alerting indication to a condition that may have an immediate or potentially negative impact on the state
of an equipment or the CT. An alarm is characterized by an alarm begin and an alarm end.
Alarm Severity Assignment Profile:
Function allowing the assignment of severities to the alarms depending on their probable causes.
Alarm Status:
Identifies the type and severity of an occurring alarm.
Board:
A board is part of an NE. They are electronic cards that fit into slots in the NE.
Bridge:
The action of transmitting identical traffic on both the working and protection trails.
Bridge Request:
A message sent from a tailend node to the headend node requesting that the headend perform a
bridge of the working channels onto the protection channels.
Bridge Request status:
A message sent from a tailend node to all other nodes within the protection system indicating that the
tailend has requested a bridge.
Bridge&switch node:
The node that performs the bridge and switch function for a protection event. Where the bridge and switch
is performed on a per AU4 basis, the node executing a bridge and switch of at least one AU4 is referred
to as a bridge and switch node. Note that with a Transoceanic application, a node in the switching status
may not be a bridge&switch node, whereas a node in the passthrough state may be a bridge&switch
node. With the Classic application, only a request node (see below) may be a bridge&switch node.
Compact Disk Read Only Memory:
Data saving support from which the information can only be read. Is useful for stocking data due to its
available memory space.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Craft Terminal:
Workstation or Personal computer (PC) from which local address to an NE is possible. It can be used to
configure or perform monitoring tasks on the NE.
Crossconnection
CrossConnections provide the network with the Routing Capabilities, this is the possibility of routing one
signal to a particular destination.
Digital Communication network:
Communication Network in which the transmission of data is done in a digitized format.
ED
02
SC.2:INTRODUCTION
3AL 91670 AA AA
22
17 / 22
Element Management Layer:

This application is responsible for the configuration and management of Network Elements.
Equipment Protection Switching:
Used to provide protection for cards within an equipment to protect traffic in the event of card failure.
Extra traffic:
Traffic that is carried over the protection trail when it is not used for the protection of working traffic. Extra
traffic is not protected and is preempted when the protection trail is required to protect the working traffic.
Filter:
They are related to the alarms or events generated on an NE or internally within the OS itself. They can
be configured by an operator to reject specified types of notifications and limit the processing that is applied
to them.
Flushing:
This deals with logs. When a log is flushed, all its records are deleted.
Functional Access Domain:
It defines the range of functions which are available to a specified user.
Gigabits per second:
Unit that corresponds to the transmission of 109 bits every second.
Gateway Network Element:
It is a Network Element devoted to the control, from the OS, of those NEs providing a QECC* interface.
To do this it uses a QB3* interface and performs the conversion QB3* QECC*.
Head End:
Node executing the bridge (adjacent along the direction where a failure is present)
Human Machine Interface:
It is the graphical user interface application through which the operators interact with the system.
History Report:
This function enables operators to get information concerning performances, security or alarms on entities
composing the network, or on the network itself. The operator specifies the time period for which he
requires the report.
Idle:
A node that is not generating, detecting or passingthrough bridge requests or bridge request status
information.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Intermediate node:
The node that is not a request node. It is always in the passthrough state. If such a node executes bridge
and switch of at least one AU4 it is also a bridge&switch node.
International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee:
Standard organization for telecommunications. Now called the ITUT (International Telecommunication
Union).
ED
02
SC.2:INTRODUCTION
3AL 91670 AA AA
22
18 / 22

Embedded Communication Channel:

Communication channel used in conjunction with packet commuting networks (X25) to manage distant
SDH networks. These communication channels are related to the QECC* protocols.

Isolated Node:
A single node that is isolated from a traffic perspective by ring switches on each of its two spans by its
adjacent nodes.
Kilobits per second:
Unit that correspond to the transmission of 103 bits every second.
Line Terminal:
A line terminal is the end point of a communication link. it is used to transmit or receive signals. They can
undertake signal conversion functions (adapting a signal to two different transmission media) or
multiplexing/demultiplexing functions.
Logs:
Logs are files used to store history data concerning the incoming notifications, operator commands and
system alarms. The size of the log can be configured.
Management Domain:
The Craft Terminal product is partitioned into management domains for functional proposes. Each
management domain is associated with functionalities that enable the operators to manage the NEs.
Media Access Control Address:
Represents the Level 2 address for Local Area Networks.
Megabits per second:
Unit that corresponds to the transmission of 106 bits every second.
Misconnection:
A condition in which traffic destined for a given node is incorrectly routed to another node and no corrective
action has been taken.
MSSPRing channels:
The range of channels that are part of the MSSPRing operation (i.e. the whole of the working and
protection channels).
Multiplexer:
Equipment used to combine several signals to produce a single signal at a higher transmission rate and
to decompose it back to the smaller rate signals.
Multiplex Section:
In general, represents the section containing the multiplexed signals.
Network Access Domain:
Defined as a set of Network Elements. NADs are used to define the set of Network Elements that a user
can manage.
Network Element:
Either a telecommunication equipment or groups parts of a Telecommunication Network. Have
characteristics compliant with CCITT recommendations.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Network Management Level:

Designates the management functions performed on networks elements assembled in a network.
Notification:
Spontaneous data received by the system concerning an NE.
ED
02
SC.2:INTRODUCTION
3AL 91670 AA AA
22
19 / 22
Operator:
The enduser of the Craft Terminal. He supervises a part of the network that is dependant on his user profile.
Path:
According to ITUT Recommendation G.803, a path is a transport entity (i.e., architectural component)
used to transfer information. Nevertheless, this name will be used throughout this document to indicate
the information carried either unidirectionally or bidirectionally between two access points of a ring on
either a path link connection (if the two points are both PDH) or trail segment.
Physical Interface:
Electrical or Electrical/Optical transformers that decouples the line signals and adapt the form of signal
for further transmission. This functional block also manages clock extraction, signal loss monitoring and
loopback functions.
Port:
A physical point at which the Network Element can be attached to a transmission medium. A port is either
a termination point or an origination point.
Protocol request:
A message sent by a node to another node via K1/K2 bytes with the purpose of settling a certain behavior.
All the K1 request codes represent protocol requests, but not all of them are bridge requests. For example,
a SFR is a bridge request (see ITUT G841), but LPS is not: both of them are protocol requests. Even
NR is a protocol request.
Protocol reply:
A message sent by a node to another node via K1/K2 bytes with the purpose of acknowledging a received
protocol request.
Protection trail:
The trail allocated to transport the working traffic during a switch event. When there is a switch event, traffic
on the affected working trail is bridged onto the protection trail.
Protection section:
The full set of both protection and (lower) unprotected channels in a multiplex section.
Protection semisection:
The part of multiplex section (i.e. the N/2+1..N channels in a 2fiber STMN NE) consisting of protection
channels.
Repeater:
Equipment used to regenerate a signal when it has travelled a long distance.
Request node:
A node that generates either a protocol request or protocol reply (other than NR!). The pair of nodes
sending each other protocol request/reply are peer request nodes.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Severity:
Linked to alarms, severities indicate the magnitude related to the failure.
Shared protection:
A protection architecture using m protection entities shared among n working entities (m:n). The protection
entities may also be used to carry extra traffic when not used for protection.
ED
02
SC.2:INTRODUCTION
3AL 91670 AA AA
22
20 / 22

Operation System:
A system dedicated to the supervision of NEs in a standard way, using protocols and interfaces. it offers to
the operator a set of functions necessary to supervise the NEs. The 1353SH is an Operation System.

Span:
The set of multiplex sections between two adjacent nodes on a ring.
Span Switching:
Protection mechanism similar to the MSP that applies only to fourfibre rings where working and protection
channels are contained in separate fibres and the failure only affects the working channels. During a span
switch, the working traffic is carried over the protection channel on the same span as failure.
Squelched traffic:
An all 1s signal resulting from the squelching process (insertion of AUAIS in order to guarantee the
connections)
Switch:
The action of selecting traffic from the protection trail rather than the working trail.
Switching Node:
The node that performs the bridge or switch function for a protection event. In the case of a multiplex
section switched ring network architecture, this node also performs any necessary squelching of
misconnected traffic.
Tail End:
Node which detects the failure.
Telecommunication Management Network:
Defines the concept of interoperable management of TNs. They provide an organized network structure
to achieve the interconnection of the different components of the TN and the services to process the
information.
Telecommunication Network:
Describes the network to be managed. Provides the transmission, the transport and the switching
supports to the interconnected Network Elements.
Terminal Point:
Describes either the origin or the termination of a signal in an equipment. Is related to a port.
Thresholding:
This is the assignment of a specified value to monitored parameters ( for example BIt Error Rates) that,
when exceeded, generate trouble indications.
Unprotected channels:
See unprotected channel in ITUT G841. Each pair of unprotected channels is made up on one in the
working (semi)section plus one in the protection (semi)section.
Unprotected traffic:
See unprotected traffic in ITUT G841.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
User Profile:
Identifies the functionalities of the Craft Terminal to which a user has access. A finite number of predefined
user profiles is determined by a fixed set of FADs. To give user access to Craft Terminal functionality, the
administrator must assign a profile to a UNIX user account by choosing one among the predefined profiles
installed with Craft Terminal.
User Service Manager:
These are presentation processes used by the Craft Terminal to manage the Human Machine Interface
and facilitate the interaction with the product.
ED
02
SC.2:INTRODUCTION
3AL 91670 AA AA
22
21 / 22
Working traffic:
Traffic that is normally carried in a working trail, except in the event of a protection switch.
Working trail:
The trail over which working traffic is transported when there is no switch events.
Working section:
The full set of both working and (upper) unprotected channels in a multiplex section.
Working semisection:
The part of multiplex section (i.e. the 1..N/2 channels in a 2fiber STMN NE) consisting of working
channels.
Wrapping:
Wrapping is the technique that enables the most recent entries in a file to replace the oldest when a file
is full.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
END OF DOCUMENT
ED
02
SC.2:INTRODUCTION
3AL 91670 AA AA
22
22 / 22

Working channels:
The channels over which working traffic is transported when there are no switch events. An APS system
performs restoration for the working channels only.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.1 Document scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.2 Target audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1 Acronyms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.2 Glossary of terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
2 GENERAL INTRODUCTION ON VIEWS AND MENUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1 EMLUSM view organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Introduction on the EMLUSM menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 Views menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.2 Configuration menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.3 Diagnosis menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.4 Supervision menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.5 MSSPRing menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.6 Download menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.7 Equipment menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.8 Board menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.9 Port menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.10 EPS menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.11 Transmission menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.12 Synchronization menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.13 External Points menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 Advices on Navigation principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
17
21
23
24
25
26
26
27
27
28
29
31
31
33
34
42
3 NE MANAGEMENT SUPERVISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 NE management states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 NE supervision and login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45
45
46
4 NE MANAGEMENT GENERAL CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1 Access state (allow or inhibit NE Craft access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.1 Switching from the OS to the Craft Terminal access state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.2 Switching from the Craft Terminal access state back to the OS access state . . . . . . . .
49
49
50
50
02
050414
01
041119
ED
DATE
ECR 23082
CHANGE NOTE
C. FAVERO ITAVE
J. MIR S. MAGGIO
C. FAVERO ITAVE
J. MIR S. MAGGIO
P.GHELFI ITAVE
APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
ORIGINATOR
P.GHELFI ITAVE
METRO OMSN
Rel. 4.4/5.2A
OPERATORS HANDBOOK
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
1 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
51
53
53
53
63
64
65
66
67
5 SECURITY MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 Set Manager list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Set ACD level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
69
69
70
6 EXTERNAL INPUT AND OUTPUT POINTS MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.1 Displaying external points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.1 Expanding or reducing external points list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 External points configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71
72
74
75
7 DIAGNOSIS MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 Alarms surveillance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 Abnormal Condition List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 Internal Link Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4 Log Browsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5 Remote Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.1 Upload remote Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.2 View Remote Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79
79
81
83
85
86
86
87
8 COMMUNICATION AND ROUTING MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.1 Overview on Communication and Routing Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.1 OSI Protocol on QB3/Qecc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.2 OSI Partitioning into separate Routing Domains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.3 IP over OSI tunneling for ISA board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.4 OSI over IP tunneling on QB3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 Communication and routing views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3 Local Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4 OS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5 NTP Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.6 LAPD Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.7 Ethernet Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8 Reachable Address Prefixes Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.9 Manual ES Adjacencies table Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.10 IP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.10.1 IP routing configuration for ISA boards management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.11 IP Static Routing Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.12 OSPF Area Table Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.13 IP Address Configuration of PointtoPoint Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.14 ISA board IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.15 OSI over IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.16 IP over OSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
89
89
89
90
91
91
93
95
97
98
99
102
104
105
106
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
9 EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1 Introduction and navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2 Set and change or remove board/subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3 Connect Fan to CONGI board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
115
115
122
126
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
2 / 448

4.2 NE Time management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3 Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.1 Procedure to modify an ASAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.2 Alarm Severity Assignment Profile Management (ASAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.3 Set SdhNE Alarms Severities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.4 Allow/Inhibit Alarms Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.5 Alarms resynchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.6 Alarms Persistency Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4 Restart NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

9.4 Board administrative state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.4.1 Setting a board in service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4.2 Setting a board out of service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4.3 Consulting a Boards Administrative state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5 Software description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6 Remote Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.7 Show supporting equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
128
128
128
128
129
130
132
10 BOARD VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2 Board View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2.1 Port Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2.2 Change Physical Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2.3 Show Supporting equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
133
133
135
136
137
138
11 PORT VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2 Port View: elements on the TP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3 Port View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4 Port Mode Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.5 Set Retiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.6 AU4 Concatenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.7 Physical Media option menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.7.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.7.2 Show Optical Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.7.3 Single Fiber Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.7.4 Ms Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.7.5 Line Length Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.7.6 Ethernet Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.7.7 Ethernet Mapping Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.7.8 Control Path Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.7.9 LCAS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.8 TP Frame Mode Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.9 Show Supporting Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.10 Navigate to Transmission View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.11 Navigate to Monitoring View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.11.1 Navigate to HOA Port View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
139
139
141
142
144
146
148
151
152
156
157
159
160
161
164
165
167
170
173
174
175
176
12 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION MANAGEMENT (EPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2 Management: consulting and modifying EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3 Configuration: revertive and WTR for EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4 Switching EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5 EPS Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
177
177
178
185
187
188
13 MULTIPLEX SECTION PROTECTION MANAGEMENT (MSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.1 Architecture types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2 MSP Options Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3 MSP Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4 MSP Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4.1 MSP modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.5 MSP Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.6 Display of Protection State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.7 MSP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.8 MSP overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
193
193
194
195
199
200
201
202
204
206
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
3 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
211
211
212
213
213
214
214
214
215
217
217
227
227
230
231
234
235
235
235
236
237
239
241
242
242
245
247
248
249
249
250
251
252
15 CROSS-CONNECTION MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.1.2 Multiplex Structures for SDH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.1.3 Definition of Termination Points (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.1.4 Mapping Tables: TP Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.1.5 Cross-Connection Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.1.6 Cross-Connection Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.2 Operative Sequence to execute Cross-Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.3 Cross-Connections management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.3.1 Search Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.3.2 Cross-Connection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.3.3 Actions available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.4 Create/Modify Cross-Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.4.1 Cross-Connection Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.4.2 Create a Cross-Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.4.3 Modify a Cross-Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.5 Activate/Deactivate/Delete Cross-Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.5.1 Activate a Cross-Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.5.2 Deactivate a Cross-Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
253
253
253
254
257
261
262
264
266
270
272
274
276
277
278
283
289
292
292
292
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
4 / 448

14 TRANSMISSION VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.2 View elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3 View Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3.1 View Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3.2 Number of TPs Displayed in Transmission View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3.3 Naming TPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3.4 Dynamic View Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.4 Transmission view access and menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.5 Add TP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.5.1 TP Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.6 TP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.6.1 High Order TP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.6.2 J0 Section Trace management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.6.3 Low Order TP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.7 TP Threshold Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.8 Terminate/Disterminate TP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.8.1 Terminate TP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.8.2 Disterminate TP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.9 Monitoring Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.9.1 Creation/Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.9.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.10 Structure TPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.11 Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.11.1 Loopback Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.11.2 Loopback Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.12 Physical Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.12.1 Set Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.13 Navigation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.13.1 Expand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.13.2 Hide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.13.3 Show Supported Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.13.4 Navigate to Port View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

15.5.3 Delete a Cross-Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.6 Split and Join Cross-Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.6.1 Split a Cross-Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.6.2 Join Two Cross-Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.7 Protection Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.8 Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.9 Show Cross-Connected TPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
292
293
293
295
296
298
299
16 OVERHEAD MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.2 OH Connection overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.3 Overhead views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.4 OH Cross Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.5 OH TP creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.6 OH TP deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.7 OH Phone Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
301
301
302
303
304
309
310
311
17 PERFORMANCE MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.2 Performance Monitoring on SDH port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.2.2 Supported Performance Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.2.3 Far End (FE) and Near End (NE) Performance Counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.2.4 Bidirectional counting (24 h Bi) for QoS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.2.5 End to End (ee 24h) Performance Counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.2.6 Performance Monitoring on AUPJE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.2.7 Tandem Connection Termination (TCT) and Monitoring (TCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.2.8 Performance Monitoring on 2 Mbit/s ISDNPRA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.2.9 Performance Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.2.10 Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.2.11 Performance Monitoring History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.2.12 Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.3 Performance Monitoring on ETHRNET port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.3.2 Ethernet physical interface counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.3.3 Aggregate counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.3.4 Flow counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.4 Configuration (SDH port) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.5 Display Current Data (SDH port) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.6 Display History Data (SDH port) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.7 PM Threshold Table Selection (SDH port) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.8 PM Threshold Table Create / Modification / Display (SDH port) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.8.1 Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.8.2 Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.8.3 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.9 Configuration (Ethernet port) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.10 Display current Data (Ethernet port) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.11 Display history Data (Ethernet port) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.12 PM overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
313
313
314
314
314
316
316
317
317
318
318
318
319
319
320
321
322
322
323
324
325
330
333
335
339
339
341
341
343
344
348
350
18 SYNCHRONIZATION MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.2 Synchronization Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.2.1 Displaying the Synchronization View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
355
355
357
357
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
5 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
358
361
364
365
368
369
370
372
374
375
376
19 MSSPRING MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.1 MSSPRING introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.2 MSSPRING connection configuration advices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.2.1 2Fiber MSSPRING connection configuration advices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.3 Operative sequence to configure MSSPRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.3.1 Operative sequence to configure 2Fiber MSSPRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.4 MSSPRING Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.4.1 MSSPRing Main Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.4.2 Squelching Table with 2 fiber Terrestrial applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.4.3 Activate, Deactivate and Delete commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.5 MSSPRING Protection Status and Commands for 2 fiber terrestrial application . .
19.5.1 2F MSSPRing protection commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.5.2 External commands (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.5.3 2F MSSPRing dual protection commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.5.4 2F Protection Status Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
377
377
378
378
379
379
380
381
387
393
394
394
396
404
409
20 ISA PORT CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.2 ISA board TTPs creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.2.1 ISAATM boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.2.2 ISA PR_EA board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.2.3 10/100 Mbit/s fast ETHERNET board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.2.4 Gigabit/s ETHERNET board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.2.5 ISA ES boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
427
427
428
428
430
432
434
435
21 SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.1 Generalities and descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.1.1 Naming Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.2 Software download operative sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.2.1 Software Download upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.3 Software Download Manager menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.4 Init download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.5 SW package Activation and Units information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.6 Mib management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
439
439
440
441
441
442
443
445
447
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
6 / 448

18.2.2 Synchronization View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.2.3 Timing Source Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.2.4 Synchronization Protection Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.2.5 Synchronization Configuration for T0/T4/T5 and T4 squelch criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.2.6 SSU Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.2.7 Remove Timing Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.2.8 Change T4 <> T5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.2.9 Change 2MHz >2Mbit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.2.10 Set and Remove T0 Equal T4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.2.11 Transmission of SSM Quality Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.2.12 Show Timing Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10


FIGURES
Figure 1. 1640FOX EMLUSM main view organization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2. 1650SMC EMLUSM main view organization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3. 1660SM EMLUSM main view organization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4. Menu options flow chart 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 10. Menu options flow chart 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 11. 1640FOX: EMLUSM Main view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 12. 1650SMC: EMLUSM Main view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 13. 1660SM: EMLUSM Main view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 14. NE management: setting the access state. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 15. Consulting and/or setting the local NE time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 16. NE Time dialogue box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 17. Configuring Alarm Severity Assignment Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 18. ASAPs Management dialogue box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 19. ASAP Edition dialogue box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 20. Set ASAP dialogue box (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 21. Clipboard dialog layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 22. Tp search dialog with support for ASAP filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 23. Equipment search dialog with ASAP filtering support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 24. Search for resources assigned to ASAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 25. Set SdhNE Alarms Severities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 26. Inhibit alarm notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 27. Allow alarm notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 28. Alarm resynchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 29. Alarm Persistency Time configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 30. Restart NE confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 31. Set Manager list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 32. Set ACD level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 33. Opening the external points view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 34. External points view (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 35. Expanding or reducing the external points list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 36. Configuring external points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 37. External input point configuration dialogue box (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 38. External output point configuration dialogue box (MANUAL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 39. External output point configuration dialogue box (FLEXIBLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 40. Alarm Surveillance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 41. Alarm Surveillance (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 42. Abnormal condition menu option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 43. Example of abnormal condition list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 44. Example of loopback dialog window management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 45. Internal Link Monitor (1660SM example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 46. Log Browsing option in Network Element context view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 47. Remote Inventory confirmation request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 48. Remote Inventory completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 49. View Remote Inventory (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 50. Routing subdomain organization example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
02
18
19
20
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
46
47
47
50
51
51
54
54
56
57
59
60
61
62
63
64
64
65
66
67
69
70
72
73
74
75
75
76
76
79
80
81
81
82
84
85
86
86
87
90
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
7 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
92
94
96
97
98
100
101
101
103
103
104
105
107
108
109
110
111
113
117
118
119
119
120
120
121
123
126
127
128
129
130
131
131
132
133
134
134
135
136
137
138
140
141
141
143
144
145
146
147
149
150
150
151
152
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
8 / 448

Figure 51. OSI over IP tunneling on QB3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 52. Comm/Routing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 53. Local Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 54. OS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 55. NTP Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 56. LAPD Configuration dialog (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 57. Creation LAPD Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 58. Confirmation to change LAPD Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 59. Ethernet Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 60. Ethernet Configuration L2 only parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 61. RAP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 62. MESA Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 63. IP Static Routing Configuration (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 64. OSPF Area Table Configuration (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 65. IP Address Configuration of PointtoPoint Interfaces (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 66. ISA Board IP Address (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 67. OSI over IP Tunneling configuration (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 68. IP over OSI Tunneling configuration (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 69. Equipment Overview 1650SMC and 1660SM Subrack level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 70. Equipment Overview 1650SMC and 1660SM Rack level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 71. Equipment Overview 1650SMC and 1660SM Equipment level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 72. Equipment Overview 1640FOXRack level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 73. Equipment Overview 1640FOX Subrack level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 74. Equipment Overview 1640FOX Equipment level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 75. Equipment menu (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 76. The list of different boards/subrack relative to an NE slot (examples) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 77. Connect FAN to CONGI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 78. Remove FAN connection from CONGI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 79. Consulting a boards administrative state (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 80. Software Description dialogue box (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 81. Remote Inventory (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 82. Select Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 83. Select Output Format for file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 84. Equipment Overview Subrack level (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 85. Equipment view: select the SDH port on a board (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 86. Example of a Board View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 87. Examples of a Ports identification and relevant alarm synthesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 88. Board menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 89. After Port Access selection (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 90. Change Physical Interface (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 91. Subrack level (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 92. Example of a Port View (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 93. Termination TP box (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 94. G.783 Adaptation TP box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 95. Examples of port menu options (SDH, PDH and ATM/GBIT ETHERNET port) . . . . . . .
Figure 96. Port mode configuration pulldown menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 97. Port Mode overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 98. Set Retiming enable (before) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 99. Set Retiming enable (after) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 100. AU4 concatenate/deconcatenate commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 101. Example of a concatenated AU4 transmission view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 102. Example of a concatenated AU4c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 103. Physical media menu (SDH port example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 104. Automatic Laser Shutdown Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 105. Automatic Laser Shutdown Management (after ALS Function delete) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 106. ALS and Laser current state (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 107. Visualizing a port optical parameters (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 108. Bidirectional Transmission on a single fiber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 109. Single Fiber Configuration View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 110. Ms Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 111. PDH Line Length Configuration View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 112. Ethernet Port Configuration options (fast ethernet example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 113. Ethernet Port Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 114. Information dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 115. Gigabit Ethernet port view (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 116. Ethernet Mapping Protocol (EXAMPLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 117. Control Path Activation:Individual Path mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 118. Control Path Activation:Range Path mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 119. LCAS configuation pulldown menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 120. LCAS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 121. LCAS Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 122. TP Frame Mode Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 123. Board View Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 124. After Navigate to Transmission view selection (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 125. View of Monitoring Operations (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 126. Navigate to HOA Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 127. Consulting EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 128. EPS Management dialogue box (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 129. EPS: board selection (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 130. EPS: choose protected (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 131. EPS functional state from protected active board view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 132. EPS functional state from protecting active board view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 133. Configure EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 134. EPS Management dialogue box (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 135. Switching EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 136. EPS Switch dialogue box (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 137. EPS overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 138. EPS overview after Search (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 139. Subrack view after Open Subrack View command (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 140. Board view after Open Board View command (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 141. MSP Create Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 142. MSP Schema Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 143. MSP schema creation Port dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 144. TP Search (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 145. MSP 1+1 standard protection schema (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 146. MSP N:1 standard protection schema (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 147. MSP Management Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 148. MSP Management View (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 149. MSP Delete option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 150. MSP Schema Deletion (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 151. MSP Protection Status Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 152. MSP Commands option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 153. MSP Commands (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 154. MSP overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 155. MSP overview after Search (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 156. Port view after Open Port View command (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 157. Symbols Used in Transmission View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 158. Transmission View Area (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
02
153
154
156
157
158
159
160
161
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
167
168
170
173
174
175
176
178
178
183
183
184
184
185
185
187
187
188
189
192
192
195
195
196
197
198
198
199
200
201
201
203
204
205
206
207
209
212
213
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
9 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
216
217
218
218
219
219
220
220
221
222
224
224
225
225
226
227
228
230
230
231
232
234
237
238
238
239
242
244
245
248
251
252
255
256
259
260
262
262
263
264
264
265
265
270
273
275
279
282
282
284
286
287
288
290
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
10 / 448

Figure 159. Transmission menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 160. TP Search Dialog, Initial State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 161. Information Window (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 162. TP Search Dialog with Various TP Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 163. TP Search Dialog with Status Information Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 164. Symbols in TP Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 165. TP search window: Show Monitoring details (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 166. TP search window: Show Performance Monitoring details (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 167. Board History Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 168. TP Search: ASAP search filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 169. TP Search Dialog with Different Filtering Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 170. Information... Dialog for Search Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 171. Print to Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 172. Print to File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 173. Example Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 174. High Order TP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 175. J1 hexadecimal editor (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 176. J0 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 177. J0 hexadecimal editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 178. Low Order TP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 179. J2 hexadecimal editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 180. Degraded Signal Threshold selection (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 181. Monitoring Operations Creation/Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 182. Display of POM and TCM in Port View (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 183. Display of POM and TCM/TCT in Port View (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 184. Monitor Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 185. Loopback configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 186. Port Loopbacks View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 187. Loopback Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 188. Set Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 189. Board View (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 190. Port View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 191. SDH Multiplex Structure according to ITU-T G.707 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 192. Frame Construction within the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 193. SDH Transport Level Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 194. PDH Transport Level Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 195. Unidirectional Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 196. Bidirectional Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 197. Example of Broadcast Connection with Three Legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 198. Protected Unidirectional Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 199. Bidirectional Connection Input Protected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 200. Protected Broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 201. Drop and Continue Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 202. Cross connection management cascade menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 203. Cross-Connection Management Dialog (Initial State) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 204. Cross-Connection Management Dialog (After Search) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 205. Protection Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 206. Cross-Connection Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 207. Creation of a Unidirectional, Non-Protected Cross-Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 208. Create a Bidirectional Protected Cross-Connection (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 209. Search for Cross-Connection Output (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 210. Create an Unprotected Broadcast Cross-Connection (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 211. Create a Protected Broadcast Cross-Connection (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 212. Unprotect a Bidirectional Cross-Connection (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 213. Protect one Leg of a Broadcast Connection (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 214. Split/Join Unprotected Bidirectional Cross-Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 215. Split/Join to Protected Bidirectional Cross-Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 216. Protection Actions Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 217. Select Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 218. Select Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 219. Show Cross Connected VC4 of an AU4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 220. Overhead options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 221. Cross Connection Management for OverHead dialog (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 222. Main Cross-Connection for OverHead dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 223. OH TP creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 224. OH Search TP for creation (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 225. OH TP deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 226. Phone Parameters dialog window (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 227. Far End Performance Monitoring Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 228. Counter directionality: network centric view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 229. Counter subdivision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 230. Ethernet Aggregate counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 231. Ethernet Flow counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 232. PM Configuration Dialog (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 233. PM question dialog box (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 234. Current PM Data Dialog (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 235. PM History Data Dialog (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 236. PM Threshold Table Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 237. Create PM Threshold Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 238. Modify PM Threshold Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 239. Create Ethernet counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 240. Display Current Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 241. Display Current Data example (Interface counters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 242. Display Current Data example (Flow counters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 243. Display Current Data (Aggregate counters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 244. Display History Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 245. PM Overview menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 246. PM overview window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 247. PM overviewTp search windows interworking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 248. Internal organization of the SETS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 249. Obtaining the synchronization view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 250. Synchronization View Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 251. Synchronization Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 252. Timing source configuration for crossconnect equipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 253. TP Synch. source search (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 254. Lockout, Force and Manual commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 255. Configuring the T0 or T4 SSM algorithm and the squelch criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 256. T5 output SSN bits configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 257. SSU Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 258. Synchronization source removing (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 259. Synchronization source removing confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 260. Change T4 <> T5 menu (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 261. Change T4 <> T5 confirmation message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 262. Change T4 <> T5: command execution (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 263. Change 2MHz >2Mbit menu (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 264. Change 2MHz >2Mbit confirmation message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 265. Change 2MHz >2Mbit: command execution (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 266. T4 equal T0 setting (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
02
291
293
294
296
298
298
300
303
304
304
309
309
310
311
316
321
322
324
324
327
327
332
334
336
340
342
343
344
345
346
347
349
350
351
353
355
357
358
361
362
363
364
366
367
368
369
369
370
370
371
372
372
373
374
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
11 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
12 / 448

Figure 267. Transmission SSM Quality (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Figure 268. Show Timing Source (example with T2 reference source) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Figure 269. Display MSSPRing pull down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Figure 270. MSSPRing Management dialogue box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Figure 271. Creation Schema dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Figure 272. Activated MSSPRing Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Figure 273. Set scheme name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Figure 274. Node Id and associated ring node position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Figure 275. Ring map configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Figure 276. WTR dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Figure 277. Example of error message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Figure 278. Squelching table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Figure 279. Example of a ring traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Figure 280. Connections of the ring of Figure 279. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Figure 281. Squelching table of Node A, West side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Figure 282. Squelching table of Node A, East side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Figure 283. Squelching table of Node B, West side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Figure 284. Squelching table of Node B, East side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Figure 285. Squelching table of Node C, West side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Figure 286. Squelching table of Node C, East side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Figure 287. Squelching table of Node D, West side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Figure 288. Squelching table of Node D, East side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Figure 289. Confirmation message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Figure 290. Protection states and commands Idle status (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Figure 291. Ring Protection (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Figure 292. Lockout commands (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Figure 293. Protection and working channels where the lockout command can be activated (2F) 396
Figure 294. Tailend / Headend association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Figure 295. Tailend / headend protection with a lockout working and a one direction ring failure (2F)
398
Figure 296. Ring protection with a lockout and a ring failure (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Figure 297. Lockout command and nonserved failures (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Figure 298. Forced and Manual commands (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Figure 299. Manual and Force Ring command (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Figure 300. Ring Protection with Force and Manual commands (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Figure 301. Automatic protection Bridge/Switch (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Figure 302. Example of confirmation dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Figure 303. Clear WTR command (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Figure 304. Ring network reference scheme (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Figure 305. Examples of Double ring failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Figure 306. 2F Automatic protection (tail/head) for double ring failure visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Figure 307. Tail / head dual Events Protection table (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Figure 308. Manual command applied at the Reference Point ring network Figure 305. . . . . . . 410
Figure 309. Visualization of the Forced / Manual protection Statuses (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Figure 310. Visualization of the Lockout command Statuses (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Figure 311. Visualization of Automatic Protection Statuses (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Figure 312. Protection status with double ring failure (reference pointSSAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Figure 313. Protection status with double ring failure (reference pointSSRN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Figure 314. Protection status with double ring failure (reference pointOSAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Figure 315. Protection status with double ring failure (reference pointOSAN) recovering to idle . .
417
Figure 316. Double manual ring command (reference pointSSAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Figure 317. Double manual ring command (reference pointOSAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Figure 318. Manual ring and Lockout Protection (reference pointSSSN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 319. Manual ring and Lockout Protection (reference pointSSRN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 320. Automatic working ring and Manual Ring (reference pointOSAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 321. Automatic working ring and Force Ring (reference pointSSAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 322. Automatic working ring and Lockout working Ring (reference pointSSSN) . . . . .
Figure 323. Automatic working ring and Lockout Protection (reference pointOSRN) . . . . . . . .
Figure 324. ATM TPs creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 325. Navigate to ATM port view (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 326. PREA4ETH: example of TPs creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 327. MPLS port view exaple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 328. Example of Fast Ethernet (ETHMB) TPs creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 329. Control Path activation window (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 330. ETHERNET port view example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 331. Example of Ethernet Switch (ES18FE) TPs creation (EMPTY FIELDS) . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 332. Example of Ethernet Switch (ES18FE) TPs creation (WITH DEFEINED TPS) . . . .
Figure 333. Control Path activation window (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 334. ETHERNET SWITCH port view example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 335. Software Download general principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 336. Equipment view (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 337. Download menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 338. SW Downloading dialogue box example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 339. Software download in progress (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 340. Software Package Information dialogue box (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 341. Detail software package (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 342. NE MIB management (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
421
422
423
424
425
428
429
430
431
432
433
433
435
436
437
438
439
442
442
443
444
445
446
447
TABLES
Table 1. SDH NE alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2. STMN port and AU4 concatenation supported by each equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3. MSP commands and Autoswitch protection priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4. Default value for C2/V5 Signal Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5. Supported loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6. PDH TPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 7. SDH TPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 8. Optional and Mandatory Configurable Parameters for Cross-Connection Creation . . . . . .
Table 9. Modifiable Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 10. 1660SM Threshold table entities association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 11. 1640FOX and 1650SMC Threshold table entities association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 12. Maximum Performance Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
63
148
205
228
243
261
261
280
289
337
337
341
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
13 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
14 / 448

1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope
The aim of this document is to help the operator understand, configure and manipulate Network Elements
(NEs) easily, using the Craft Terminal (CT). The different functionalities related to the equipment views,
the menu items and the different actions that can be undertaken from these views are described in detail.
Unless otherwise specified, the menu and the relevant description in the following
chapters are intended as applicable to all the three Network Elements (1640FOX,
1650SMC, 1660SM).
In many screen of this handbook the release number is not indicated, while it is instead
present in the real screen displayed to the operator.
This is due to the fact that the same screen is associated to the different releases.
Sometimes the release number reported is only for example.
The most part of the screen of this handbook are referred to 1660SM menu because it is
the equipment with the complete set of features, so it has been choosed like reference
example.
Anyway similar screen are presented for 1650SMC and 1640FOX so can be apply to
them, the same description of 1660SM .
This document is intended for the operators whose role is to manage the Network Elements.
The documents of this Handbook that should be read before starting this document are:
Introduction manual
1.2 Terminology
1.2.1 Acronyms and abbreviations
Refer to the Section Introduction manual.
1.2.2 Glossary of terms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
15 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
16 / 448
2 GENERAL INTRODUCTION ON VIEWS AND MENUS

In this chapter the organization of the EMLUSM screen, presented after the NE login, is described.
First is introduced the view organization, than the accessible menu options are listed.
At the end some further advice are given for Navigation principles.
2.1 EMLUSM view organization

The EMLUSM view is the first window presented to the operator after the login.
The first view is different according to the Equipment type but the navigation principles are the same for
all; Figure 1. , Figure 2. , and Figure 3. show some examples.
EMLUSM view contains the following fields, that provide you with information needed to manage the NE:
Severity alarm synthesis,

Domain alarm synthesis,
Management status control panel
View title,
View area
Message/state area
The Menu bar and the View area contained in the same NE view permits to performs all the configuration
and supervision and display the specific selected item.
The view organization is detailed in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator Handbook to which refer for the
description, except for the following information, that differs according the NE type:
Domain alarm synthesis

The different alarm domain type in which can be subdivided the NE are: Synchronization, External
Point, Equipment, Transmission.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Information about the alarms and status is given in the Maintenance section of this handbook.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
17 / 448
Domain alarms synthesis

Severity alarms
synthesis
Menu bar
View title
LCA
View area
Message/state
area
Management
states control panel
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 1. 1640FOX EMLUSM main view organization.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
18 / 448

Severity alarms
synthesis
Menu bar
View title
LCA
View area
Message/state
area
Management
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 2. 1650SMC EMLUSM main view organization.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
19 / 448

Severity alarms
synthesis
Menu bar
View title
LCA
View area
Message/state
area
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Management
Figure 3. 1660SM EMLUSM main view organization.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
20 / 448
2.2 Introduction on the EMLUSM menu options

The menu bar allows to perform configuration and supervision functions on the Network Element.
This paragraph list all the menu options and then more details on the relevant contained entries.
For each of them the relevant operative function are briefly introduced and it is referred the paragraphs
where it is detailed or the introduction to the options of each menu inserted in next paragraphs of this
chapter.
The flow charts from Figure 4. summarize the menu options.
From chapter 3 on details and operative information on the all the views are given. They are not presented
according the menu option sequence but according a functional subdivision.
In the menu bar there are permanent menu items always displayed. Staring from the left , the menus are:
Permanent Menus
Views
(first column).
See para.2.2.1 on page 23.
To navigate among the NE views (Equipment, External Point, Transmission etc. ) .
Configuration
(second column).
To set general configuration of the NE, set TMN and OverHead parameters and to show or
modify some parameters (performance monitoring, ISA Port Configuration, MSP, EPS and
crossconnection).
Diagnosis
(third column).
To get information about the NE (alarms, performance monitoring, remote inventory, internal
link monitor).
Supervision
(fourth column).
To set the supervision states (i.e. Craft Terminal enabling).
MS_SPRing
(fifth column).
See chapter 19 on page 377.
To manage the 2 fiber MS_SPRing protection, setting the relevant configuration.

MSSPRing menu is available only for 1660SM
Download
(sixth column).
To manage the NE software (download, MIB management).
Help
(last column).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To activate the help.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
21 / 448
Other Menus
Equipment
(eighth column).
See chapter 9 on page 115
To manage the NE as a whole, setting subracks and boards which compose it. From the
Equipment view the Board view can be accessed.
From the Equipment menu is also possible to start the Specific Terminal application for ISA port
traffic configuration.
Board
(eighth column).
To show the physical port available in a specific board. It is the entry point for the Port view.
Transmission
(seventh column).
It permits to show and set the Termination Point of the equipment, thus having an overview of
the complete signal flow of the various port.
The menu permits to define all the Cross Connections and manages the transmission
resources, setting the relevant configuration.
Further access the Performance Monitoring and permits navigation to the Board view.
It also permits to manage the MSP protection setting the relevant configuration.
Port
(seventh column).
To set and show (detailed alarm view) the transmission resources referred to the Port.
It also permits to manage the MSP protection setting the relevant configuration.
EPS
(seventh column).
To manage the EPS protection, setting the relevant configuration.

EPS menu is not applicable to 1640FOX
Synchronization
(seventh column).
To show and modify synchronization parameters.
External Points
(seventh column).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To show and modify housekeeping (environmental) alarms.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
22 / 448

Further, in the menu bar there are other menus, presented as an alternative, only when a particular object
or option is selected.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

2.2.1 Views menu introduction

This menu permits to navigate among the views and set some parameters, by means of the following
entries:
Backward:
Go back to the previous view.
Forward:
Go to the next view.
Equipment:
Open the Equipment view. See chapter 9 on page 115.

The Equipment menu and theEPS menu are then available on the menu bar.
External Points:
Open the External Point view. See chapter 6 on page 71.

The External Point menu is then available on the menu bar.
Transmission:
Open the Transmission view. See chapter 14 on page 211.

The Transmission menu is then available on the menu bar.
Synchronization:
Open the Synchronization view. See chapter 18 on page 355.

The Synchronization menu is then available on the menu bar.
Refresh:
The aim of the refresh feature is to avoid a misalignment between the CT and
the managed NE.
This misalignment is due to a loss of notifications coming from the NE.
Open Object:
Navigate and show the contents of the selected object: the current view change.
It is equivalent to a double click on the selected object in the view area.
Open in Window:
Navigate and show the contents of the selected object.

The current view doesnt change but a new window with a new view is opened.
Close:
Close the EMLUSM view, without stopping the supervision of the NE
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
23 / 448
This menu permits to set general configuration of the NE and to show or modify some parameters, by
means of the following entries:
Alarm Severities:
Manage the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile.

See para. 4.3.2.1 on page 53.
Set Alarm severities:
Send the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile to the selected object

Set SdhNe Alarm severities:
NE Time:
Display and set the NE local time. See para. 4.2 on page 51.
Performance:
Manage the the Performance Monitoring domain.

Used to define the PM parameters, opening the following menu options:
Threshold table: See para.17.7 on page. 335.
EPS overview :
Allows to display as well as search for EPS states.

See paragraph 12.5 on page 188.
Send the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile referred to the

equipment level.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
EPS overview is not applicable to 1640FOX
Set ACD level:
Cross Connection Management:
Loopback Management: Enter the loopback management. See para. 14.11 on page 242.
Used to configure the loopback command for commissioning or
maintenance purposes.
Comm/Routing:
ED
02
See para.5.2 on page 70.

Manage the connection of the paths.
See para.15.3 on page 270
Enter the Communication and Routing management.

See paragraph 8 on page 89.
Used to define the parameters for NE and OS in the TMN, opening the
following menu options:
Local configuration
OS Configuration
NTP Server Configuration
Interfaces Configuration
LAPD Configuration
Ethernet Configuration (not applicable to 1640FOX)
OSI Routing Configuration
RAP Configuration
MESA Configuration
IP Configuration
IP Static Routing Configuration
OSPC Area Configuration
IP Address Configuration of pointtopoint interfaces
ISA board IP address
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
24 / 448

2.2.2 Configuration menu introduction

Tunnelling Configuration
OSI Over IP (not applicable to 1640FOX)
IP Over OSI
Overhead:
Handle the operation on the Overhead bytes (not applicable to 1640FOX).

See para.16 on page 301.
Used to define the parameters in the following menu options:
OH Cross Connection (not applicable to 1640FOX)
OH Phone Parameter (not applicable to 1640FOX)
OH TP creation (not applicable to 1640FOX)
OH TP deleting (not applicable to 1640FOX)
MSP overview :
Allows to display as well as search for MSP states.

PM overview
It shows both both PM and Monitoring Objects. Serch operation are

allowed for PM objects, Monitoring object or both.
Port Mode
It allows a centralized mechanism for:
System wide search for Port Mode setting
Change Port Mode setting
Change of Port Mode default

Similar view can also be reach from Port view. Refer to paragraph 11.4 on
page 144.
ISA port Configuration : It allows to create the TPs for the ISA connections.
Alarm Persistency Configuration: This feature has the aim to avoid transient alarm conditions.
See paragraph 4.3.6 on page 66
2.2.3 Diagnosis menu introduction
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This menu permits to get information about the NE, by means of the following entries:
Alarms:
Display the Alarms Surveillance information of the NE.

See para. 7.1 on page 79.
It opens the following menu options:
NE alarms
Object alarms
Subtree alarms
Equipment alarms
Transmission alarms
External Points alarms
Log Browsing:
Manage the events stored in the NE. See para. 7.4 on page 85
Alarm Log
Event Log
Software Trace Log
View Remote Inventory: Display the remote inventory data, previously stored in the Craft Terminal
by means the upload remote inventory performed in the Supervisory
menu. See para 7.5.2 on page 87.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
25 / 448
Abnormal Condition list: Display the list of the object class (Loopback, ALS Handler, protection
board) and the name of the boards that are in abnormal condition.
See para 7.2 on page 81.
Internal Link Monitor:
Data Flow Analyzer:
Indicates the presence of failure on Rx or Tx side for the signal

incoming/outgoing
from/to
the
active/standby
MATRIX
COMPACTADM board.
Refer to paragraph 7.3 on page 83.
or
Not operative
2.2.4 Supervision menu introduction

This menu permits to set the supervision states of the NE, by means of the following entries:
Access State:
Manage the supervision access to the NE, with CT or OS.

OS
Requested
Alarms:
Manage the alarms supervision of the NE.

Resynchronize. See para. 4.3.5 on page 65.
Allow / Inhibits Notifs. See para. 4.3.4 on page 64.
Upload Remote Inventory:Store the Remote Inventory data in the Craft Terminal.
See para. 7.5.1 on page 86.
Set Manager list:
Restart NE:
Reset the NE software.

2.2.5 MSSPRing menu introduction

MSSPRing menu is only available for 1660SM
This menu permits to manage the 2 fiber and 4 fiber MSSPRing protection (the last is not operative in
current release) , setting the relevant configuration, by means of the following entries:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Main dialog for MSSPRing management:
02
Contains all the command to set and manage the

MSSPRing
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
26 / 448

2.2.6 Download menu introduction
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

This menu permits to manage the NE software, by means of the following entries:
Init download:
Manage the software download, upgrading the NE.

Units info:
Show the status of the software package installed in the NE memory banks.
Mib management: Permits backup of NE software configuration and restore of backupped file.
2.2.7 Equipment menu introduction

This menu permits to manage the NE as a whole, setting the boards which compose it, by means of the
following entries:
Set:
Add or change the board type (a list is proposed).

Modify:
Change the board type without previously remove it. It is only possible
between compatible board or modules (ex. it is possible to change from
an Long and Short 1.1 optical module)
Remove:
Remove the board.

Set in service:
Insert a lock symbol in the board. See para. 9.4.1 on page 128.
Set out of service
Delete the lock symbol in the board, enabling changes.

Reset:
Not operative.
Software description:
Show information on the software of the board. See para. 9.5 on page 129.
Remote Inventory:
Show the Remote Inventory data inserted in the equipment.

Subrack level
Board level
ISA Board IP Address:
Used to define the ISA board IP address. See paragraph 8.14 on page 110.
N.B.
This option is available only at Subrack view level.
Show supporting equipment: Navigate to the upper equipment level. See para. 9.7 on page 132.
ISA navigate:
ED
02
Start the Specific Craft Terminal application for the ISA traffic
management configuration.
For details refer to the specific ISA board Operators Handbook.
N.B.
This option is available only after having selected an ISA board
at subrack level view.
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
27 / 448
Connect FAN to CONGI#4:
Enable the management of the Fan subrack alarms on CONGI inserted

in slot4.
N.B.
This option is available only after having selected a CONGI

board at Subrack level view.

This option is available only on 1660SM.
Enable the management of the Fan subrack alarms on CONGI inserted
in slot10.
N.B.
This option is available only after having selected a CONGI

board at Subrack level view.

This option is available only on 1660SM.
Do not use this option to manage the FAN subrack alarms!; Fan
subrack alarms can be managed only by CONGI#10.
2.2.8 Board menu introduction
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This menu permits to show the physical port available in a specific board (alarm synthesis and port symbol)
and to access the port view, by means of the following entries:
Port Access:
Access the Port view. See para. 10.2.1 on page 136.
Change Physical Interface
Change the SPI or PPI object into PPI or SPI (and viceversa) on the
bimode port( 140Mbi/s/ STM1 switchable). See para. 10.2.2 on
page 137.
This option is not supported by 1640FOX.
Show supporting equipment: Navigate to the upper subrack level. See para. 10.2.3 on page 138.
ISA port Configuration: It allows to create the TPs for the ATM/PR_EA/ETH connections.
N.B.
This menu is available only if an ATM/PREA/ETH board
has been equipped in the subrack.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
28 / 448

This option is available only on 1650SMC.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

2.2.9 Port menu introduction

This menu permits to set and show the transmission resources (TP) referred to the Port, by means of the
entries indicated in the following list.
The menu differs according the port type (SDH, PDH, HOA and ISA).
The Port view is reached by means the Equipment menu and Board view to check the detailed alarms
presented, but the available menu permits to configure the port (many setting options listed in the port
menu are common with the Transmission view).
In these views are presented only the TP specific of the port.
It permits navigation to the Transmission view.
TP configuration:
Set parameters for the Overhead (Signal Label and Path Trace) on
Synchronous TPs. See para 14.6 on page 227.
Port Mode Configuration:
This functionality allows to manage the alarms behaviour on LOS

according to the setup done at port level.
TP Threshold Configuration:
Set B2 excessive BER and Signal Degraded parameter.

TP Frame Mode Configuration:
Set Retiming:
Set the retiming feature applies to the outgoing 2Mbit/s. See

paragraph 11.5 on page 146.
It opens the following options:
Enable
Disable
AU4 Concatenation:
Only for SDH ports views. See para. 11.6 on page 148.
Cross Connection:
Manage the connection of the paths. See para.15 on page 253.

Cross Connection Management
Create Cross Connection
Modify Cross Connection
Monitoring Operation:
Set parameters for POM/SUT/TCM/TCT TPs.

INot available for PDH ports.
Creation / Deletion
Configuration
Performance:
Set and show Performance Monitoring parameters and data.

Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G.703/704 or ISDNPRA

management.
Only for PDH ports views. See para 11.8 on page 170
IDifferent menu are available:
Configure Performance Monitoring
Display Current Data
Display History Data
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
29 / 448
Loopback:
Enter the loopback management. See para. 14.11 on page 242.

maintenance purposes:
MSP
Manage the Multiplex Section Protection of the NE.

See Chapter 13 on page 193.
Only for SDH ports view.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Port Loopback Configuration

Loopback management
Physical Media:
MSP Create
MSP Management
MSP Commands
MSP Delete
Manage the physical setting of the TP of the ports. Not applicable to HOA
port. See para.11.7 on page 151.
It opens a menu which differs according the port type:
SDH port:
ALS Management
Show Optical Configuration
TX Quality Configuration
Single Fiber Configuration
LAPD Configuration
Ms Configuration
PDH port:
Line Length Configuration
HDSL Configuration (not operative)
NT G703/704 Configuration (not operative)
NT X21 Configuration (not operative)
ETHERNET port:
Remote Laser Management (not operative)
ALS Management (not operative)
Ethernet Port Configuration
Ethernet Mapping Protocol
ISA Port Configuration
Control Path Activation
LCAS Configuration
Show supporting board:
Navigate to Transmission view: permit to show a complete overview about the signal flow, opening
all TPs
Navigate to Monitoring view: permit to show for a selected TP the related POM/SUT/TCM and TCT
object if present.
Navigate to HOA port view:
ED
02
Navigate to the upper board level.

permit to show the HOA port associated to a selected TP (for

example, the HOA port associated to an AU4 ia a VC4).
It is available only on SDH ports.
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
30 / 448

2.2.10 EPS menu introduction

This menu is not supported by 1640FOX.

This menu permits to manage the EPS protection, setting the relevant configuration, by means of the
following entries :
Management:
Set EPS protections. See para.12.2 on page 178.
Configure:
Set revertive / not revertive and WTR parameters.

Switch:
Manage the EPS operator commands (Force, Manual, Lockout)

2.2.11 Transmission menu introduction

This menu permits to show and set the Termination Point of the equipment, thus having an overview of
the complete signal flow of the various port.
The menu permits to define all the Cross Connections and manages the transmission resources, setting
the relevant configuration.
Further access the Performance Monitoring and manage Multiplex Section Protections and Loopbacks
functions.
It permits navigation to the Port view.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The menu lists the following entries:
Add TP:
Search and add TP to the transmission view, than presented in the screen.
Expand:
Display the TPs related to a selected TP. See para.14.13.1 on page 249.
Next level of lower TP
All lower TP
Next level of upper TP
All upper TP
Hide:
Remove the TP from the screen of the Transmission view.

Lower TP
Upper TP
Selected TP
TP configuration:
ED
02

Set parameters for the Signal Label and Path trace.
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
31 / 448

management.
Set B2 Ex BER and Signal Degrade threshold.

Terminate TP:
Terminate the AU4CTP paths. See para.14.8 on page 235.
Disterminate TP:
Disterminate the AU4CTP paths. See para.14.8 on page 235
AU4 Concatenation
Only for SDH ports views. See para. 11.6 on page 148.
Cross Connection:
Manage the connection of the paths. See para.15 on page 253.

Cross Connection Management
Create Cross Connection
Modify Cross Connection
Port Switch Over
Show Cross Connected TPs
Monitoring Operation:
Set parameters for POM/ SUT/TCT/TCM TPs.

Creation / deletion
Configuration
Performance:


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Different menu are available:
Configure Performance Monitoring
Display Current Data
Display History Data
Structure TPs:
Loopback
ED
02
Define the structure of a selected TP (TU2, TU3, TU12, VC3/VC4, VC12)

:
Enter the loopback management. See para. 14.11 on page 242.

maintenance purposes:
Port Loopback Configuration
Loopback management
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
32 / 448

Physical Media:
Manage the TP physical setting. See para.14.12 on page 247.

ALS Management
Extra traffic
Regeneration Section management
Set Domain
HDSL Configuration (not operative)
NT Configuration (not operative)
X21 Configuration (not operative)
MSP

MSP Create
MSP Management
MSP Commands
MSP Delete
NE MSP synthesis
Show supported board:
Navigate to the board supporting the selected TP

Navigate to Port view:
Navigate to the port supporting the selected TP

2.2.12 Synchronization menu introduction
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This menu permits to set and show the Synchronization parameters and status, setting the relevant
configuration, by means of the following entries :
Timing Source Configuration: Set timing source priority and quality for the selected input reference.
Protection Command:
Manage commands (force, manual, lockout) for the selected timing

reference. See para.18.2.4 on page 364.
T0 Configuration:
Enable/disable SSM and WTR on the T0 synchronization source.

T4 Configuration:
Enable/disable SSM, WTR and Squelch Criteria on the T4

synchronization source. See para.18.2.5 on page 365.
SSU Configuration:
Set NE single or with SSU. See para.18.2.6 on page 368.
Transmitted SSM Quality Configuration: Set SSM quality transmitted on the selected T1 SDH
timing reference. See para.18.2.11 on page 375.
Frame Mode Configuration:

management.
Remove Timing Reference
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
33 / 448
Change T4<>T5:
Change the synchronization physical interface from 2MHz (T4)

to2Mbit/s (T5) without traffic and viceversa (see para18.2.8 on
page 370.
Change 2MHz>2Mbit
Change the source of a protection unit from 2Mhz (T3) to 2Mbit(T6)
and viceversa (see para. 18.2.9 on page 372).
Set T0 Equal T4
Remove T0 Equal T4
Show Timing Source:
Show the port view related to the selected timing reference.

2.2.13 External Points menu introduction

This menu permits to display and set the input/output environmental alarm (housekeeping alarm), by
means of the following entries:
Configuration:
Set the input/output environmental alarm.

Display:
Show the list of the input/output environmental alarm.

Show external Input Points
Show external Output Points
Show all external Points
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
34 / 448


Views
Backward
Forward
Equipment
A
F
Refer to Figure 7.
Refer to Figure 10.
External Points
Refer to Figure 10.
Transmission
Refer to Figure 9.
Synchronization
Refer to Figure 10.
Refresh
Open Object
Open in Window
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Close
Figure 4. Menu options flow chart 1
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
35 / 448
Configuration
Alarm Severities
Set Alarm Severities

Set SdhNe Alarm
Severities
NE Time
Performance
Threshold table
Local Configuration
OS Configuration
NTP Server
Configuration
Interfaces
Configuration
EPS overview
Set ACD level
Cross Connection
Management
Loopback
Management
OSI Routing
Configuration
IP Configuration
Comm/Routing

LAPD Configuration
Ethernet
Configuration
RAP Configuration
MESA Configuration
IP Static Routing
Configuration
OSPF Area
Configuration
IP Address Config.
of PointtoPoint
interfaces
ISA board IP
address
Overhead
MSP overview
PM Overview
Tunneling
Configuration
OH Cross
Connection
OSI over IP
IP over OSI
Oh Phone
Parameters
Port Mode
OH TP Creation
ISA port
Configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Alarm Persistency
Configuration
OH TP Deleting
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
36 / 448

Supervision
Diagnosis
NE alarms
Object alarms
OS
Access State
Requested
Subtree alarms
Alarms
Equipment alarms
Resynchronize
Transmission alarms
External Points
alarms
Alarm Log
Log Browsing
Alarms
Allow Notifs
Inhibit Notifs
Upload Remote
Inventory
Set Manager list
Event Log
Restart NE
Software Trace Log
View
Abnormal
Condition List
Remote Inventory
Internal Link
Monitor
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Data flow analyzer
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
37 / 448

Refer to Figure 4.
A
MS_SPRing
Download
Main Dialog for

MS_SPRing
management
Equipment
Init download
Set
Units info
Modify
Mib
Management
Remove
Refer to Figure 8.
Set in service
Set out of service
Reset
Software
description
Subrack level
Remote Inventory
Board level
ISA Board IP
Address
Show supporting
equipment
ISA Navigate NB.3
Connect FAN to
CONGI#04 NB.1
Connect FAN to
CONGI#10 NB.2
Connect FAN to
CONGI#12 NB.2
Notes:
NB.1 avaialble only if CONGI board has been selected
in the 1650SMC Subrack level view
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NB.2 available only if CONGI board has been selected

in the 1660SM Subrack levle view
NB.3 available only if an ISA ATM / ISA PREA / ISA ES board has been selected.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
38 / 448
Refer to Figure 7.

Port
Board
Port Access
Change Physical
Interface
Show supporting
equipment
ISA port
Configuration
TP configuration
Port Mode
Configuration
Enable
Disable
TP Thresholds
configuration
Cross Connection
Management
TP Frame mode
configuration nb1
Create Cross
Connection
Modify Cross
Connection
AU4
Concatenation nb2
Set Retiming
Creation / deletion
nb1
Configuration
Cross
Connection
Monitoring
Operations
Configure
Performance
Monitoring
nb2
Display Current
Data
Display History
Data
Performance
Port Loopback
Configuration
Loopback
Loopback
management
MSP Create
MSP
MSP Management
MSP Commands
MSP Delete
Physical Media:
with ETHERNET port

Remote laser
Management
ALS
Management
Ethernet port
Configuration
Ethernet mapping
Protocol
ISA port
Configuration
Control Path
Activation
LCAS
Configuration
with SDH port
ALS
Management
Show Optical
Configuration
Tx Quality
Configuration
Single Fiber
Configuration
LAPD config.
Ms Configuration
Show supporting
board
with PDH port
Navigate to
Transmission view
Refer to Figure 9.
HDSL
Configuration
Navigate to
Monitoring view
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Notes:
nb1: only for PDH port
nb2: only for SDH port
Line Lenght
Configuration
NT G703/G704
Configuration
Navigate to
HOA port
NT X21
Configuration
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
39 / 448
Next Level of
Lower TPs
All Lower TPs
Transmission
Next Level of
Upper TPs
Add TP

Refer to Figure 4.
All Upper TPs
Expand
Lower TPs
Upper TPs
Selected TPs
Hide
Port Mode
Configuration
Cross Connection
Management
TP configuration
Create Cross
Connections
TP Frame mode
configuration
Modify Cross
Connections
TP Threshold
Configuration
Port Switch Over
Terminate TP
Show Cross
Connected TPs
Disterninate TP
Creation / Deletion
Configuration
AU4 Concatenation
Cross Connection
Configure
Performance
Monitoring
Monitoring
Operations
Display Current
Data
Display History
Data
Performance
TU2
TU3
TU12
AU3
AU4
Structure TPs
VC3/VC4
VC12
Port Loopback
Configuration
Loopback
Loopback
management
Physical Media:
MSP Create
MSP Management
MSP Commands
MSP Delete
NE MSP synthesis
MSP
Show Supported
Boards
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Navigate to
Port View
Refer to Figure 8.
ALS Management
Show Optical
Configuration
TX Quality
Configuration
Single Fiber
Configuration
Extra traffic
Regeneration
Section management
Line Lenght
Configuration
Set Domain
HDSL
Configuration
NT
Configuration
X21
Configuration
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
40 / 448

Refer to Figure 4.
E
Eps
Refer to Figure 4.
Refer to Figure 4.

Synchronization
External Points
Configuration
Management
Configure
Switch
Timing Source
Configuration
Display
Show External
Input Points
Protection
Command
Show External
Output Points
T0 Configuration
T4 Configuration
Show All
External Points
SSU Configuration
Transmitted
SSM Quality
Configuration
Frame Mode
Configuration
Remove Timing
Reference
Change
T4 <> T5
Change
2MHz > 2Mbit
Set T0 Equal T4
Remove
T0 Equal T4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Show Timing
Source
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
41 / 448
2.3 Advices on Navigation principles
This general rules are described in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator Handbook.
In this paragraphs are instead inserted menu options typical for every NEs involved in Navigation and
example of Navigation.
To reach a particular view of the NE there are several ways (navigation is also possible mixing the different
ways):
double click on the selected object
select the object and use the Open object or Open in Window option of the View pull down
menu
use the Menu option tree structure. The View pull down menu permits to show the following
menus:
Equipment
Transmission
Synchronization
External Points
The menu structure permits to open the same window following several menu paths.
EXAMPLE: to obtain the Create Cross Connection window:
First navigation path:

Open View Transmission pull down menu
Open Transmission Cross Connection Cross Connection Management pull down
menu
Select Create option in the presented window
Second navigation path:

Open View Equipment pull down menu
Double click on Board body
Select the Board to access the Board view
Open Board Port Access pull down menu
Open Port Cross Connection Create Cross Connection pull down menu
Third navigation path:

Open Configuration Cross Connection Management pull down menu
Select Create option in the presented window
The menu structure also permits to pass from a view menu to another (i.e. from port view toboard view
or to transmission view) thus facilitating the operators activity.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Depending on which object the mouse arrow is located, a related popup menu can be activated by means
of the right button of the mouse; this menu is correspondent to the possible actions that can be done on
the specific object of the view.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
42 / 448

Navigation rules are the same for all the NE using the same Craft Terminal Info Model.

Views Navigation
The first level of the Equipment view representation will be displayed directly into the current window,
immediately after the NE login. (See Figure 1. on page 18, Figure 2. on page 19 and Figure 3. on page
20).
The Equipment view enables a fast navigation through all levels of the equipment hierarchy.
Navigation is done from higher to lower levels.
The NEs hierarchy is different organized according to the equipment type, as follow:
1660SM & 1650SMC:

Subrack > board > port > TP
The navigation through different levels of the NE hierarchy is performed by double clicking on the
objects (see also para 9.1, pg. 115):
the first level shows the subrack level of the Equipment view (see Figure 2. on page 19 and
Figure 3. on page 20);
by double clicking on a board body , the board level of the Equipment view can be reached.
further, by double clicking on a port body contained in the board, the port level of the Equipment
view can be reached. The port view displays the inner TPs.
it is possible to go back to the upper level of representation by pressing the <ESC> key on the
keyboard;
It is also possible to:
go back to the previous view, by selecting the Backward option from the views menu
go to the next view, by selecting the Forward option from the view menu.
N.B.
Selecting in the first level of the Equipment view ( subrack level, see Figure 2. on page
19 and Figure 3. on page 20 ) the Show supporting equipment option from the
Equipment menu, the Rack level view is presented.
In the Rack Level view two subracks are presented:
at the top the Equipment Subrack (example SR60M for 1660SM or SR50C for
1650SMC)
at the bottom the Fans Subrack, named SRFAN.
The Fans Subrack presence is managed with the Set option as for the boards of the
Equipment Subrack (refer to paragraph 9.2 on page 122 for details)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Further, selecting in the Rack level view the Show supporting equipment option from the
Equipment menu, the Equipment level view is presented.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
43 / 448
1640FOX:
objects (see also para 9.1, on page 115):
the first level shows the Rack level of the Equipment view (see Figure 1. on page 18); two
subracks are presented:
by double clicking on a Subrack body, the relevant subrack level of the Equipment view can be
reached.
by double clicking on a board body, the board level of the Equipment view can be reached.
view can be reached. The port view displays the inner TPs.
it is possible to go back to the previous level of representation by pressing the <ESC> key on
the keyboard; or:
go back to the previous view, by selecting the Backward option from the Views menu
go to the next view, by selecting the Forward option from the Views menu.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
at the top the Equipment Subrack SR40M

at the bottom the AC/DC Rectifier Subrack, named SR40R
Selecting, in the first level of the Rack view (rack level, see Figure 1. on page 18 ), the Show
supporting equipment option from the Equipment menu, the Equipment level overview is
presented.
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
44 / 448

Rack > Subrack > board > port > TP.
3 NE MANAGEMENT SUPERVISION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

This chapter is dedicated to the NE states and NE access.
3.1 NE management states

The elementary building blocks of any telecommunication network are the Network Elements (NEs).
Operating with the Craft Terminal the NE can present different management states according to the
condition of the connection (supervision, local access, connection state, etc). Also general Alarm status
are presented.
Management states are present at Network Element Synthesis view level and at USMEML view level.
All the information referred to the management states are inserted in the Basic Craft Terminal Operators
Handbook.
Any disruption in the communication link between the CT and the NE results in an update of the
management states when the CT has detected the communication failure.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
45 / 448
The Network Element Synthesis views enable you to get access to the current NE EMLUSM view
described in this handbook.
The Network Element Synthesis views enable you to work on local or remote NE, selecting it and
activating Supervision and Show Equipment, as described in the Basic Craft Terminal Operators
Handbook.
The EMLUSM Main view is presented as for the following figures.
LCA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 11. 1640FOX: EMLUSM Main view.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
46 / 448

3.2 NE supervision and login
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

LCA
Figure 12. 1650SMC: EMLUSM Main view.
LCA
Figure 13. 1660SM: EMLUSM Main view.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
47 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
48 / 448

4 NE MANAGEMENT GENERAL CONFIGURATION

In this chapter general configuration referred to the equipment management are described (Craft Terminal
access, NE Time, Alarms configuration, etc).
4.1 Access state (allow or inhibit NE Craft access)

The NE can be managed by the OS or by the Craft Terminal. To control the competition of the OS and the
CT, a Local Access Control (LAC) is available.
If the LAC is Granted! that means the CT is allowed to manage the NE, the icon LCA has a green
rectangular shape.
If the LAC is Denied that means the OS manages the NE and the CT is not allowed to modify NE
configuration (it can only read), the icon LCA has a cyan circular shape.
If the LAC is Requested! that means the CT has requested permission to the OS and is waiting for a
replay, the icon LCA has a blue circular shape.
However the OS does continue to provide a certain number of services. These services includes:
Reception and processing of alarms,

Performance processing on TPs,
Switching back to the OS access state.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The access state of an NE can be modified from two types of views:
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
49 / 448
Select the Supervision pull down menu. Then select the Requested option from the Access State
cascading menu as shown in the following figure.
Figure 14. NE management: setting the access state.

From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the Craft access operation
using the Yes or No push buttons. the request is up to the OS which accept or refuse it.
If the OS doesnt answer in a predefined time it is assumed that the NE is in the Craft access state
and can be managed from a Craft Terminal.
4.1.2 Switching from the Craft Terminal access state back to the OS access state
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Select the Supervision pull down menu. Then select the OS... option from the Access State
cascading menu in Figure 14.
From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the OS access operation.
The NE is now managed by the OS.
N.B.
The key symbol icon on the management states of the NE view, indicates whether the NE is
managed by a Craft Terminal or by the OS.
N.B.
Local Craft Terminal access is denied on recovery phase after a loss of communication of the
NE. When communication is lost with the NE, the OS automatically recovers the communication
and put the state that was set before the loss of communication (therefore the Craft Terminal
access can be denied or granted).
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
50 / 448

4.1.1 Switching from the OS to the Craft Terminal access state

4.2 NE Time management

The NE local time of a selected NE can be visualized and/or realigned on the OS time basis.
In this view the OS indication identifies the Craft Terminal.
The status of the Network Time Protocol can be checked
Select the NE Time... option from the Configuration pull down menu.
Figure 15. Consulting and/or setting the local NE time.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The following dialogue box is opened from which you can get and/or set the local NE time and check the
NTP Status.
Figure 16. NE Time dialogue box.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
51 / 448
The following fields are available:
NTP Status section (read only) with the following parameters:
NTP protocol
It can be enabled (in the NTP Server Configuration option at para 8.5 on page 98) or disabled
or empty (greyed).
NTP Main and NTP Spare

It displays the status of the Main and Spare NTP: reachable or unreachable.
Time section with the following data:
NE Time and OS Time

It displays (read only) the time of the Network Element and of the OS (Craft Terminal).
Set NE Time With OS Time

It permits to align the NE time with the time of the Craft Terminal.
Two different operative conditions can be defined:
NTP protocol enabled

In this case, NTP Main and NTP Spare will be reachable or unreachable. When both are reachable
the NE uses the Main.
The Set NE Time With OS Time message is not operative and the user cannot set manually the NE
Time.
NTP protocol disabled

In this case, the NTP Main and NTP Spare are empty (greyed); the Set NE Time With OS Time
message is operative and the user can set manually the NE Time (i.e. change the NE time with the
Time of the Craft Terminal).
If you do not want to set the NE local time, click on the Close push button to close the dialogue box.
To realign the NE time on the OS time basis click in the Set NE Time With OS Time radio button and either
click on the Apply push button to validate or on the Close push button to cancel and close the dialogue
box. The OS time comes from the PC date configuration which corresponds to the legal GMT time.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
When the NTP is not present, the OS system realigns the time of all supervised NEs
periodically and automatically with a configured periodicity. This periodicity is common for all
the NEs.
If you set the NE time, you will force the change, with an immediate effect on the NE. However
it will not have any effect on the periodic and automatic mechanism.
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
52 / 448

4.3 Alarm Configuration

The operations described in this chapter, mainly related to alarm setting, are:
Alarm Severity Assignment Profile management,

Allow/Inhibit alarm notification,
Alarm resynchronization.
4.3.1 Procedure to modify an ASAP

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
Select the TP (or the board/port/etc...) whose ASAP is to be changed

from the menu click on Configuration > Alarms Severities...
(see Figure 18. on page 54 ) select one of the user profiles (#10001 or #10002) and click on
Modify
(see Figure 19. on page 56) click on the Probable Cause Families associated to the alarm
select the relevant alarm in the list of Probable Cause Name
in the Service affecting/nonaffecting fields select the needed severity (critical/major/minor...)
click on OK
(see Figure 18. ) click on Close
select the relevant TP and then Configuration > Set Alarms Severities...
in the box that appears select the just modified ASAP (eventually check it by means of Detail)
click on OK
For further details see paragraphs 4.3.2, 4.3.2.1, 4.3.2.2.

4.3.2 Alarm Severity Assignment Profile Management (ASAP)
Managed entities yield alarms when they malfunction. This section deals with the configuration of ASAPs.
An ASAP is a list of Alarm probable causes to which Severities Profiles are assigned, predefined or
settable by the operator.
Three important notions are:
The Probable Cause of the alarm,

The Severity of the alarm.
The Alarm Type (communication alarm, equipment alarm).
4.3.2.1 Alarm Severities

This option permits to configure and display the ASAP.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Select the Alarm Severities... option from the Configuration pull down menu.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
53 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 17. Configuring Alarm Severity Assignment Profile.
The ASAP Management dialogue box is displayed.
Figure 18. ASAPs Management dialogue box.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
54 / 448

The default presented profiles are:
Profile All Alarms. With this profile all the alarms are enabled (only Sfwr Download Failure
is not alarmed).
This ASAP enables the emission of all alarms.
Profile No Remote Alarmsshows the alarm criterion configuration defined for path alarms
(only AIS and RDI and Sfwr Download Failure are not alarmed)
This ASAP enables the emission of all:
Communication Alarms (i.e. the AIS & RDI alarms are not alarmed)
Equipment alarms
Environmental
Error Processing (i.e. Sfwr Download Failure is not alarmed)
Profile Primary alarms. With this profile the AIS, Battery Degraded, Sfwr Download Failure,
SSF and RDI alarms are not alarmed.
This ASAP enables the emission of all:
Communication Alarms (i.e. the AIS, SSF & RDI alarms are not alarmed)
Equipment alarms
Environmental
Error Processing (i.e. Sfwr Download Failure is not alarmed)
Profile No Alarms : (i.e. all alarms disabled).

This ASAP inhibits the emission of any potential alarm.
Profile 10001 can be set by the user.

Each single alarm can be classified with a criterion selected by the operator.
A default standard configuration is set (Battery Degraded, Battery Failure, Communication
Subsystem Failure, Path Trace Mismatch are not alarmed).
NOTE: if this profile is not already present in the list, it is necessary to create it, by using the
dialog of Figure 18. , selecting one existing profile and then clicking on the Clone button.
Another Profile #10002 can be created by the user, as explained for the #10001; the profile
identifier is incremented automatically.
For ASAP 10001 and 10002 is then possible to choose Detail, Modify, Clone or Delete buttons.
For ASAP No Alarms , Primary alarms, No Remote Alarms and All Alarms it is only possible to
choose Detail, or Clone buttons.
Clone selection can be used to create new ASAP.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
By selecting an ASAP and clicking on Detail, Modify, or Clone button, the following ASAP edition dialogue
box is displayed.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
55 / 448

Figure 19. ASAP Edition dialogue box.

The alarm severity assignment profile dialogue box displays a list of probable causes and a list of alarm
severity.
The Probable Cause Families check buttons allows to filter the probable causes that will appear in the
Probable Cause Name list. NOTE: it is necessary to choose one or more of these filters to have the list.
To find a particular probable cause, enter its name in the Search entry box at the bottom.
ASAPs are already defined in the system with default values for the assigned severities.
You can modify the severity associated with each probable cause. To do this, select the probable cause
whose severity level you wish to modify.
Then click on the option button: Service Affecting (not protected probable cause), and then Non Service
Affecting (protected probable cause) and then Service Independent (dont used, it is not operative). For
each the severity can be chosen from Critical, Major, Minor, Warning, Nonalarmed or Not used.
A Nonalarmed probable cause corresponds to no alarm emitted for this probable cause.
When selecting Details the assigned severity are only shown and it isnt possible to modify.
When you have finished configuring ASAP, press the OK button to confirm the settings and close the
dialogue box or the Cancel push button to cancel the new settings and close the dialogue box.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
When Clone an ASAP the created one is identified with next number (10002, ....).
The max number of ASAP is six.
N.B.
The number of severities and the number of probable causes is fixed. The ASAP function only
enables the modification of the severities assigned to the probable causes, it does not allow the
addition, removal or modification of these severities and causes.
N.B.
To take into account a profile modification, it is mandatory to perform a resynchronization of

the alarms (see para. 4.3.5 on page. 65). During this resynchronization, the severity of each
alarm is updated. Otherwise, the severities are updated only when the modified or new alarms
are emitted by the NE.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
56 / 448

4.3.2.2 Set Alarm Severities

This option permits to send (i.e. to provision) the chosen ASAP to the previously selected object (rack,
subrack, board, port, TP).
If the severity profile is to be changed, it must be done by means of the Modify option, as described in
the previous paragraph (see procedure in paragraph 4.3.1, page 53).
It permits also to check the currently operative ASAP used by the object.
Select the Set Alarm Severities... option from the Configuration pull down menu as for Figure 17. on
page 54. Note: the Set Alarm Severities option is accessible only if an object has been selected.
The Set ASAP dialogue box is displayed (Figure 20. ). The List of ASAPs on the left side lists all available
ASAPs (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles). The ASAP currently operative on the object is highlighted.
To choose an ASAP select a new one of the presented list.
Clicking on Detail button, or doubleclicking on an ASAP, a dialogue box is displayed, as that in
Figure 19. , page 56, which displays detailed information about this ASAP.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 20. Set ASAP dialogue box (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
57 / 448
Choose Scope
Selected object only

The new ASAP is only applied to the object currently selected in the view.
This is the default if an object is selected in the view.
Network element
The new ASAP is applied to all objects of the NE matching the criteria specified in Choose Classes
and Choose current ASAP.
Since this application process takes some time, its progress is shown in the Section Execution
Monitoring.
This is the default if no object is selected in the view.
Selected object and subordinates

The new ASAP is applied to the selected object and those of its subordinates matching the criteria
specified in Choose Classes and Choose current ASAP.
Since this application process takes some time, its progress is shown in the Section Execution
Monitoring.
N.B.
Due to system architecture, AU4 CTPs are no subordinates of MSTTPs. Therefore, if the
AU4 CTP should be included as subordinate, select the related OSTTP (OpS) or ESTTP
(ElS) as main object.
Choose Class(es)
Enabled if one of the scopes Network element or Selected object and subordinates is selected.
All classes
Specific class(es)
Select one or more object classes the new ASAP shall be applied to.
Choose current ASAP

The new ASAP is only applied to objects which are currently assigned to this ASAP.
Execution Monitoring
Continuously shows the number of modified objects during the ASAP application process if one of the
scopes Network element or Selected object and subordinates is chosen.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Press Ok to confirm the ASAP assignment and close the dialog. Press Cancel to close the dialog and
discard any changes.
The TP list.... button let the operator to search for resources assigned to a specific ASAP and to change
ASAP on multiple object istances; for detail concerning the clipboard refer to paragraph 4.3.2.3 on page
59.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
58 / 448

Within the Apply to section on the right side, the user specifies the objects (TP or equipment) the ASAP
selected in the List of ASAPs (new ASAP) should be applied to:
4.3.2.3 Clipboard Dialog

Note:
Clipboard dialog is not called directly from a view menu entry . It is started as subdialog from
another dialog using the TP List button.
In principle, every dialog supporting clipboard can be the starting point to obtain a list of
resources assigned to an ASAP .
Use the Clipboard dialog to perform the same action, e.g. PM configuration, on a number of objects (TPs
or equipment) in one step.
Clipboard layout is depicted in Figure 21. on page 59.
Figure 21. Clipboard dialog layout

The list box on the left side of the dialog displays all the Objects (TPs or equipment) the user has selected
(refer to Figure 21. ) for the current action.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The buttons on the right side of the dialog are used to create a list of objects:
Add Tp Opens the TP Search dialog in which the user selects the TPs to be configured. The selected
TPs are added to the clipboard list.
Add EQP Opens the Equipment Filter dialog in which the user selects the equipment to be
configured. The selected equipment is added to the clipboard list.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
59 / 448
Delete Deletes the selected objects from the clipboard list.
Delete All Deletes all objects from the clipboard list.
Load/Save Opens the User Preference dialog where a preference set can be loaded or saved. If a
preference set has been loaded, the name of this set is displayed on the lower left side of the dialog.
Print The Print dialog opens and the user selects the print destination and print format.
Start Starts the action process on the listed objects. The semantics of the action is defined in the
calling dialog. After starting, an information window opens to cancel the action during its progress.
Click on Ok to cancel the process.
Continue Continues an action performed on the clipboard which was previously cancelled.
Close Closes the Clipboard dialog
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Clipboard dialog starts an improved version of TP search dialog (Figure 22. on page 60 ) (with support
for ASAP management and Performance Monitoring/Monitoring operations as well) using the AddTP...
button.
Figure 22. Tp search dialog with support for ASAP filtering
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
60 / 448


Add Eqp... button in clipboard starts the EqpSearch dialog with support for ASAP filtering Figure 23.
Figure 23. Equipment search dialog with ASAP filtering support
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The use case to search for ASAP assigned resources (both TPs and Eqp resources) could be summarized
in the following steps:
Open the ASAP Enhanced dialog
Push the TP list ... button to build up the clipboard dialog
From the clipboard dialog ask for TP by Add TP... button
In TP search use the ASAP filter to search for TPs using the selected ASAP.
Move the result of search operations into the clipboard.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
61 / 448
From the clipboard dialog ask for Equipment objects using the Add Eqp... button
In Eqp Search dialog use the ASAP filter to search for equipment objects using the selected ASAP.
The content of clipboard is the list of resources assigned to a specific ASAP. It is possible to change
the ASAP for this list of objects (since the first operation was the invoke of ASAP Enhanced dialog),
to select the object instance to move toward a view (according to the object instance type), to
load/save this object instance list and to Print it.
In Figure 24. on page 62 a representation of this use case is presented.
LCA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 24. Search for resources assigned to ASAP
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
62 / 448


4.3.3 Set SdhNE Alarms Severities

Selecting the Set SdhNE Alarms Severities option from the Configuration pull down menu only the
alarms at Equipment level are managed as reported in the table below.
Table 1. SDH NE alarms
SDH NEs managed alarms
1640FOX
1650SMC
1660SM
FF (not used)
FF
FF
ABF (not used)
ABF
ABF
CFF
BKF (not used)
BKF
SHD
SHD
SHD
Note: for details information on SDH NE alarms refer to Section 4 NE MAINTENANCE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 25. Set SdhNE Alarms Severities

If an object was selected in a view before opening this dialog, its ASAP is highlighted in the list. Using the
Detail button or doubleclicking on a list item opens the ASAP Edition dialog which displays detailed
information on this ASAP.
Press Ok to confirm the ASAP assignment and close the dialog. Press Close to close the dialog and
discard any changes.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
63 / 448
4.3.4 Allow/Inhibit Alarms Notifications
l)
To inhibit alarm notification,

Select the Supervision pull down menu. You can then select the Inhibit Notifs option from the Alarms
pull down menu as shown in the following figure.
Figure 26. Inhibit alarm notification

From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the operation using the Ok
or Cancel push buttons respectively.
To inform the operator that alarms have been inhibited, the labels of the alarm panel are greyed out.
N.B.
Inhibiting the alarms notification means that they are not forwarded to the CT but alarms
are still generated by the NE.
m ) To allow alarm notification

Select the Supervision pull down menu. You can then select the Allow Notifs option from the Alarms
pull down menu as shown in the following figure.
Figure 27. Allow alarm notifications
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the operation using the Ok
or Cancel push buttons respectively.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
64 / 448

The system provides the possibility to allow/inhibit the spontaneous incoming alarm notifications.

4.3.5 Alarms resynchronization

The system provides the possibility to recover alarms present on the NE and to update the current problem
list of the NE. After this operation CT and NE current alarms are consistent.
To resynchronize the alarms, select the Supervision pull down menu. You can then select the
Resynchronize option from the Alarms pull down menu as shown in the following figure.
Figure 28. Alarm resynchronization

From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the operation using the Ok or
Cancel push buttons respectively.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
This functionality has to be used only if there is any perturbation. Never use this operation during
a correct behavior.
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
65 / 448
This feature has the aim to avoid transient alarm conditions on 2Mbit/s signals. To get this goal the network
element perform a persistency check on the fault causes, before declaring a failure. Once the failure is
declared, it shall be cleared if the fault cause is absent continiously for a persistency time.
Select the Alarm Persistency Configuration option from the Configuration pull down menu.
The Alarm Persistency Configuration dialog box is displayed:
Figure 29. Alarm Persistency Time configuration window
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
It is possible to choose between two options:
Default value : raising time O.25 sec; clearing time 5 sec

UMTS Network: raising time 30 sec; clearing time 30 sec
Customize is not operative in current release

Click on Ok button to confirm the selected value.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
66 / 448

4.3.6 Alarms Persistency Configuration
4.4 Restart NE

The restart operation is a software reset and can be executed in normal traffic conditions.
The restart operation in any case activates the Commit (active) version.
Select the Restart NE option from the Supervision cascading menu.
The following dialogue box is opened.
Figure 30. Restart NE confirmation

Click on the OK push button to perform the restart NE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Click on the Cancel push button to abort the restart NE.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
67 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
68 / 448
5 SECURITY MANAGEMENT

In this chapter are inserted setting options referred to the SECurity management:
5.1 Set Manager list

This option is referred to the SECurity management and allows the user to set the Manager list and the
Access Control Domain of the NE.
Select the Set Manager list option from the Supervision pull down menu.
The dialogbox contains the following fields:
Manager list: each connected manager to the NE is highlighted in the list. The user can set a
manager clicking on the denomination.
Several manager can be enabled contemporaneously, having in charge the NE.
The Manager List contains the list of managers ( i.e. RM, SY, NPOS , EML) that work on the NE.
The EMLUSM administrator (SH or Craft Terminal) should set the Manager List only to remove a
manager in case of emergency (i.e. the Manager misses the NE connection).
NE Domain field allow to select the domain among that displayed in the list, assigning it to the NE.
The different domains could be assigned to different operators.
OK button is used to validate the selection.

Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data.
Help button provides some useful information about the dialog.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 31. Set Manager list
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
69 / 448
5.2 Set ACD level
The ACD manage the concurrence of access among several different managers (i,e. RM and EML).
This only acts on the functions that can be used by different manager.
Select the Set ACD level option from the Configuration pull down menu.
Current ACD level

Show the Access Control Domain level currently set.
The Select new ACD Level

Permit to set one of three level checks. By the way, this is an operation that should be performed only
during the EMLUSM installation phase:
Port Level
NE level, the ACD is performed on all the NEs
No Check, the ACD is not managed

The default value is NE level. If it is changed, it is necessary to restart the EMLUSM.

Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 32. Set ACD level
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
70 / 448

This option allows the user to select the level of the Access Control Domain.
6 EXTERNAL INPUT AND OUTPUT POINTS MANAGEMENT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

This chapter describes how to display and set the input/output environmental alarm (housekeeping alarm),
An external input point is an environmental alarm (also called housekeeping alarm). It corresponds to an
external event which is monitored by the NE. Number of relays on the NE are dedicated to check
modification of the environment as for example a fire, a flood ...
An external output point is used to manage a NE contact (i.e relay) connected to detector. An external
output point is independent from external input point.
The operations that can be undertaken in this section are:
Displaying external points,
Expanding or reducing external points list,
Configuring input and output external points.
Note: the max. number of External Points depends by the equipment type (1640FOX, 1650SMC,
1660SM) and board type were applicable ( example CONGI 3 Wire or CONGI 2 Wire boards equipped
in 1650SMC and 1660SM); for details refer to the relevant Technical Handbook.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
71 / 448
6.1 Displaying external points

Select the External Points option from the Views pull down menu as shown in the following figure.
Figure 33. Opening the external points view.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
After selecting this menu option the external points view is displayed into the current window instead of
the current view.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
72 / 448

LCA
Figure 34. External points view (example)

The external points view displays a list of all input and output points.
The following information is given for each external point:
the external point Type: Input or Output.

the User Label: a userfriendly label associated to the configurable external point (see further the
paragraph External points configuration).
the External State: represents the alarm state. On when the alarm is raised, else Off. If the external
point is active (On), a little red flag is represented near the status of the concerned point.
Only for the Output external point there is the following information:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
the Output criteria: if configurated, display the alarm event and the board affected associated to the
Output point (see further the paragraph External points configuration).
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
73 / 448
The external points view displays a complete list of the external points but it can also be restricted to the
input or to the output points.
To see either the input points, the output points or all the external points, select the appropriate option from
the External Points pull down menu as shown in the following figure.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 35. Expanding or reducing the external points list.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
74 / 448

6.1.1 Expanding or reducing external points list.
6.2 External points configuration

The configuration operations available on external points are:
user labels configuration

external state. Can be set for output points (ON or OFF)
Output criteria associated to the External output point
To configure an external point, click on the concerned row of Figure 34. on page 73 and then select the
Configuration option from the External Points pull down menu as shown in the following figure.
Figure 36. Configuring external points.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The following dialogue boxes are then opened, displaying information about the selected external point
(Input or Output).
Figure 37. External input point configuration dialogue box (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
75 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 38. External output point configuration dialogue box (MANUAL).
Figure 39. External output point configuration dialogue box (FLEXIBLE)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
76 / 448
Opening the dialog the current state of the selected External Point is shown.

[1]
[2]
External Input Point Configuration
Type: In the field the name of the involved Input point is displayed (e.g. ExtP#8 in Figure 37. )
User Label: this field can be filled by the user with a Label that indicate the associated event
that must be taken under check (for example presences of water or fire in the room where the
Equipment is placed)
External State: this field is set to off and cant be changed by the operator
Probable Cause: this field is set to housekeeping and cant be changed by the operator
External Output Point Configuration
Type: In the field the name of the involved Output point is displayed (e.g. ExtP#8 in Figure 38. )
User Label: this field can be filled by the user with a Label that indicate the alarm detected or
the action that must be executed if a specific event occur (for example a Pump activation when
water is present in the room where the equipment is placed)
External State: can be set to on (alarm) or off (non alarm) only if Manual option has been
selected in the Output Criteria field.
Output Criteria can be configured as :
Manual (forced). The output contact is set in a fixed way , not depending on a particular
event.
For example the output contact could be used to Manually activate a pump to drain water
from the room where the equipment is placed ; in this case is also necessary to set the
option On in the field External State.
Flexible. It is possible to define from CT the couple event/CPO#, where the event is
chosen between a set of Output Criteria (LOS, RDI and LOF) and specifies the STMN
interface which the Output Criteria refers to by clicking on Choose button; subsequently
the TP search dialog box will be opened.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
When the configuration of the external point is completed, click on the OK push button to validate the
choice and close the dialogue box. The Cancel push button cancels the configuration and closes the
dialogue box.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
77 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
78 / 448

7 DIAGNOSIS MANAGEMENT
Alarms are always present on the operators workspace. The different types of alarms, their number and their
severity level, are represented in all Equipment views (NE views, Board views and Port views). An icon
representation is used, which change color when the relevant alarm is active. Thus, at all times, you know the
number of alarms and their severity relating to the equipment.
Access to the Alarm Surveillance to show the alarm condition is detailed in the following paragraph.
Than is presented the abnormal condition list (as result of operators command such us loop, laser forced
on etc.).
At the end the Event log access is introduced.
Information about the significance of equipment alarms and status is given in the Maintenance
section of this handbook.
7.1 Alarms surveillance

In this chapter is described the access to the Alarm Surveillance information of the NE.
It is possible to show all the Alarms or filter the alarms report.
Select the Diagnosis pull down menu. You can then select the following option from the Alarms pull down
menu (see the following figure):
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NE Alarms:
all the NE alarms are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report which is
activated
Object Alarms:
only the alarms of the selected object are listed in the Alarm Surveillance
report
Subtrees Alarm:
only the alarms of the selected object and of the relevant subtrees are
listed in the Alarm Surveillance report
Equipment Alarms:
only the alarms of the equipment management are listed in the Alarm
Surveillance report
Transmission Alarms: only the alarms of the transmission management are listed in the Alarm
Surveillance report
External Points Alarms: only the alarms of the input external point management are listed in the
Alarm Surveillance report
Figure 40. Alarm Surveillance
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
79 / 448
This view shows first a synthesis of the NE alarms (Counter Summary) with the sum of all alarms, then
a detailed list of alarms of the selected filter (Alarms Sublist).
LCA
Figure 41. Alarm Surveillance (example)

Detailed information for each alarm is supplied.
For example the board in which the alarm is detected, the status of the alarm, the alarm type, the probable
cause.
The information supplied help the operator, typically during troubleshooting operation, presented in next
section of this handbook. (Maintenance section, where more details about alarms are given).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Detailed description is given in the AS Operators Handbook.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
80 / 448

Selecting any of the previously seen options, the Alarm surveillance report is displayed as for the example
of the following figure.

7.2 Abnormal Condition List

The abnormal condition provides the synthesis of NE not normal conditions listinig the events that
contribute to abnormal condition. Select Diagnosis>Abnormal Condition List ( see Figure 42. on page
81). Figure 43. on page 81 is opened.
Figure 42. Abnormal condition menu option
Figure 43. Example of abnormal condition list
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The abnormal condition are the following:
ED
Loopback
ALS is disable and the laser is forced on or off
Protection units (in case of EPS, SNCP and MSP ) are in lockout or in forced status
Board (or subboard) is placed in a not configured slot

02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
81 / 448

Select an abnormal condition and click on OK to open the relative dialog window. Figure 44. on page
82 is opened.
Figure 44. Example of loopback dialog window management
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The other abnormal condition types will open the corrisponding management window or will open the
window to navigate towards the management window.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
82 / 448

7.3 Internal Link Monitor

The following description refers to the 1660SM equipment. The same description can be
applied to 1640FOX and 1650SMC taking into account the following rules:
MATRIX (present in 1660SM) equivalent board in 1640FOX and 1650SMC is called

COMPACTADM.
1640FOX can be equipped with only one COMPACT ADM board (main)
This function improves, at the user interface level, the diagnostic associated to the hardware failure.
The presence of a failure on RX or TX side for the signal incoming/outgoing from/to the active MATRIX
is detected.
Internal Link Monitor displays a detailed localization of the link failure: a graphical representation of the
status of the link among the active and standby MATRIX is shown.
Select the Internal Link Monitor option of the Diagnosis menu.
As shown in Figure 45. on page 84 the first page displays the link status for the main MATRIX, the second
one concern the spare MATRIX.
In detail, each page contains the following functional blocks and graphical objects:
the tab of the page displays the user label of the MATRIX board;
the left side of the page displays the block representing the MATRIX board;
the right side of the page displays the list of blocks representing the equipped boards; each
block displays a string contained the user label of the associated board;
two arrows are displayed between the MATRIX block and each board block; the two arrows
represent the link status in Rx and Tx side:
a red arrow indicates a link failure

a green arrow indicates a working link
the Refresh button allows to perform an explicit refresh of all the displayed information.
In order to indicate all the possible roots of the link failure, all boards that detect the link failure are
represented by a red block in the page of the MATRIX main:
a port board is represented by a red block if a link problem is detected in the NGI Rx from the
active MATRIX;
the MATRIX is represented by a red block if a link problem is detected in one of the NGI Tx from
one of the possible port board.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
83 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 45. Internal Link Monitor (1660SM example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
84 / 448

7.4 Log Browsing

From the Network Element context views, perform the following operations to have access to the Event
Log file:
In the Diagnosis pulldown menu, select the Log Browsing option. The following options are
proposed:
Figure 46. Log Browsing option in Network Element context view

The proposed option:
Select the Alarm Log option (Log Id # 1 ) to access the Event Log file.
The Configuration and Log Browsing ELB Windows open, permitting to analyze all alarms
stored in the NE.
Refer to the ELB Operators Handbook
Select the Event Log option (Log Id # 2 ) to access the Event Log file.
The Configuration and Log Browsing ELB Windows open, permitting to analyze all events
stored in the NE.
Refer to the ELB Operators Handbook
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Software Trace Log option is reserved to Alcatel personnel only.
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
85 / 448
This paragraph describes the access to the remote inventory of this NE.
In the Remote Inventory are stored information of identification, construction data ect.
The options used are:
Upload Remote Inventory: store the Remote Inventory data in the Craft Terminal.
View Remote Inventory: display the remote inventory data, previously stored in the Craft Terminal
by means the upload remote inventory performed in the Supervision menu.
Remote Inventory option of the Equipment menu is instead presented in para. 9.6 on page 130.
7.5.1 Upload remote Inventory
This command stores the Remote Inventory data in the Craft Terminal.
Select the Upload Remote Inventory option of the Supervision pull down menu.
The following confirmation dialog box is opened.
Figure 47. Remote Inventory confirmation request

Clicking on OK after a while an information dialog box is presented.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 48. Remote Inventory completed
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
86 / 448

7.5 Remote Inventory

7.5.2 View Remote Inventory

This command displays the remote inventory previously stored in the Craft Terminal by means the Upload
remote inventory.
Select the View Remote Inventory option of the Diagnosis pull down menu.
The Remote inventory data appears as for the following figure.
Figure 49. View Remote Inventory (example)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Data is displayed in specific fields:
ED
Company
It indicates the Companys (Alcatels branch) which designs the unit.
Refer to Alcatel for the abbreviations meaning (four characters).
Unit Type
It indicates the units acronym
Unit Part Number

It indicates Alcatel or Factory products Part No.. The number indicated is that printed on the
labels or on the units front coverplate.
Software Part Number

It indicates the id. of the units resident software
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
87 / 448
CLEI Code
It indicates the CLEI code according to Bellecore specs. TRISD325
Manufacturing plant
It indicates the Companys manufacturing plant id. within the company, producing the unit.
Refer to Alcatel for the abbreviations meaning (four characters).
Serial Number
It indicates the products serial number as specified by the NR 130 Norm.
Date identifier
It indicates the meaning of the date that follow.
It is a twodigit code supplying the following information:
00
01
02
03
04
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
date of construction at the time of final testing

production order data
construction date of the unit lot
date product has been forwarded to customer
customer order date
Date (YYMMDD)
The identification of the date depends on the indications stated in the previous field. When only
the year is displayed, the format must be YY
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
88 / 448


8 COMMUNICATION AND ROUTING MANAGEMENT

8.1 Overview on Communication and Routing Domain
The purpose of the communication and routing domain is to define configuration parameters concerning
the communication protocols for the local NE, the OS and each other related NE in order to provide a
global communication capabilities inside the network.
8.1.1 OSI Protocol on QB3/Qecc
A brief description of basic concepts and terms involved in the communication and routing domain follows.
During the TMN design process, a network is partitioned into domains; each domain can consist of a
collection of two types of nodes:
nodes supporting a link state routing protocol ISIS; these nodes will be called adaptive
routers; ISIS protocol floods the network with link state information in order to build a complete
consistent picture of the network topology. Use of ISIS routing protocol in a TMN facilitates
installation and operation due to the self learning capabilities of these protocols and automatic
network reconfiguration in case of failure; moreover the use of these standardized routing
protocols guarantees interoperability in a multivendor environment.
nodes not supporting these protocols; these nodes will be called static routers;
Networks partitions consisting of the former type of node will be called adaptive routing domains;
networks partitions consisting of the later type of node will be called static routing domains.
Moreover, a node which have to take routing decisions must became Intermediate Systems, all others
can be made End Systems
For the description of the following paragraphs use is made of Figure 50. on page 90. It is not a network
planning example, it is only used to describe L1 ,L2, RAP and MESA.
8.1.1.1 OSI Partitioning into Routing Subdomains
In order to reduce the overhead associated with distributed adaptive routing, it may be useful to divide
a adaptive routing domain into smaller routing subdomains, called areas or level 1 subdomain. A level
1 subdomain should fulfill the following requirements:
a level 1 subdomain should form a connected subnetwork; this subnetwork should have only
a few links to the outside world, compared with the number of internal links;
each node must belong to exactly one level 1 subdomain;
each node which is connected to a foreign level 1 subdomain must become a level 2
intermediate system; level 1 intermediate systems know how to communicate only with IS
in the same area; obviously, there must be at least one level 2 intermediate system per level
1 subdomain;
Level 2 intermediate systems must form a connected network, because level 1 paths cannot
be utilized for level 2 communication. This network will be called level 2 backbone.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In the most simple case, all nodes within a level 1 subdomain share the same area address.
In general it is allowed to have multiple synonymous area addresses within a level 1 subdomain even if
the usage of this features should be checked with Alcatel engineers.
The synonymous list is used to ease partitioning in the future. There is a basic rule, which must be followed
by two neighboring level 1 intermediate systems within a subdomain: there must be at least one area
address in common between their two synonymous list, otherwise they are not able to communicate with
each other.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
89 / 448
In certain situations it may be necessary to partition a given network into separate routing domains, where
no routing information is exchanged between these domains. The major benefits of this partitioning are
reduction of memory, processing and traffic overhead, because there is no exchange of routing
information between the domains. Communication between separate routing domains must be achieved
through the use of Reachable Address Prefixes (RAP).
A Reachable Address Prefixes represents static routing information. It can only be associated with a link
of a level 2 intermediate system, whereby this link crosses routing domain boundaries. A Reachable
Address Prefixes is handled in the same way as information about a foreign level 1 subdomain within the
own domain. The Reachable Address Prefixes indicates that any packet whose destination network
address NSAP matches the prefix may be forwarded via the link with witch the prefix is associated.
For example, consider network which is split into two separate routing domains:
routing domain A resides in a level 1 subdomain with area address a
routing domain B resides in a level 1 subdomain with area address b

In order to enable the communication, the Reachable Address Prefixes in routing domain A must contain
the area address b and the Reachable Address Prefixes in routing domain B must contain the area
address a.
On the other hand, within a given level 1 subdomain, there can be some NEs not supporting ISIS nor
ESIS protocol (static routing). In such condition, the communication can be achieved through the use
of Manual End System Adjacencies (MESA).
A prerequisite for the use of manual end system adjacencies is that the area addresses of the connected
nodes must be the same; as a consequence the nodes must belong to the same level 1 subdomain.
Within a pure Alcatel network there is no need to use any kind of static routing. Therefore normally RAP
and MESA shall never be used.
AREA (subdomain) 1
L1
L1
L1
L1
L1
L1
L1
L1
L1
L1
L1
L1
L1
L2
L2
L1 with MESA
L1
L2
AREA (subdomain) 2
L2
L2
L1
= NE not supporting ISIS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
L1
with RAP
= NE
L2
L1
L1 with MESA
L1
AREA (subdomain) 3
Figure 50. Routing subdomain organization example
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
90 / 448

8.1.2 OSI Partitioning into separate Routing Domains

8.1.3 IP over OSI tunneling for ISA board

This feature is applicable to NEs equipped with ISA boards (excepted ETHERNET and PR board)
It permits to create a tunnel over OSI systems, to communicate IP management messages through an
OSI network; it encapsulates the SNMP messages of the TCP/IP protocol stack over the OSI stack, using
CLNP,LAPD,ECC protocols, and an OSI address. In this way the message reaches its final destination
without repeated IP decapsulation/encapsulation in the intermediate nodes.
8.1.4 OSI over IP tunneling on QB3
This feature is not applicable to 1640FOX
This feature allows the Element Manager to reach the GNEs (and all the relevant NEs behind them) by
using IP networking.
This would permit to use an external DCN based on IP only. Hence, no OSI networking would be required
on the external DCN.
OSI over IP technique is used to meet the target. OSI packets leaving the SH are encapsulated into IP
packets within the SH system itself. Hence, packets leaving the SH are IP packets, containing the original
OSI packet.
Once the packet get the NE through a pure IP network, the GNE has to strip off the IP encapsulation,
extracting the OSI packet, and to route the OSI packet as it does today using a pure OSI networking.
Hence, the internal networking of the SDH network (DCCs) is still based on OSI. No IP packets shall flow
inside DCCs, because the GNE receives the IP packet containing the OSI packet, deletes the IP header,
and forwards only the OSI packet on DCCs.
The default OSI lower layers networking can be replaced by IP routing capability at the bottom of the
QB3/QECC communication protocol suite; the choice is software switchable at NE level. The
implementation adopts the RFC1006 standard to put the OSI upper layers on top of IP networking.
The application goal is to offer the TCP/IP transport (i.e. Internet compatibility) in alternative to the full
ISO/OSI communication protocols, in the complete DCN network or at least in a consistent portion of it.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 51. depicts the protocol architecture.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
91 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 51. OSI over IP tunneling on QB3
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
92 / 448

8.2 Communication and routing views

To access select Comm/Routing option from the Configuration pull down menu as shown in the
following figure.
The Communication and Routing Views allows to perform the following operations:
Local Configuration:
definition of the local NE addresses
OS Configuration:
addressing of the main and spare OSs connected to the local NE
NTP Server Configuration:addressing of the main and spare NTP servers connected to the local NE
Interfaces Configuration subdivided in:
LAPD Configuration:
definition of the LAPD port parameters for each LAPD channel

on the local NE
Ethernet Configuration:
definition of configuration parameters needed to manage a

local NE which provides a LAN ethernet interface
OSI Routing Configuration subdivided in:
RAP Configuration:
configuration of parameters necessary to the addressing of NE

connected by Reachable Address Prefixes in a domain different
from the one of the local NE. These information are stored in
RAP table.
MESA Configuration:
configuration of parameters necessary to the addressing of non

ISIS NE in the same domain as the one of local NE.
These information are stored in MESA table.
IP Configuration subdivided in:
IP Static Routing Configuration:
definition of Host/Network destination address for IP

static routing
OSPF area Configuration:
definition of Open Shortest Path First address
IP Address Config. of PointtoPoint interfaces: definition of the Equipment Controller IP

address
ISA board IP address:
definition of the ISA board IP address
Tunneling Configuration subdivided in:
OSI over IP:
definition of destination IP address for OSI over IP tunneling.

IP over OSI:
definition of destination NSAP address and type of IP routing for

IP over OSI tunneling
All the previously cited operation can be entered choosing the relevant option of the menu, as shown in
the Figure 52.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The options are described in next paragraphs.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
93 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 52. Comm/Routing options
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
94 / 448

8.3 Local Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing option and then from the cascading
menu the Local Configuration option.
The dialogbox opens (Figure 53. ) and allows to configure the local address of the NE.
The following fields are present:
a Local Address section contains the following graphical object:
a Presentation Selector (P.Sel) identifies a presentation entity at the location identified by the
NSAP Address. The presented value must not be modified.
a Section Selector (S. Selector) identifies a section entity at the location identified by the NSAP
Address. The presented value must not be modified.
a Transport Selector (T. Sel) identifies a transport entity at the location identified by the NSAP
Address. The presented value must not be modified.
a Network Service Access Point (NSAP) Address identifies a location in the network. The first
field of the NSAP address, AFI, determines the NSAP format.
The AFI filed is 2 characters long (2 exadecimal digits) and, depending on the its value, the
length of NSAP address is variable from 16 characters to 40 characters:
the value of AFI 49 identifies the local format of variable length (from 16 characters to 40
characters).
the value of AFI 39 identifies the ISODCC format of 40 characters long.
the value of AFI 47 identifies the GOSIPV2 format of 40 characters long.

Field after AFI: (optional: if not used must be allzero), area address and organization
identifier.
In all cases the last two fields of the NSAP address are:
System Id: uniquely identifies a NE in an area and is 12 characters long

It might be the equipment MAC Ethernet address, level 2, inserted in the NE (check the
value in the para. 8.7 on page 102 ) or it might be selected by the operator.
Network Selector: provides the distinction among users of the network service and is 2
characters long (value is 1d).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In the view, the NSAP is managed as simple strings of characters without any preformatting
because of the variable format:
a first string of two characters that identifies the AFI field
a second string of variable length that identifies the remaining NSAP address
Synonymous Area Addresses section allows to have multiple synonymous area addresses within a
level 1 subdomain. The compilation of the two network addresses is optional and if they are inserted,
the last two fields, System Id and Network Selector, of the mandatory address and of the synonymous
addresses must be the same.
System Type section determines whether the local NE acts as a intermediate system level 1 or as
a intermediate system level 2 or as a End System. Note that a level 2 intermediate system
performs functions of a level 1 too. End System is not operative.
Ok button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialogbox and closes
it; the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
95 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 53. Local Configuration
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
96 / 448

8.4 OS Configuration
menu the OS Configuration option.
The dialogbox opens (Figure 54. ) and allows to configure the addresses of the Main and Spare OSs
connected to the local NE.
Main OS Address section contains the same graphical object of the Local Address Section in the
Local Configuration dialogbox.
Spare OS Address section contains the same graphical object of the Local Address Section in the
Local Configuration dialogbox.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 54. OS Configuration
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
97 / 448
menu the NTP Server Configuration option.
The dialogbox opens (Figure 55. ) and allows to configure the addresses of the Main and Spare NTP
(Network Protocol synchronization Time) Servers connected to the local NE, used for time distribution in
the network.
Enabling NTP Protocol section allows to enable or disable the NTP Protocol.
Main NTP Server Address section contains the same graphical object of the Local Address Section
in the Local Configuration dialogbox.
Spare NTP Server Address section contains the same graphical object of the Local Address Section
in the Local Configuration dialogbox.
If the NTP server is coincident with the OS (same hardware), the same NSAP address of the OS must be
assigned.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 55. NTP Server Configuration
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
98 / 448

8.5 NTP Server Configuration

8.6 LAPD Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing>Interfaces Configuration
option and then from the cascading menu the LAPD Configuration option.
The LAPD Configuration dialog opens (see Figure 56. on page 100, this example has one LAPD
Interface configured).
It contains the following functional block and graphical objects:
a section named LAPD Interfaces List that allows the user:
to display the list of configured LAPD Interfaces using a graphical table;

to change the role of the LAPD Interface selected in the LAPD Interface List;
to delete the LAPD Interface selected in the LAPD Interface List;
to create a new LAPD Interface.
This section contains the following graphical objects:
the number of LAPD interface displayed in the LAPD Interface List;

the LAPD Interface List that lists all the configured LAPD Interfaces; for each LAPD Interfaces,
the table displays:
the user label of the TTP containing the configured LAPD Interface (MS/RS TTP);
the LAPD role that contains one of the following value:
User
(one end of the link)
Network
(the other end of the link)
Delete button that allows to delete the LAPD Interface selected in the LAPD table;
Change Role button that allows to change the role (User or Network) of the LAPD Interface
selected in the table (after selection the Figure 58. on page 101 is shown to confirm action
required);
Create button that allows to create a new LAPD Interface; this button starts a new dialog (see
Figure 57. on page 101) named Create LAPD Interface; it is disabled when the maximum
number of LAPD Interface has been configured.
This Create LAPD Interface dialog contains the following functional blocks and graphical
objects:
a section named Search Criteria that allows the user to display only the LAPDs of the selected type
in the LAPD Table; the section contains the following graphical objects:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
the field Interface Type that allows to select the type of the LAPDs to be displayed in the LAPD
Table; the field will manage both ADM and WDM DCC type; the value Ignore will allow to
display all the LAPD types;
the Search button starts the search of the selected LAPD type; this buttons can be used to
refresh the LAPD table too.
ED
a Choose button that allows the operator to select the superior TTP of the LAPD Interface
to be created; this button starts the TP Search dialog; the TP Search dialog will be
configured in order to display in the right tree only the allowed TTP of the LAPD Interface
i.e. RSTTP or MSTTP;
a section LAPD Role that allows to configure the role (User or Network) of the LAPD
Interface to be created.
This connection is a must to establish endtoend connection between two NEs: if one
end is configured with User role, the other end connected must be configured with Network
role.
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
99 / 448

The LAPD Interface List will be updated on reception of the Delete/Create/Change DCC CTP
notification. If no LAPD Interface are configured in the equipment, the message No LAPD Interface
will be displayed near LAPD Interface counter (that it is at zero).
Figure 56. LAPD Configuration dialog (example)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
100 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 57. Creation LAPD Interface
Figure 58. Confirmation to change LAPD Role
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
101 / 448
8.7 Ethernet Configuration
Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing > Interfaces Configuration
option and then from the cascading menu the Ethernet Configuration option.
The dialogbox opens (Figure 59. ) and allows to define the parameters needed to manage a NE which
provides a LAN ethernet interface .
The following fields and data are present:
Ethernet Interface field allows to define or remove a Local Area Network Port for the access to the
Data Communication Network.
MAC Address section allows to display the address of the Network Element in the Ethernet LAN;
it is a readonly field.
OSI Section:
L2 only Parameter field indicates if the port shall be used for level 2 traffic only, thus avoiding
transmitting L1 packets. Note that the flag shall be set to No if some other nodes (NEs or OSs)
of the same area of the relevant NE are connected to the Ethernet.
One example is indicated in Figure 60. on page 103.
L1 Default Metric is a not modifiable field , Priority field can be set ( default value for ethernet
is 64)
L2 Default Metric is a not modifiable field , Priority field can be set ( default value for ethernet
is 64)
IP Section section allows to define the node IP Address, IP Mask and the Routing IP Protocol used;
If OSPF or Both options of Routing IP Protocol field are selected, also the Associated OSPF
Area must be set.
Apply button performs a configuration change of the data.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
102 / 448

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 59. Ethernet Configuration
AREA 1
AREA 2
OS
LAN
L2
NE
No
ED
02
L2
NE
No
L2
AREA 3
NE
Yes
Figure 60. Ethernet Configuration L2 only parameter
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
103 / 448

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing > OSI Routing Configuration
option and then from the cascading menu the RAP Configuration option.
The dialogbox opens (Figure 61. ) and allows to configure the Reachable Address Prefix table.
Each element of the RAP table allows to link a LAPD port or a LAN port of the local NE to a separate
domain; the separate domain is selected by the address Prefixes. If the addressed element is the OS, the
LAN port will be used.
The view simulates a real notebook; it allows the user to select the pages of the notebook using the pointing
device (upper part of the figure); each page represents a particular element of the RAP table and the
respective pointing device displays the element counter.
In detail, each page contains the following data:
Physical Interface button
if the element is empty, displays the none value and allows to select a LAPD ports or a LAN
port which will be used to reach the addressed area.
if the element isnt empty, displays the selected port and allows to change it.
Area Address Prefix section allows the user to address the separate domain. The Area Address
Prefix represents a NSAP address without the fields System Id and Network Selector.
MAC Address section allows to address the element of a domain to be reached the Ethernet LAN;
the field is managed as a simple strings of 12 digit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete RAP table
and close the view; the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.
New button is used to insert a new page.
Delete button is used to delete the selected page.
Figure 61. RAP Configuration
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
104 / 448

8.8 Reachable Address Prefixes Configuration

8.9 Manual ES Adjacencies table Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing > OSI Routing Configuration
option and then from the cascading menu the MESA Configuration option.
The dialogbox opens (Figure 62. ) and allows to configure the Manual ES Adjacencies table.
Each element of the MESA table allows to link a LAPD port or a LAN port of the local NE to a End System
element; the ES element must be in the same area as the one of the local NE. If the addressed element
is the OS, the LAN port will be used.
The view simulates a real notebook; it allows the user to select the pages of the notebook using the pointing
device (upper part of the figure); each page represents a particular element of the MESA table and the
respective pointing device displays the element counter.
In detail, each page contains the following data:
Physical Interface button
if the element is empty, displays the none value and allows to select a LAPD ports or a LAN
port which will be used to reach the End System element.
if the element isnt empty, displays the selected port and allows to change it.
System Id section represents the System Id of the ES element.
MAC Address section allows to address the element in the Ethernet LAN; the field is managed as
a simple strings of 12 digit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete MESA table
Figure 62. MESA Configuration
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
105 / 448
The options listed in the menu Configuration > Comm/Routing > IP Configuration and also in
Configuration > Comm/Routing > Tunneling Configuration are relevant to the configuration of
messages communications for the management of ATM or PR_EA boards (ISA) inside the equipment and
in the network.
8.10.1 IP routing configuration for ISA boards management
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In order to manage the ISA boards (excepted ETHERNET and PR boards) inserted into the equipment,
the following operations are to be done:
ED
IP Address Configuration of PointtoPoint Interface (see para 8.13 page 109), defines
the IP address for the EquipmentController (EC). This should be the first addressing operation
routing configuration, by means of the options:
IP Static Routing Configuration (see para 8.11 page 107), if using static routing
OSPF Area Configuration (see para 8.12 page 108), if using the automatic OSPF
routing
ISA Board IP Address (see para. 8.14 page 110), it defines the IP address for the ISA boards;
it is to be defined for every ISA board hosted by the equipment.
NOTE: if the ISA boards are in EPS 1+1 configuration (not applicable to 1640FOX), they must
have the same address)
IP over OSI Tunneling (see para. 8.16 page 112), it defines the OSI address (NSAP) of the
destination node to be reached (for instance the GNE connected to the TMN), when the ATM/IP
management message passes through an SDH/OSI network; i.e. it is to be done for every
SDHNE of the network, if equipped with ISA boards.
NOTE: this addressing must be carried out at both end nodes of the tunnel, so that they can
see each other.
OSI over IP Tunneling (not applicable to 1640FOX), it defines the IP address of the
destination node to be reached (for instance the IP router where the TMN is connected), when
an OSI management message passes through an IP network. It is to be defined on a a Gateway
Network Element (GNE) equipped with the QB3 interface, where the QB3 is connected to a
LAN/IP network.
NOTE: this addressing must be carried out at both end nodes of the tunnel, so that they can
see each other.
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
106 / 448

8.10 IP Configuration

8.11 IP Static Routing Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing>IP Configuration and then from
the cascading menu, the IP Static Routing Configuration option.
The dialogbox opens (Figure 63. ) and allows to configure the parameters for IP Static Routing
Configuration.
[1]
Destination Host IP Address: allows to define the IP address necessary to reach a specific Host
[2]
Destination Network:
[3]
Default Gateway IP Address: allows to define the address of the next hop gateway
[4]
CLNP (Connection Less Network Protocol): allows to use a predefine IP over OSI tunnel towards
a gateway. The information in the field is automatically
assigned after the execution of the option IP over OSI
Tunneling (see para. 8.16 page 112).
[5]
IP PointtoPoint Interface Id: allows to use point to point interfaces made available by EC
N.B.
it is alternative to Destination Host IP Address; allows to define the

IP Address and IP Mask to reach a network.
Points from [3] to [5] are alternative
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete table and
close the view; the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.
Figure 63. IP Static Routing Configuration (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
107 / 448
the cascading menu, the OSPF Area Table Configuration option.
The dialogbox opens (Figure 64. ) and allows to configure the parameters for OSPF (Open Shortest Path
First) Area Table Configuration , i.e. it is used in an IP network in automatic, dynamic OSPF routing
configuration. More area addresses may be set; in this case new pages are created by the system.
OSPF Area IP Address: it is the address of the area containing the equipment
OSPF Area Range Mask
Both fields gives a synthetical information that includes all the addresses (specific to a NE and to a
Network) in an Area.
Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete RAP table
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 64. OSPF Area Table Configuration (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
108 / 448

8.12 OSPF Area Table Configuration

8.13 IP Address Configuration of PointtoPoint Interfaces

the cascading menu, the IP Address Configuration of PointtoPoint Interfaces option.
The dialogbox opens (Figure 65. ) and allows to set the Equipment Controller IP Address used to
communicate with the ISA boards inserted into the equipment, and with the rest of the network.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 65. IP Address Configuration of PointtoPoint Interfaces (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
109 / 448
Select an ISA board of the equipment and then the Configuration pull down menu. Select the
Comm/Routing>IP Configuration and then from the cascading menu, the ISA Board IP Address
option.
The dialogbox opens (Figure 66. ) and allows to set the IP Address of the ISA Board that communicate
with the Equipment Controller (EC).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 66. ISA Board IP Address (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
110 / 448

8.14 ISA board IP Address
8.15 OSI over IP


Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing>Tunneling Configuration and
then from the cascading menu, the OSI over IP option.
The dialogbox opens (Figure 67. ) and allows to configure the Remote Destination IP Address of the
Equipment Controller.
Figure 67. OSI over IP Tunneling configuration (example)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
111 / 448
Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing>Tunneling Configuration and
then from the cascading menu, the IP over OSI option.
The dialogbox opens (Figure 68. ) and allows to configure the Destination NSAP Address and the IP
Routing Type; i.e. it permits the TMN to reach the ATM/IP boards inserted into the SDH/OSI network . More
tunneling channels may be created, in these cases new pages are created by the system.
Destination NSAP Address:(OSI address of the NE ending the tunnel)

a Network Service Access Point (NSAP) Address identifies a location in the network. The first
field of the NSAP address, AFI, determines the NSAP format.
The AFI filed is 2 characters long (2 exadecimal digits) and, depending on the its value, the
length of NSAP address is variable from 16 characters to 40 characters:
the value of AFI 49 identifies the local format of variable length (from 16 characters to 40
characters).
the value of AFI 39 identifies the ISODCC format of 40 characters long.
the value of AFI 47 identifies the GOSIPV2 format of 40 characters long.

In all cases the last two fields of the NSAP address are:
System Id: uniquely identifies a NE in an area and is 12 characters long

It might be the equipment MAC Ethernet address, level 2, inserted in the NE (check the
value in the para. 8.7 on page 102 ) or it might be selected by the operator.
Network Selector: provides the distinction among users of the network service and is 2
characters long (value is 1d).
In the view, the NSAP is managed as simple strings of characters without any preformatting
because of the variable format:
a first string of two characters that identifies the AFI field
a second string of variable length that identifies the remaining NSAP address
IP Routing:allows to choose the type of IP routing supported as follows;
OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) , if the OSPF Area Configuration option has been used
(see para 8.12 page 108)
RIP (Routing Information Protocol)
Both
None, if the option IP Static Routing Configuration (see para 8.11 page 107) has been
used
If OSPF or Both options are selected, also the Associated OSPF Area must be set (it is to
be chosen among the presented options); in this case the information field is automatically filled
with the addresses set in the OSPF Area Configuration application.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
112 / 448

8.16 IP over OSI
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 68. IP over OSI Tunneling configuration (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
113 / 448

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
114 / 448

9 EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT
9.1 Introduction and navigation
This section deals mainly with the setting and changing of the boards present on the Equipment and
undertaking board protection operations.
Using the menu options, select the Equipment option from the View pull down menu
The first level of the Equipment Overview representation will be displayed directly into the current window
(see the following figures).The Equipment Overview enables a fast navigation through all levels of the
equipment hierarchy. Navigation is done from higher to lower levels.
The NEs hierarchy is different organized according to the equipment type, as follow:
1660SM & 1650SMC:

Subrack > board > port > TP
objects (see also para 9.1, pg. 115):
the first level shows the subrack level of the Equipment view (see Figure 69. on page 117);
by double clicking on a board body , the board level of the Equipment view can be reached (as
described in chapter 10 on page 133).
view can be reached (as described in chapter 11 on page 139). The port view displays the inner
TPs.
it is possible to go back to the upper level of representation by pressing the <ESC> key on the
keyboard;
It is also possible to:
go back to the previous view, by selecting the Backward option from the views menu
go to the next view, by selecting the Forward option from the view menu.
N.B.
Selecting in the first level of the Equipment view ( subrack level, see Figure 69. on page
117 ) the Show supporting equipment option from the Equipment menu, the Rack level
view of Figure 70. is presented.
In the Rack Level view two subracks are presented:
at the top the Equipment Subrack (example SR60M for 1660SM or SR50C for
1650SMC)
at the bottom the Fans Subrack, named SRFAN.
The Fans Subrack presence is managed with the Set option as for the boards of the
Equipment Subrack (refer to paragraph 9.2 on page 122 for details)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Further, selecting in the Rack level view the Show supporting equipment option from the
Equipment menu, the Equipment level view of Figure 71. is presented.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
115 / 448
1640FOX:
objects (see also para 9.1, on page 115):
the first level shows the Rack level of the Equipment view (see Figure 72. on page 119); two
subracks are presented:
by double clicking on a Subrack body, the relevant subrack level of the Equipment view can be
reached (see Figure 73. on page 120).
by double clicking on a board body, the board level of the Equipment view can be reached (as
described in chapter 10 on page 133).
view can be reached (as described in chapter 11 on page 139). The port view displays the inner
TPs.
it is possible to go back to the previous level of representation by pressing the <ESC> key on
the keyboard; or:
go back to the previous view, by selecting the Backward option from the Views menu
go to the next view, by selecting the Forward option from the Views menu.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
at the top the Equipment Subrack SR40M

at the bottom the AC/DC Rectifier Subrack, named SR40R
Selecting, in the first level of the Rack view (rack level ), the Show supporting equipment
option from the Equipment menu, the Equipment level overview is presented (see Figure 74.
on page 120).
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
116 / 448

Rack > Subrack > board > port > TP.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

LCA
1650SMC
LCA
1660SM
Figure 69. Equipment Overview 1650SMC and 1660SM Subrack level
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
117 / 448
LCA
LCA
SRFAN
1650SMC without Fans Subrack
1650SMC with Fans Subrack
SR60M
LCA
LCA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SRFAN
1660SM without Fans Subrack
1660SM with Fans Subrack
Figure 70. Equipment Overview 1650SMC and 1660SM Rack level
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
118 / 448

SR50C

LCA
LCA
1650SMC
1660SM
Figure 71. Equipment Overview 1650SMC and 1660SM Equipment level
LCA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
1640FOX
Figure 72. Equipment Overview 1640FOXRack level
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
119 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
1640FOX
ED
02
3AL 91670 AA AA
448

LCA
Figure 73. Equipment Overview 1640FOX Subrack level
LCA
1640FOX
Figure 74. Equipment Overview 1640FOX Equipment level
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
120 / 448

The equipment management is achieved by using the options offered by the Equipment menu (see
Figure 75. page 121).
Alarms indications are present at every NE level.
Details about these alarms indications are given in the Maintenance section.
All the options offered by equipment menu are described in the next paragraphs.
The main functions are the setting and changing of the boards on the Equipment.
Boards administrative state settings, that decide about the in/out of service of the boards is also
described.
Figure 75. Equipment menu (example)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Equipment setting operation are defined according the following sequences:
configuration of a new board
Configure the board using the option Set
change of board type
Set out of service the board
Configure the board using the option Set
remove a board
Set out of service the board
Delete all the underlying traffic, connections, services, etc. concerning the board
Remove the board.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
121 / 448
9.2 Set and change or remove board/subrack
a)
Setting or changing a board/subrack
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A new board/subrack may be created in either an empty slot or it may replace an existing Out of
Service board/subrack (without the lock symbol). In fact, the Set option is available only after
selecting an empty slot or an Outofservice board.
ED
Click on the empty slot in which a board/subrack has to be added, or on an existing Out of
Service board in order to change it (see next para. 9.4 on page 128 for in /out of service info).
The contour becomes highlighted to show that operations can be done on it.
Select the the Set option of the Equipment pull down menu of Figure 75. on page 121.
The following example of dialogue box containing a list of the different types of boards/subrack/
access card and modules is displayed.
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
122 / 448

The boards can be set, changed or removed using the menu options of the Equipment view.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ACCESS CARD LIST
BOARDS LIST
SUBRACK LIST
MODULES LIST
Figure 76. The list of different boards/subrack relative to an NE slot (examples)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
123 / 448
b)
Choose the board/subrack/access card type required, by clicking on the corresponding item in
the list. The name of the board is highlighted. Click on the OK push button to validate the choice.
Note: In case of 4xANY Modules it is also necessary to choose the type of user supported as
shown in Figure 76.
The board/subrack representation appears on the NE view in the slot when the board change
is effective.
A lock representation appears over the boards (inservice, see next para. 9.4 on page 128)
In the Create/Modify dialogue box, the Cancel push button cancels the operation and closes
the dialogue box. The Help push button opens a Help view giving information about the context.
Removing a board/subrack/modules
NOTE: the Remove action is not possible in the case that, on the considered board, is still existing any
operation/connection/termination on the underlying supported signals, such as:
Performance Monitoring on underlying TPs
POM / TCT /TCM /SUT monitoring operations
Lower order Connections
Higher order Connections
Lower/Higher order Path Terminations
Loopbacks
LAN/LAPD (and any comm/routing service)
Auxiliary channels
Timing Sources References
Daughter boards, Submodules, etc.

Thus the deletion of every operation/connection/termination is necessary, in the same order as above
listed, before removing a board.
Click on the board/subrack to remove (Out of Service board/subrack, as for next para. 9.4 on
page 128).
The outline of the slot becomes highlighted. This indicates that the board is selected and that
operations can be done on the slot.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
If the slot you are working on is already empty no name appears under the slot.
Select the Remove option the Equipment pull down menu of Figure 75. on page 121.
From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the Remove operation.
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
124 / 448

NOTE: The list of boards/subrack displayed during a Set operation is restricted to those which the
equipment may accept in the selected slot. Therefore the list will vary depending on which slot has
been selected.
For details on the board/subrack identified by acronyms and NE physical composition please refers
to the Technical Handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

c)
Modify a board
NOTE: this procedure can be done to replace an existing unit with a similar one of different version,
without previously remove it. In other words: it is possible when changing only the version of the
board, not the type.
Click on the optical module to replace. The outline of the slot becomes highlighted to show that
operation can be done on it.
Select the Modify option of the Equipment pull down menu of Figure 75. on page 121 .
A dialog box containing a list of different types of optical module is displayed.
Chose the optical module type required by clicking on the corresponding item in the list; the name
of the module is highlighted.
Click on OK push button to validate the choice.
The board representation appears on the N.E. view in the slot when the board change is effective.
A padlock representation appears over the board.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
125 / 448
9.3 Connect Fan to CONGI board
This command enable the Fan Subrack alarms management by means of a connection to a CONGI board.
The option menu is different according to the equipment type (1650SMC or 1660SM) as explained in the
following table:
Equipment Type
Options available
1650SMC
Connect Fan to CONGI#5
1660SM

NOTE: even if available, this option must not be used!
Figure 77. shows an example of connection for 1660SM equipment; the description that follows can be
apply also to 1650SMC taking into account that the option to be chosen is Connect Fan to CONGI#5.
Select the CONGI board
To enable this function select the option (Connect Fan to CONGI#10 ) of the Equipment menu
LCA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 77. Connect FAN to CONGI

It is possible to disable this function by selecting the relevant CONGI board and than choosing the
Remove Fan connection from CONGI#10 option of the Equipment menu (refer to Figure 78. ).
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
126 / 448

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

LCA
Figure 78. Remove FAN connection from CONGI
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
127 / 448
9.4 Board administrative state
N.B.
In the equipment view, a lock representation appears over the boards which are in in service
state.
9.4.1 Setting a board in service
In the Subrack NE view, click on the board in order to select it.

Select the Set in service option of the Equipment pull down menu of Figure 75. on page 121.
A lock representation appears over the boards.
9.4.2 Setting a board out of service
In the Subrack NE view, click on the board in order to select it.

Select the Set out of service option of the Equipment pull down menu of Figure 75. on page 121.
Select the Ok push button in the confirmation window which appears.
A lock representation disappears, substituted by the symbol
over the boards..
9.4.3 Consulting a Boards Administrative state

The boards administrative (in service or out of service) state is indicated on the board view as shown
in the following figure.
LCA
Administrative
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
State Information
Figure 79. Consulting a boards administrative state (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
128 / 448

The operator decides to set a board in service or out of service, if it is allowed by the NE.

9.5 Software description

This function allows the operator to visualize information about the software(s) which is (are) present in the
selected board.
Click on a board in which the software is wanted to know (EQUICO or MATRIX unit for 1660SM,
SYNTH unit for 1650SMC and 1640FOX). The outline of the slot becomes highlighted. This
indicates that the board is selected and that operations can be done on the slot.
Select the Software description option of the Equipment pull down menu of Figure 75. on page
121.
The following window opens.
Figure 80. Software Description dialogue box (example)

The dialogue box contains as many folder sheets as there are softwares in the selected board.
If the selected board does not contain any software, the following information will be displayed:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Click on the Close push button to close the dialogue box.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
129 / 448
9.6 REMOTE INVENTORY

This command displays the remote inventory data present in the Subrack and Boards.
Select the Remote Inventory option of the Equipment pull down menu.
Two options are available (see the following figure):
Subrack level: prints or write on a file the remote inventory data of the subrack.
Board level: show the remote inventory data of the selected board
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
For the Board level a dialog similar to Figure 81. appear.
Figure 81. Remote Inventory (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
130 / 448

The remote inventory data of the Subrack level can be printed on the default printer ( Figure 82. ) or to a
file in postscript or ASCII format ( Figure 83. ).
Figure 82. Select Printer

N.B.
If no printer is installed, there is no error message displayed to indicate this.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 83. Select Output Format for file
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
131 / 448
Click on Show Supporting Equipment menu option of the Equipment menu to navigate to the
equipment that supports the selected board.
Figure 84. (example) opens.
LCA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 84. Equipment Overview Subrack level (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
132 / 448

9.7 Show supporting equipment

10 BOARD VIEW
10.1 Introduction
The Board View permits to show the physical port available in a specific board and to access the Port
view.
The Board view is reached selecting the Equipment option in the View pull down menu, then double
clicking on the selected board to show the relevant Board view, presenting the ports.
In case of board containing subboards, another view permits to see the contained item, named
daughter or subboard (see example of Figure 85. )
An example of daughter with the presented port is in Figure 86. It is displayed after clicking on it.
Alarms and Status indications referred to the board level are present at the bottom of the view, as indicated
in the example (Administrative State and Board Alarms/Status).
This information are In/Out of service of the board (Administrative State) and board alarms and status
like missing (RUM) or mismatch (RUTM), EPS condition if supported and other indications typical of
each unit .
In the Maintenance section details on this indication are given.
LCA
daughters
Administrative state
Board Alarms/Status
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 85. Equipment view: select the SDH port on a board (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
133 / 448

LCA
Figure 86. Example of a Board View

A port type is described with a board rectangular view and a port identification.
The port identification is usually internal to the rectangular board (see Figure 87. some ports examples).
(SDH)
(ISA)
(PDH)
(GBit ETHERNET)
(ISAES)
Figure 87. Examples of a Ports identification and relevant alarm synthesis

The following information is available:
type of port (name)

state of port (alarm status synthesis)
symbol of the port
The operator is provided with a representation of the port alarm synthesis on each port.
The messages displayed at the top view provide port denomination.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The messages displayed at the bottom provide information about Board alarms.
A message under the mouse facility provides the name and the port type or the alarms name. A message
appears in the message area in the bottom left corner of the view.
By double clicking on a board view, it is also possible open the corresponding port view (see chapter 11
on page 139).
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
134 / 448

10.2 Board View Menu

Selecting the Board option in the menu bar of Figure 86. on page 134 the complete pull down Board
menu is presented (Figure 88. ):
Port Access:
Access the Port view. See para.10.2.1 on page 136 .

Note: this option is accessible after the selection of a port contained
in the view.
Change Physical Interface:
Change the SPI or PPI object into PPI or SPI (and viceversa) on the
bimode port( 140Mbit/s / STM1 switchable).
Show supporting equipment: Navigate to the upper subrack level.

ISA Port Configuration: It allows to configure the TPs for the ISA port connections.
Note: this is available only if an ISA board has been
equipped in the Subrack.
Figure 88. Board menu options
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
These options are described in next paragraphs.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
135 / 448
10.2.1 Port Access
Navigation to the Port view permits to show a detailed alarm presentation of the port and to set the relevant
configurations as for the example of the following figure.
Note: on the ISA port the TPs are not automatically created (except for MAU TP) when the board is
equipped in the subrack but they must be created with the aid of the Configuration >ISA port
Configuration (refer to Chapter 20 on page 427).
LCA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 89. After Port Access selection (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
136 / 448

Click on Port Access option of the Board menu to access the Port View ( see chapter 11 on page 139).
10.2.2 Change Physical Interface


This command allows to change the type of physical interface in a bimode port (140 Mbit/s / 155 Mbit/s
switchable port) i.e it changes the SPI or PPI object into PPI or SPI.
Select the Symbol of the port in the Board view.
Click on Change Physical Interface menu option of the Board menu (see Figure 90. on page 137)
LCA
Figure 90. Change Physical Interface (example)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The following dialog box is opened:
Click on the OK push button to change the physical interface.

Click on the Cancel push button to abort the change of the physical interface.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
137 / 448
Click on Show Supporting Equipment menu option of the Board menu to navigate to the subrack that
supports the selected port view.
LCA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 91. Subrack level (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
138 / 448

10.2.3 Show Supporting equipment

11 PORT VIEW
11.1 Introduction
This section describes the operations necessary for the consultation, modification and configuration of
each port.
The Port View permits to set and show the transmission resources (i.e. the Termination Point, TP) referred
to the specific Port; it permits to check the detailed alarms presented by each TP of the Port, and the
available menu permits to configure the port, (many setting options listed in the port menu are common
with the Transmission view).
In these views are presented only the TP specific of the port.
The menu differs according the port type (SDH, PDH, HOA, ISA port).
The Port View can be accessed from the Equipment or Transmission Views.
The Port view is reached selecting the Equipment option in the View pull down menu then double
clicking on the presented rack/subrack to present the subrack view, as described in chapter 9 on page 115.
Double clicking on the selected board the relevant Board view is available presenting the ports (see
chapter 10 on page 133).
By double clicking on a board view, the corresponding port view is opened (see Figure 92. ).
The Port view is also reached selecting the Transmission option in the View pull down menu.
Then the Add TP option of the Transmission menu permits to select and confirm a TP (see the description
at para. 14.5 on page 217).
On the transmission view which appears select the TP and on the Transmission menu select the
Navigate to a port view option.
The HOA port view can be reached from the Port view, selecting a Tp and then Port > Navigate to HOA
port view.
The ISA port (ATM, ETH, PR_EA) are not automatically created when the board is inserted in the subrack
but must be created as explained in Chapter 20 on page 427.
From the Port view It is possible to Navigate to Transmission view.
The port types contain the following TP:
SDH port: Electrical or Optical SPI TTP, RS TTP, MST TTP, prot TTP (MSP TTP), AU4 CTP,
Trail Monitor (only with enabled POM)
SONE Tport: Eelctrical or Optical SPI TTP, RST TTP, prot TTP (MSP), AU3 P.
PDH port: PPI TTP, En CTP, VCn TTP
HOA port: VC4 TTP, TUG3, TUG2, TU3, TU12, Trail Monitoring (only with enabled POM)
ISAATM port: VC4C TTP, VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP, s31 TTP and E1 TTP
ISAPR_EA port: VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP and VC12 TTP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ISAFast ETHERNET port: MAU, PTC, VC3XV, VC12XV, VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP and VC12 TTP
ISAGigabit ETHERNET port: MAU, PTC, VC4XV, VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP and VC12 TTP
ISAES port: MAU, PTC, VC4XV, VC3XV, VC12XV, VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP and VC12 TTP
NOTE: ISAPR board does not have any kind of port type.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
139 / 448
Figure 92. Example of a Port View (example)

On the port view, the messages displayed at the top view in the form of message boxes provide more
information concerning the type and the alarms of the port.
On the other hand the messages displayed at the bottom provide information about MSP protection and
ALS state ( if they are supported ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A message under the mouse facility provides the name and the port type. A message appears in the
message area in the bottom left corner of the view.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
140 / 448

LCA
11.2 Port View: elements on the TP

The symbols of the TPs (see Figure 93. ) have the following meaning:
Alarm Icon Area

The icon boxes represent alarms. The color of the boxes changes according to the alarm severity.
TP Role
The icon boxes represent the function: Adaptation, Termination or Compound Adaptation and
Termination.
Cross-connected state
If the condition of the resource is cross-connected, an icon with a x appears beneath the box.
Performance state
If the condition of the resource is under performance monitoring, an icon with a P appears beneath
the box.
Loop state
If the condition of the resource is under loop, an icon with a L appears beneath the box.
Selected state
An orange frame around the box identifies the TP selection, so port menu refers to the selected TP.
Alarm icon area
G.783 TP Role
(Termination)
TP identifier
Crossconnected state
Selection indication
TP under Performance monitoring
Figure 93. Termination TP box (example)

Figure 94. is another example of TP with different G.783 function role.
Alarm icon area
G.783 TP Role (Adaptation)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
G.783 Functional block acronym
Figure 94. G.783 Adaptation TP box.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
141 / 448
Selecting the Port option in the menu bar of Figure 89. on page 136 the complete pull down Port menu
is presented (Figure 95. )
The menu differs according the port type (SDH, PDH, HOA and ATM), and is introduced in the following:
TP configuration:

The same functionality can be reached from Configuration > Port
Mode menu.
Set B2 excessive BER and Signal Degraded parameter

Set Retiming:
Enable/disable the retiming feature on the outgoing 2 Mbit/s signal. See

paragraph 11.5 on page 11.5.
AU4 Concatenation:
Only for SDH ports views. See para 11.6 on page 148
Cross Connection:
Manage the connection of the paths. See para.15 on page 253
Monitoring Operations:
Set parameters for POM/SUT/TCTTCM TPs.

Performance:
See and Show Performance Monitoring parameters and data.

Loopback:
Manage the loopback commands, for commissioning or maintenance

purposes. See para. 14.11 on page 242.
MSP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Set parameters for the Signal Label and Path Trace overhead on
Synchronous TPs.
Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G.703/G.704 or ISDNPRA

management

Physical Media:
Manage the physical TP port setting. Not applicable to HOA port.
It is described in the following paragraph.
Show supporting board: Navigate to the upper board level
It is described in this chapter, see para.11.9 on page 173
Navigate to Transmission view: permit to show a complete overview about the signal flow, opening
all TPs.
It is described in this chapter, see para.11.10 on page 174
Navigate to Monitor view: permit to show an overview about the monitoring operation (POM, SUT,
TCT/TCM) TPs. It is described on paragraph 11.11 on page 175.
Navigate to HOA port view: this option is available only on SDH ports;
The HOA pot view display the internal structureof the payload.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
142 / 448

11.3 Port View Menu
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

SDH Port
PDH port
ISA port
Figure 95. Examples of port menu options (SDH, PDH and ATM/GBIT ETHERNET port)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
143 / 448
To prevent alarms from being raised and failures being reported during trail provisioning actions, trail
termination functions have the ability to enable and disable fault cause declaration.
This is controlled via their termination point mode or port mode parameter.
The termination point mode can be either monitored (MON) or not monitored (NMON). The state can
be MON if the termination function is part of a trail and provides service and NMON if the termination
function is not part of a trail or is part of a trail which is in the process of setup, breakdown or
rearrangement.
In physical section layers, the termination point mode is called the port mode. It has three modes : MON,
AUTO, and NMON (the last is not supported on OMSN).
The AUTO mode is like the NMON mode with one exception: if the LOS defect clears, the port mode is
automatically changed to MON. This allows for alarmfree installation without the burden of using a
management system to change the monitor mode.
Selecting the Port Mode Configuration option in the menu bar of Figure 96. on page 144 the complete
Port Mode Configuration window is presented (Figure 97. )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 96. Port mode configuration pulldown menu
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
144 / 448

11.4 Port Mode Configuration

Figure 97. Port Mode overview

Port Mode Overview Dialog allows a centralized mechanism for:
System wide search for Port Mode settings
Change of Port Mode setting
Change of Port Mode default.
System wide search capability is offered in order to show port mode value representation for all ports in
a NE or in a port subset.
The subset is defined according to the filtering capabilities on Port Type (all ports, SDH port Only, PDH
port Only, Ethernet port only, CWDM port only) and to the Port Mode set (Ignore, Mon, Auto).
Change of Port Mode setting can be done on the selected ports in the matrix gadget. Multiple selection
is allowed. The user can choose the new Port Mode ( in the Define Port Mode Values field) and can start
the change on the selected ports (Set Mode).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Change of Port Mode System Default can be done in the related frame. Current system default is
visualized in the combo box current value.
Port Mode Overview dialog is available both at Configuration menu and Port View menu and Transmission
View as well.
Using it at Configuration menu the multi port working mode is enabled with full support for search and
filtering.
Using it in Port View or Transmission View enable the single port functionality and the search capability
is greyed out.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
145 / 448
The Retiming feature applies to the outgoing 2 Mbit/s and its purpose is to absorb the jitter /wander that
is transferred to the PDH signal when SDH pointer justification occur. The feature is set individually per
port.
Select a 2Mbit/s port and zoom in to open the port view.
When the Retiming feature is disable, the color of the state information at the bottom of the window is brown
and the label Retiming State Disable is written.
Select the Set Retiming>Enable option from the Port menu (see Figure 98. example)
LCA
Figure 98. Set Retiming enable (before)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
As result of this operation the state information color become green and the label Retiming State Enable
is written (see Figure 99. example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
146 / 448

11.5 Set Retiming
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

LCA
Figure 99. Set Retiming enable (after)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
147 / 448
11.6 AU4 Concatenation
Table 2. STMN port and AU4 concatenation supported by each equipment

EQUIPMENT TYPE
STMN interface supported
AU4 concatenation supported
1640FOX
STM4
AU44c
1650SMC
STM4
AU44c
STM4
AU44c
STM16
AU416c
1660SM
Note: AU464c is not supported in current release.
Zoom in to open the board and then the port view menu.
In the following a 1660SM has been choosed like example.
Select the AU4 Concatenation option from the Port menu to open Figure 100. on page 149 (in this
example a STM16 view is shown)
The STM16 stream appears divided into different groups: not all AU4s can be chosen as first AU4 but only
AU4#1, AU4#5, AU4#9, AU4#13 for AU4c. Therefore for concatenated action of four AU4s in one AU4c
these AU4 streams are deleted and substituted by the new AU4c component.
Select the supported concatenation Number =4 to visualize the available group/groups then select the
group to concatenate and click on the Concatenate push button.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Click on the Cancel key to exit and come back to the previous window.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
148 / 448

Select a STMN optical interface to configure as AU4 concatenation structure; refer to Table 2.

Figure 100. AU4 concatenate/deconcatenate commands
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Concatenate button will be enabled and the Deconcatenate button will be disabled when is selected
a non concatenated AU4, viceversa when is selected a concatenated AU4.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
149 / 448

Figure 101. Example of a concatenated AU4 transmission view

The port view represented in Figure 101. shows an STM16 interface with four AU4 concatenated in one
AU4c. The AU4c appears as a single icon that has the same size of the actual AU4 blocks. The AU4c
streams support the Alarm synthesis, CrossConnection states and Performance Monitoring information
as standard AU4 streams.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To deconcatenate an AU4c select again the AU4 Concatenation option in the Port View menu and then
select the AU4c to deconcatenate (see Figure 102. ). Click on the Deconcatenate push button to apply
the command or on Cancel to exit.
Figure 102. Example of a concatenated AU4c
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
150 / 448
11.7 Physical Media option menu

The Port > Physical Media options permit to set physical configuration of each TP of the port.
The Physical Media options are also accessible from the Transmission menu.
It opens a menu which differs according to the port type:
SDH port:
ALS Management
Tx Quality Configuration:see para. 18.2.11 on page 375
LAPD Configuration:
see para.8.6 on page 99.
Ms Configuration
PDH port:
Line Length Configuration.

HDSL Configuration. Not operative
NT G703/704 Configuration. Not operative
NT X21 Configuration. Not operative
ETHERNET port:
Remote Laser Management. Not operative

ALS Management. Not operative
Ethernet Port Configuration.
Ethernet Mapping Protocol.
ISA port Configuration. Refer to Chapter 20 on page 427.
Control Path Activation.
LCAS Configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
These options are described in next paragraphs except the previously referenced.
Figure 103. Physical media menu (SDH port example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
151 / 448
11.7.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown Configuration
Automatic laser shutdown (ALS) is useful in case of a loss of communication between two NEs due to
optical fiber breakdown. For safety reasons it may be necessary to shutdown the laser to enable the fixing
of the communication link.
The automatic laser shutdown function can only be configured from the optical ports of the equipment.
Select the SPI block in the port view and then select the Port pull down menu.
Select the Physical media option and then from the cascading menu the ALS Management option .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Automatic Laser Shutdown State dialogue box opens ( Figure 104. ).
Figure 104. Automatic Laser Shutdown Management
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
152 / 448

The aim of this paragraph is to describe the optical port hence the laser sources.

The dialogue box enables the ALS Management and the Restart parameters. The following actions are
available:
a)
Allow Automatic Laser Shutdown.

To allow the automatic laser shutdown functionality, select the ALS Enabled option of the ALS
Function: option button.
b)
Forcing the Laser to start or stop.

When the laser is forced to ON or OFF, it is restarted or stopped and the Automatic Laser Shutdown
is disabled, if it was not already so.
c)
1)
Force laser ON.

To carry out a laser forced ON, select the Laser Forced ON option of the ALS Function then
click on Apply and then or Close push button to close the dialogue.
2)
Force laser OFF.

To carry out a laser forced OFF, select the Laser Forced OFF option of the ALS Function then
click on Apply and then or Close push button to close the dialogue
Delete : this option deactivates the ALS function, returning to the state shown in Figure 105. on page
153.
From this window it is only possible to create the ALS function (all the ALS commands are greyed).
Figure 105. Automatic Laser Shutdown Management (after ALS Function delete)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
d)
Enabling or Disabling Automatic / Manual Laser Restart.

To enable (disable) an automatic laser restart following an automatic laser shutdown (periodic
restart), select the Enabled (Disabled) option of the ALS Auto Restart. The laser will be ON for
2 secs and OFF for 70 secs, in periodic mode. The same procedure is applicable for the ALS Manual
restart : while the ALS auto Restart is disabled,the manual restart permits to perform a laser restart
for a single time period.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
153 / 448
Wait to restart time

The Wait To Restart Time: field indicating the delay period in seconds, occurring before an
automatic laser restart is launched (following an automatic shutdown). The restart time period for
this equipment is fixed to 70 secs.
f)
ALS Manual restart (not operative in current release)

When the ALS Manual Restart is Enable it is possible to enter two different commands: Manual or
Test Restart. The Manual command immediately activates a single laser restart: this command
overrides the wait to restart time. The Test restart is similar to the manual restart but the laser
remains ON for a longer time in order to make a measurement of the received optical power.
When all the different parameters have been configured, select the Apply button to confirm the setting
and close the dialogue box.
Selecting only the Close button allows you to cancel the choices made.
The TP list... button opens the clipboard dialog; refer to paragraph 4.3.2.3 on page 59 for details.
Note that the ALS procedure is activated ( if enable ) only when the fiber has been interrupted and the
ALS state has not to be confused with the laser state.
ALS states (see example of Figure 106. ), displayed by the functional state message area of the optical
port, are:
ALS states:
Inactive = No ALS has been activated (Off) or the laser has been Forced ON/OFF.
In test = The laser restart has been automatically activated .
Active = The ALS has been activated (On).
Undefined = The ALS is not present (not created).
Laser state:
On = all OK or ALS not present (not created).
Off = Laser off (when ALS is created).
Forced on = ALS forced on by operator command.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Forced off = ALS forced off by operator command.
Figure 106. ALS and Laser current state (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
154 / 448

e)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
155 / 448

This command permits to get detailed information on the optical characteristics of the port that is
visualized.
Firstly select an optical board and the SPI block, then click on Show Optical Configuration option from
the Physical media pull down menu to visualize the parameters of the selected optical port.
Figure 107. shows an example of the parameters of the selected interface.
N.B.
This dialogue box can only be read. You cannot write in the entry boxes.
Figure 107. Visualizing a port optical parameters (example)

The laser ports are identified by three major characteristics:
STM Level: describes the input/output optical interface types:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
STM1 (1640FOX, 1650SMC, 1660SM)

STM4 (1640FOX, 1650SMC, 1660SM)
STM16 ( only on1660SM)
STM64 ( only on1660SM Rel. 5.1 )
The wavelength of the laser source: the units are nanometers (nm = 109 m).
The use of the port: describes whether the laser port is used for intraoffice transmissions on long
distances (Long Haul ] 40 km) or for infraoffice transmissions on short distances (Short Haul ]
15 km).
The Colored Interface Parameters display the Channel used and the Grid spacing.
To close the dialogue box click on the Cancel push button.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
156 / 448

11.7.2 Show Optical Configuration

11.7.3 Single Fiber Configuration

The single fiber configuration can be realized with passive optical couplers (see Figure 108. )
The optical coupler must not loop the Tx signal onto the local Rx .
For this purpose and in general to avoid a low Tx/Rx decoupling also when the optical line is interrupted,
an identification label has been assigned to the local Tx side ; the Rx part in the remote receive side checks
the congruency between the received and the expected labels. If a signal label mismatch is recognized
on the received section, an alarm (AIS and RDI) will be generated. Example of Figure 108. shows that
is accepted the label 1 from Tx1 to Rx2 while is accepted label 2 from Tx2 to Rx1.
Tx1 Label : 1
Tx2 Label : 2
Tx2
Tx1
Single bidir
OPTICAL
PASSIVE
COUPLER
Rx1
OPTICAL
PASSIVE
COUPLER
Rx2
Rx1: accepted label=2
Rx2: accepted label=1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 108. Bidirectional Transmission on a single fiber
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
157 / 448
Select the Physical media

Configuration option .
option and then from the cascading menu the SDH Single Fiber
Allow Single Fiber: select the transmit mode on the single fiber (enable or disable).
Transmitted Section:
Transmitted Media Byte assigned label to Tx (014).
Transmitted Media Type overhead byte used for the communication:

Figure 109. opens. The following fields have to be considered:
Media Dependent byte of Regeneration Section

or
S1 byte of Multiplex Section (the part not used for the SSM)
Received Section:
Received label
Expected label (014).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 109. Single Fiber Configuration View
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
158 / 448

11.7.4 Ms Configuration
The Ms Configuration menu allows the SS bit provisioning for Multiplex Section Object (MSTTP) in
SONET/SDH network interworking.
Select the MSP TP.
Click on Ms Configuration menu option of the Port> Physical Media menu. Figure 110. opens.
This dialog allows to select between SDH or SONET networks. After the selection click on Apply and then
on Close to close the dialog.
Ms Forced AIS is not supported in the current release.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 110. Ms Configuration
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
159 / 448
This option is not effective on 1640FOX because this function is implemented by a

manual switch located on the 1x45Mb/s module; refer to the 1640FOX technical
handbook to set it.
To manage the Line Length configuration click on Line Length Configuration menu option of the
Physical Media menu. Figure 111. opens.
This dialog allows to configure the line length for a PDH PPI TP of a 45 Mbit/s port.
The OK button validate the configuration and close the dialog box.
The Cancel button removes the dialog
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 111. PDH Line Length Configuration View
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
160 / 448

11.7.5 Line Length Configuration

11.7.6 Ethernet Port Configuration

To set the Fast Ethernet (10/100 Mbit/s) port parameters, select the Ethernet Port Configuration option
of the Port > Physical Media menu as shown in Figure 112.
LCA
Figure 112. Ethernet Port Configuration options (fast ethernet example)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Subsequently Figure 113. on page 161 will be opened.
Figure 113. Ethernet Port Configuration menu
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
161 / 448
[1]
Auto Negotiation : allows to configure the Rate to be negotiated (10 or 100 Mb/s).
The Directionality (Full Duplex) and the Flow Control (Activated) are always enable and cant
be changed.
[2]
Manual: allows to force the Rate at 10 or 100 Mb/s .

The Directionality is always Full Duplex.
Moreover It is possible to Restart the Auto Negotiation by depressing the relevant button; if parameters
has been changed before pressing the Restart button , a question dialog is displayed (see Figure 114.
on page 162) to advice that the user has changed data but not applied them.
Figure 114. Information dialog

In read only mode there are indication if the Auto negotiation on remote side is activated (Remote Auto
Negotiation) and what parameters are allowed on remote (Remote Allowed Parameters).
In both cases is possible to check the the Auto negotiation Current State with the possible massage:
completed OK
completed KO
configuring
deactivated
parallel Defect Fail
other
At the bottom of the port view are displayed the following indications (refer to Figure 112. on page 161
and Figure 115. on page 163):
the Interface Type:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
S1000 Base SX (only for Gigabit Ethernet board)

S1000 Base LX (only for Gigabit Ethernet board)
S1000CX (only for Gigabit Ethernet board)
S100BaseTX
S100BaseFX
Unknown
S10BaseT
the Bit Rate (only for fast ethernet board):
ED
10 Mb/s
100 Mb/s
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
162 / 448

For the Fast Ethernet (10/100 Mbit/s) port it is possible to choose between two Configuration Type:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

LCA
Figure 115. Gigabit Ethernet port view (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
163 / 448
11.7.7 Ethernet Mapping Protocol
Click on PortEthernet Mapping Protocol option of the Port> Physical Media menu. Figure 116.
opens.
Figure 116. Ethernet Mapping Protocol (EXAMPLE)

This dialog aims to show the actual Ethernet mapping protocol used and allowing the user to change it.
In Figure 14 is depicted an example of this new view.
The options available are the following:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
ISAFAST ETHERNET boards:
GFP null extension Header with FCS
GFP null extension Header without FCS
GFP for Packed concatenation extended
ISAGIGABIT ETHERNET boards:
GFP null extension Header with FCS
ISAES and ISAPREA boards:
HDLC
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
164 / 448

Select a VC TP.

11.7.8
Control Path Activation
This dialog allows to modify the state of the Ethernet port virtualTPs, created as explained in Chapter
20 on page 427.
Select a TP in the Ethernet port view window.
Click on Control Path Activation option of the Port> Physical Media menu.
A new window will be opened (Figure 117. and Figure 118. are examples); a similar window is display
when a new concatenated VCX is created in the ISA port configuration window (refer to paragraph 20.2.3
on page 432).
This dialog aims to show the activation state of the virtualTPs present in the Ethernet Port View and to
change the number of virtual TPs active.
Two modality are foreseen to activateTPs:
[1]
Individual path (refer to Figure 117. ): the Active state is reached by selecting the individual row with
the mouse and click on the Change Status button.
[2]
Path Range (refer to Figure 118. ):the Active state is reached by choosing the number of TPs to be
active and click on the Apply button.
On the contrary to change in Idle the Active state of a TP decrease the TPs to be active field and
then and click on the Apply button.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To switch bwtween the two modality click on the relevant button in the Activation Mode field. In this field
it is also displayed the Actual Selected Mode.
Figure 117. Control Path Activation:Individual Path mode
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
165 / 448

Figure 118. Control Path Activation:Range Path mode

Click on the Refresh button to uptade the changes.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Click on Close button to close the Control Path Activation window.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
166 / 448

11.7.9 LCAS Configuration

Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) is used to increase or decrease the capacity of a container that
is transported in a SDH network using Virtual Concatenation. In addition, the scheme automatically
decrease the capacity if a member experinces a failure in the network, and increase the capacity when
the network fault is repaired. The scheme is applicable to every member of the Virtual Concatenation
Group (VCG).
Select a VCnXv TP an than the LCAS Configuration option from the Port > Physical Media menu (refer
to Figure 119. I); Figure 120. will be opened.
Figure 119. LCAS configuation pulldown menu
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 120. can be reached also from ISA board Configuration window (refer to paragraph 20.2 on page
428).
Figure 120. LCAS Configuration
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
167 / 448
The Monitoring... button opens the LCAS monitoring window dysplayed in Figure 121.
Other parameters can be set:
RS acknowledge timeout; it is the timeout value (in milliseconds) LCAS protocol waits for the
resequence acknowledge message
The button Apply will se the attribute Max differential delay and RS acknowledge timeout if the LCAS
protocol is enable.
Figure 121. LCAS Monitoring

The LCAS Monitoring window is divided in two section, the first reports information concerning the Virtual
Concatenation Group Monitoring Parameters, the second reports the Channels Monitoring Parameters.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Virtual Concatenation Group Monitoring Parameters fields description:
Active Channel Number: display the number of Vcs active on Source and Sink read on Node A.
Acknowledge Bit (ReSequence Acknowledge) Source and Sink: when a renumbering of the
sequence numbers of the members sending in CTRL field NORM, DNU, EOS, or when a change of
the number of these members is detected at the Sk, a notification to the So per VCG has to be
performed by toggling (i.e. change from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0 ) the RSAck bit.
MST Channel Ref.: indicates wich channel of the VCG is the reference one for MST information;
MST information report the member status from Sk to So with two states: OK or FAIL (1 status bit
per member).OK = 0, FAIL = 1.
VCG Master: indicates wich channel is the reference channel for the Differential Delay calculation.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
168 / 448

In the LCAS Configuration window it is possible to Enable / Disable the LCAS scheme protocol selecting
the relevant button.

Channels Monitoring Parameters fields description:
The first column contains the channel identifier inside the VCG (called Sequence Number) .
Tx CTRL Packet: Message sent (ADD, DNU, IDLE, NORM, EOS, FIXED), relative to a traffic flow
from Node A to Node B; it provides the status of the individual member of the group as reported in
the following:
Fixed: this is an indication that this end uses Fixed bandwidth (nonLCAS mode)
Add: this member is about to be Added to the group
Norm: Normal transmission
Eos: End of Sequence indication and Normal transmission
Idle: this member is not part of the group or about to be removed
Dnu: Do Not Use (the payload) the Sk side reported FAIL status
Unknow
Rx Channel State: MST indication (OK/FAIL) relative to a traffic flow Node B to Node A;
Rx CTRL Packet: Message received (ADD, DNU, IDLE, NORM, EOS, FIXED), relative to a traffic
flow from Node B to Node A; it provides the status of the individual member of the group as reported
in the following:
Fixed: this is an indication that this end uses Fixed bandwidth (nonLCAS mode)
Add: this member is about to be Added to the group
Norm: Normal transmission
Eos: End of Sequence indication and Normal transmission
Idle: this member is not part of the group or about to be removed
Dnu: Do Not Use (the payload) the Sk side reported FAIL status
Unknow
Tx Channel State: MST indication (OK/FAIL) relative to a traffic flow Node A to Node B;
Differential Delay: it is calculated respect to the Virtual Concatenation group Master channel,
relative to a traffic from Node B to Node A .
TxVC: contains the sequence number assigned to a specific member from Node A to Node B. Each
member of the same VCG is assigned a unique sequence number, starting at 0.
RxVC:contains the sequence number assigned to a specific member from Node B to Node A. Each
member of the same VCG is assigned a unique sequence number, starting at 0.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Refresh button refreshes the values displayed.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
169 / 448
This menu item enables the configuration of the most important transmission parameters concerning the
Primary Rate Access (PRA) and G.703/G.704 frame management.
PRA management
The PRA functionality performs termination bidirectional function for Time Slot 0 on framed with CRC4
2 Mbit/s signal.
In detail, it extracts in sink direction and writes in source direction particular bits (E, Sa5, Sa6 and A) of
the Time Slot 0.
Moreover, it generates substitution frames in case of detection of LOS on the signal coming from a
Terminal Equipment.
The PRA functionality has been extended in order to manage proprietary handling of the bits of Time Slot
0 (Framed with leased line PRA option) in terms of state, defect detection and consequent actions.
G.703/G.704 management
This functionality allows to activate the adaptation function to process a framed (G.704 interface) or not
framed (G.703 interface) 2Mbit/s signal.
This TP Frame Mode Configuration option is available for:
P12CTP
Select the desired P12CTP and then the Port >TP Frame Mode Configuration option.
TP Frame Mode Configuration can also be accessed from the Transmission and Synchronization
view menu.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The following dialog appears:
Figure 122. TP Frame Mode Configuration
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
170 / 448

11.8 TP Frame Mode Configuration
The windows contains the following graphical objects:

Framed Signal Mode that allows to configure the attribute framed Signal Mode; the user can
choose one of the following value:
Not Framed (G.703 interface): the PRA function cannot be activated ;
Framed without PRA (G.704): the behavior according to ETS 300233 is applied in the
handling of bits of Time Slot 0 in terms of state, defect detection and consequent action;
Framed with PRA : PRA function are activated
Framed with leased line PRA : a proprietary leased line behavior is applied.
In PRA applications, the following features are managed:
a configurable parameter in order to define the operation modes of the CRC procedure;
the configuration of the consequent action on the transmitted 2M/s signal in case of configured
retiming functionality and loss of synchronization (when the CRU is in HoldOver or
FreeRunning mode).
the configuration of the consequent action concerning the AIS insertion for board
P63E1NM4 in leased Line mode.
CRC4 Status that defines the monitoring capabilities applied to the signal with a CRC multiframe:
Operation: allows to configure the CRC4 processing modalities; the possible value are:
Monitoring Enabling: enable or disable the CRC4 error counting
Remote Indication: readonly field that indicates if status of CRC4 error counting
functionality of farend NE is enabled or disabled.
Two Consequent Action are forseen:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Disabled that disables the CRC4

Forced that configures CRC4 with consequent actions
Automatic that triggers the CRC4 algorithm in order to allow
interworking of pieces of equipment with and without a CRC4 capability.
Loss of Synch Consequent Action allows to perform the consequent action on the
transmitted 2M/s signal with retiming when the CRU is in Holdover or Freerunning mode; the
consequent action is performed only if PRA or leased line application ha been configured on
the associated P12CTP.
The possible values of the Loss of Sync Consequent Action are:
02
Timing Plesiochronous that causes a timing as 2 Mb/s incomin signal
Insert AIS that causes AIS insertion
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
171 / 448

FarEnd defect Consequent Action allows the AIS insertion towards 2Mb/s PDH as
consequent action upon the detection of the farend defect on the SDH side (by a special
pattern carried in Sa4bits); it works only in leased line application;
The values attribute are:
SubstitutionFrame that means no action
AIS that causes AIS insertion
Frame Status is a readonly field that reports an indication of the received signal:
no indication
the 2Mb/s signal is multiframe
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Press Ok to apply the parameters or Cancel to close the dialog.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
172 / 448
11.9 Show Supporting Board

Select a TP.
Click on Show Supporting Board menu option of the Port menu to navigate to the board that supports
the selected port view.
LCA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 123. Board View Example.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
173 / 448
11.10 Navigate to Transmission View
Click on Navigate to Transmission View menu option of the Port menu to navigate to the corresponding
Transmission View that is related to the selected TP.
Navigation to the Transmission view permits to show a complete overview about the signal flow as for the
example of the following figure..
LCA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 124. After Navigate to Transmission view selection (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
174 / 448

Select a TP.
11.11 Navigate to Monitoring View

Select a TP where are configurated some Monitoring Operations (POM, SUT, TC).
Click on Navigate to Monitoring View menu option of the Port menu to navigate to the corresponding
Monitoring View that is related to the selected TP.
Navigation to the Monitoring view permits to show a complete overview about the Monitoring Operations
(POM, SUT, TC) as for the example of the following figure.
In Figure 125. on page 175 is shown an example of Monitoring View of a TP with POM and TCM both
before and after matrix.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 125. View of Monitoring Operations (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
175 / 448
11.11.1 Navigate to HOA Port View

After having selected a Tp (for example AU4), click on Port > Navigate to HOA Port View option.
The HOA port displays the internal structure of the payload, as for the following figure:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 126. Navigate to HOA Port
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
176 / 448

12 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION MANAGEMENT (EPS)

This function is not applicable to 1640FOX ; the descriptions reported in this chapter is
intended only for 1650SMC and 1660SM.
12.1 Introduction
It is unthinkable to launch a telecommunications system, handling millions of communications, without the
possibility of replacing equipment in a real time way, consequent to equipment failure. Everything must
be done so that the communications can continue smoothly and so that the equipment failure remains
transparent to the users. Protection management deals with this aspect of the EMLUSM.
The protection is performed by switching the board supporting the protected service when this board fails
to a protecting board capable of supporting the same service. This protection is realized according to a
protection scheme.
An equipment protection scheme is composed of the following parameters which can be configured:
Group type: 1+1 or 1+n

the group type specifies if one or more unreliable resources for protection can be assigned to
one or more reliables resources. 1+1 group type means that a working element is protected by
one protecting unit. 1+n group type means that n working elements are protected by only one
protecting unit.
Protection priority:
A priority can be assigned to protected units in 1+n protection schemes. This priority can be be
1, 2, ... or n, 1 being the highest priority.
Configuration type: revertive or non revertive

In revertive mode, a protected service will be switched back to its protected element when it has
recovered from its failure.
In non revertive mode, the switch to the protecting element is maintained even after a recovery
from failure.
Protection wait to restore time:

Used when revertive mode is active, the protection wait to restore time prevents several
protection switches due to an intermittent failure. A protected element must be fault free during
this fixed period of time before a protected service is switched back to it.
Board duplication remains the easiest way to ensure equipment protection in a system.
The actions that can be undertaken are of the following type:
Consult and modify an Equipment Protection Scheme (EPS),

Force Switch EPS,
In Board view, the board whose contents is represented is considered as implicitly selected.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
EPS protection states are displayed by the functional state message area of the boards involved in an
equipment protection scheme.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
177 / 448
12.2 Management: consulting and modifying EPS
The Port view is reached selecting the Equipment option in the View pull down menu to present the
subrack view, as described at chapter 9.1 on page 115.
Select the Equipment option in the View pull down menu.

Select the EPS pull down menu. Then select the Management... option as show in the following
figure.
Figure 127. Consulting EPS

r01sr1/board#40
r01sr1/board#23
r01sr1/board#32
r01sr1/board#27
Figure 128. EPS Management dialogue box (example)

The EPS Management dialogue box shows the current NE protection schemes in the left side. The
list gives for each protecting board the protected board(s).
The available protection schemes are coherent with the NE type and release.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The right side of the dialogue box allows to modify the EPS configuration.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
178 / 448

In order to consult EPS, perform the following operations:
The current release of this NEs fix the following protection:

1660SM EQUIPMENT:
N+1 (with N 6)P63E1 or P63E1NM4 protection:
board of slot MAIN (protected): P63E1 or P63E1NM4, slots 242730333639

board of slot SPARE (protecting): P63E1 or P63E1NM4, slot 32
N+1 (with N 15) P3E3/T3 protection:
board of slot MAIN (protected): P3E3/T3, from slot 25 to 39

board of slot SPARE (protecting): P3E3/T3, from slot 24 to 38
N+1 (with N 15) P4ES1N protection:
board of slot MAIN (protected): P4ES1N, from slot 25 to 39

board of slot SPARE (protecting): P4ES1N, from slot 24 to 38
N+1 (with N 15) P16S14E (ELECTRICAL ONLY) protection:
board of slot MAIN (protected): P16S14E, from slot 25 to 39

board of slot SPARE (protecting): P16S14E, from slot 24 to 38
N.B.
For P3E3/T3 P4ES1N and P16S14E more than one protection group N+1 revertive
can be created, depending on the equipment configuration.
The spare board position can be assigned in a flexible way .The only constraint are
the following:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
the access card corresponding to the protecting board must be an HPROT card
the HPROT card has to be plugged at the left side of the access card group
the main/spare boards have to be adjacent.
the protecting board has to be plugged at the left side of the protected group of boards
the protecting/protected group of ports have to be of the same type
1+1 ATM MATRIX 4x4 protection:

The ATM MATRIX board can be protected in 1+1 equipment protection scheme.
In this configuration the ATM MATRIX and all indirect interfaces connected to it are protected
against ATM module failure. This does not apply to the local STM1 interface so the traffic on
it is lost.
A maximum of two protection group 1+1 not revertive can be created.
The spare card position can be assigned in a flexible way; no restriction for position of main and
spare ATM MATRIX are present.
1+1 ATM MATRIX 8x8 protection:

against ATM module failure.
1+1 ISA PR_EA (PREA4ETH, PREA1GBE) protection:

The ISA PR_EA boards can be protected in 1+1 equipment protection scheme.
In this configuration the ISA PR_EA and all indirect interfaces connected to it are protected
against module failure. This does not apply to the local interface so the traffic on it is lost.
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
179 / 448
1+1 ISA ES16 protection

The ISA ES16 boards can be protected in 1+1 equipment protection scheme.
In this configuration the ISA ES16 and all indirect interfaces connected to it are protected
spare ISA ES16 are present.
1+1 MATRIX protection
N.B.
board of slot 23, MATRIX main (protected)

board of slot 40, MATRIX spare (protecting)
for each type of failure on the MATRIX main board ( CRU, Shelf Controller) a switch is
performed to the spare boards.
The MATRIX protection is automatically presented in the left side of the dialog box when
the SPARE MATRIX is created in the Set option of the Equipment menu. It is not created
with the EPS menu described in this chapter.
1650SMC EQUIPMENT:
N+1 (with N=1) P63E1 or P63E1NM4 protection
board of slot 6, 63 x 2 Mbit/s (P63E1 or P63E1NM4) main (protected)

board of slot 7, 63 x 2 Mbit/s (P63E1 or P63E1NM4) spare (protecting)
N+1 (with N 2) P3E3/T3 protection
board of slot MAIN (protected): P3E3/T3, from slot 7 to 8

board of slot SPARE (protecting): P3E3/T3, from slot 6 to 7
N+1 (with N 2) P4ES1N protection
N.B.
board of slot MAIN (protected): P4ES1N, from slot 7 to 8

board of slot SPARE (protecting): P4ES1N, from slot 6 to 7
For P3E3/T3 and P4ES1N only one protection group N+1 revertive can be created,
depending on the equipment configuration.
The spare board position can be assigned in a flexible way .The only constraint are the
following:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
the access card corresponding to the protecting board must be an HPROT card
the HPROT card has to be plugged at the left side of the access card group
the main/spare boards have to be adjacent.
the protecting board has to be plugged at the left side of the protected group of boards
the protecting/protected group of ports have to be of the same type
1+1 ATM MATRIX 4x4 protection

against ATM module failure. This does not apply to the local STM1 interface so the traffic on
it is lost.
A maximum of one protection group 1+1 not revertive can be created.
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
180 / 448

spare ISA PR_EA are present.

1+1 ISA PR_EA (PREA4ETH, PREA1GBE) protection

The ISA PR_EA boards can be protected in 1+1 equipment protection scheme.
In this configuration the ISA PR_EA and all indirect interfaces connected to it are protected
A maximum of one protection group 1+1 not revertive can be created.
spare ISA PR_EA are present.
1+1 ISA ES16 protection

The ISA ES16 boards can be protected in 1+1 equipment protection scheme.
In this configuration the ISA ES16 and all indirect interfaces connected to it are protected
A maximum of one
One protection group 1+1 not revertive can be created.
spare ISA ES16 are present.
1+1 COMPACT ADM (SYNTH1N or/and SYNTH4) protection

N.B.
In the following will be explained some rules for EPS schema configuration using
SYNTH1N board; the same rules can be applied to SYNTH4 board.
Mixed configuration are also allowed (i.e. EPS schema composed by SYNTH1N and
SYNTH4).
board of slot 9, COMPACT ADM1 (SYNTH1N) main (protected)
board of slot 10, COMPACT ADM1 (SYNTH1N) spare (protecting)
N.B.
for each type of failure on the COMPACT ADM main board (matrix, CRU, Shelf
Controller) a switch is performed to the spare boards. The optical/electrical port and
the Equipment Controller function on the COMPACT ADM board are not EPS
protected.
The SYNTH1N/SYNTH4 protection is automatically presented in the left side of
the dialog box when the SPARE SYNTH1N/SYNTH4 is created in the Set option
of the Equipment menu. It is not created with the EPS menu described in this
chapter.
This right side of Figure 128. is divided into two parts.

The upper part provides a message field with the name of the Protecting board and a choose button to
display the list of boards available.
The lower part provides a list to display the Protected boards currently in the displayed scheme.
A choose button is provided to display the list of boards which could be added as protected.
A delete button enables user to remove a protected board from a scheme.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
a)
Scheme displaying
To display a specific scheme, user selects an item on the left list.

This operation fills the protecting element text field and the protected list with the board user name. If user
clicks where there is no item displayed, the right part is displayed empty.
The Cancel push button closes the dialog box.
b)
ED
Scheme creation
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
181 / 448
After that operation, Choose Protecting button becomes insensitive and Choose Protected becomes
sensitive (see Figure 130. on page 183)
The user can add, always using the same Board Selection list dialogue box presented, as many
protected boards as wanted (max.15 in 1660SM, max. 2 in 1650SMC).
When the right part of window is correctly filled, the OK button close the dialog box and create the scheme
(the new list is update reopening the EPS Management dialogue box).
The Cancel push button cancels the creation and closes the dialog box.
c)
Scheme deletion
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To delete an existing protection scheme, the user selects a scheme in the left list. Using the Delete button,
user could delete the scheme.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
182 / 448

To create a new protection scheme,dont click on item in the left list.

In this way the right part is displayed empty and the Choose Protecting button is sensitive.
Press this button to displays a window to choose a board in the Board Selection list (see Figure 129. on
page 183). The board are listed opening the NE>rack>subrack levels.

d)
Scheme modification
To modify an existing protection scheme by adding or removing protection units, the user selects a scheme
in the left list. Using Choose button for protected elements, user could add protected boards.
By selecting a protected board and using the Delete Protected button, user could remove protected
elements from scheme. When the right part of window is correctly filled, the OK button close the dialog
box and modify the scheme.
The Cancel push button cancels the creation and closes the dialog box.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 129. EPS: board selection (example)
Figure 130. EPS: choose protected (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
183 / 448
Protection role
Protection status

The EPS functional state of a board selected in the board view is displayed at the bottom of the view as
shown in the following figures.
Switch Type
Figure 131. EPS functional state from protected active board view
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 132. EPS functional state from protecting active board view
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
184 / 448
12.3 Configuration: revertive and WTR for EPS

This functionality configure Revertive and Wait Time to Restore in a protection scheme.
In order to configure, perform the following operations:
Select a transmission board in the Equipment view.
Select the EPS pull down menu. Then select the Configure option as show in the following figure.
Figure 133. Configure EPS

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 134. EPS Management dialogue box (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
185 / 448
the name of the protecting element as a label

the Equipment Type (board) of the protecting element as a label
a list displaying the protected elements owned by the scheme
the Revertive Mode flag as an option menu. The available values are revertive and non revertive
the wait time to restore time value (steps of 30 seconds, from 60 to 600). Only for N+1 EPS.
Notes: in the current release the Wait Time to Restore is fixed to 5 minutes.
The following protection mode are supported :
1660SM EQUIPMENT:
1+1 ATM MATRIX 4x4 is Not Revertive only
1+1 PR_EA is Not Revertive only
1+1 ES16 is Not Revertive only
1+1 MATRIX is Not Revertive only
N+1 63 x 2 Mbit/s (P63E1 or P63E1NM4) protection is Revertive
N+1 3x34/45 Mbit/s (P3E3/T3) protection is Revertive
N+1 4x STM1 ELECTRICAL port (P4ES1N) protection is Revertive
N+1 16x STM1 ELECTRICAL port (P16S14E) protection is Revertive
1650SMC EQUIPMENT:
1+1 PR_EA is Not Revertive only
1+1 ES16 is Not Revertive only
1+1 COMPACT ADM (SYNTH1,SYNTH1N or SYNTH4) is Not Revertive only
N+1 63 x 2 Mbit/s ( P63E1 or P63E1NM4) protection is Revertive
N+1 3 x 34/45 Mbit/s (P3E3/T3) protection is Revertive
N+1 4 x STM1 Electrical (P4ES1N) protection is Revertive
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
When the configuration of the equipment protection scheme is completed confirm closing the dialog box
by clicking on the OK push button. The Cancel push button cancels the configuration and closes the dialog
box.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
186 / 448

The dialog box provides configuration for elements such as :
12.4 Switching EPS

This functionality enables to force a protecting board to work even if there is not failure.
The forced switch will fail if the other board is already forced switched or if the protecting board has a failure
condition.
In order to switch an EPS, perform the following operations:
Select a transmission board in the Equipment view.
Select the EPS pull down menu. Then select the Switch option as show in the following figure.
Figure 135. Switching EPS

Figure 136. EPS Switch dialogue box (example)

This dialogue box displays in its left part the EPS of the selected board.
From this dialogue box the operator can configure, in the current release, only the Lockout options, by
clicking on the relevant radio button.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Manual to command perform the manual switch, active only if the other board is not alarmed.
Clicking on the OK push button will initiate the switch and close the dialogue box. The Cancel push button
cancels the operation and closes the dialogue box.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
187 / 448
12.5 EPS Overview

EPS Overview allows to display as well as search for EPS states.

Selecting the EPS Overview option from the Configuration pull down menu Figure 137. opens
Figure 137. EPS overview

To Search the EPS groups two different ways of filtering are supported; a filtering for all protection units
located on a dedicated Board Type as well as a filtering for protection units carrying a specific Status.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The search criteria can be chosen with the help of a combo box:
Board Type: allows to filter for the EPS protected boards (example Ignore, SYNTH1N, MATRIXN,
P3E3/T3, etc. )
Status: allows to filter for all possible EPS protection states;the following filters values should be
offered (examples):
Ignore
Normal
DNR
AutoFail
AutoWTR
Manual
Force
Lockout
After the filter selection click on Search button to start; the field below the Search button will be updated
(see Figure 138. )
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
188 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 138. EPS overview after Search (Example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
189 / 448

Protection Group (example protection GroupId, 40)
Board Id (example r01sr1/board#40 )
Board Role:
Ped
Ping
(Protected)
(Protecting)
B Status (board status):

Each protection unit is presented with the following information:
A
S
F
(Active)
(StandBy)
(Faulty)
Protection Status: defines the current state of the protection unit as follow
Normal
DNR
AutoFail
AutoWTR
Manual
Force
Lockout
(Do Not Revert)

(Autoswitch Equipment Fail)
(Autoswitch Wait Time to Restore)
(Manual switch)
(Force switch)
The colors used for each row have the following meaning:
Green (OK):
for protected protection units active
Red (Critical):
for protected protection units in fail condition, protection unit in lockout or active
on autoswitch or commands
Orange (Major):
for protected units in standby after a command and protecting protection unit
in standby for autoswitch or commands
Cyan (Indicative):
for protecting protection unit active and no fail condition present in the schema
(Do Not Revert State)
At the bottom of the EPS Overview windows are available five button that allows to navigate through the
EPS management views and subrack view, board view.
In this way the operator has a quick link towards the views showing the correlation between the alarms
and the protection states.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
Before to click on one of the five buttons select a row
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
190 / 448
The buttons available are:

Open Subrack View:

opens the Subrack view showing the protection states with icons on the
boards (see example of Figure 139. )
The possible protection states and the relevant symbols are explained in
the following:
Symbol
EPS protection status

No Request
Do not Revert
Lockout
Auto Switch (WTR, Fail)

Manual
Forced
Open Board View:
opens the board view showing the alarm and the board administrative
states (see example of Figure 140. )
Open Commands:
opens the EPS Switch dialog box. See 12.4 on page 187 and the
relevant description.
EPS Management:
and
opens the EPS Management dialog box. See Figure 128. on page 178
the relevant description.
EPS Parameters:
opens the EPS Configuration dialog box. See 12.3 on page 185
and the relevant description.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Click on Close button to exit from the EPS Overview window
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
191 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
3AL 91670 AA AA
448

LCA
Figure 139. Subrack view after Open Subrack View command (example)
LCA
Figure 140. Board view after Open Board View command (example)
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
192 / 448
13 MULTIPLEX SECTION PROTECTION MANAGEMENT (MSP)

13.1 Architecture types
The Multiplex Section Protection (MSP, formerly called APS: Automatic Switching Protection) is the
connection between two NEs protected by a cable and port duplication. At the source the signal is
duplicated and sent to the sink via two independent cables. When occurs a multiplex section failure, the
system switches to the other cable and port.
The MS Linear Trail Protection can be applied to any NE where it is possible to configure a linear APS
(single ended/dual ended) line protection. For this NE is applicable the APS 1+1 Proprietary, the APS
1+1 Standard and the APS 1 :1 Standard dual ended.
The APS 1 +1 (not revertive) feature permits a 1+1 protection in a linear link, where a path signal is
protected by another dedicated path carrying the same signal. The protection can be set both in single
(unidirectional) and in dual (bidirectional) ended mode.
In single ended mode (unidirectional) the protection is accomplished by switching only the signal affected
by the failure.
In dual ended mode (bidirectional) the protection is accomplished by switching both the affected and the
unaffected signals .
Dual ended mode (bidirectIonal) protection is not supported by 1640FOX and 1650SMC
Architecture 1+1 or N+1 Standard (the last is only available for 1660SM)
Described in ITUT Rec. G783/G841. The refence switching criteria are SF and SD. It provides a
k1/k2 communication protocol thus this protection can be single or dual ended.
Architecture 1+1 Proprietary (not used )
The refence switching criteria are SF and SD. No k1/k2 communication protocol is provided thus
this protection can be only single ended.
Architecture 1+1 Optimized (not used )
Architecture 1 : 1 Standard (not used )
Described in ITUT Rec. G783/G841 as architecture 1 : n ( with n=1 ). The refence switching criteria
are SF and SD. It provides revertive mode managed by k1/k2 protocol and thus this protection can
be single or dual ended. The spare interface can be used to transport low priority traffic .
The WTR time is used with revertive mode.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Signal Degrade (SD) software setting enables the MSP protection mechanisms when a SD is recognized
on the working port. The SD threshold reference value depend on the NE selected threshold on the MS
termination point. This threshold value is configured as explained in the para.14.7 on page 234.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
193 / 448
13.2 MSP Options Introduction

All the MSP options are available starting from the Port View following the step explained below:
Select Equipment from the Views menu
Double click on the SDH optical board to configure to open the port icon
Double click on the port icon to open the port view
Select the MSP block in the port view and then choose the MSP options by clicking on Port > MSP
menu; the possible choice are:
MSP Create see para 13.3 on page 195.
MSP Management see para 13.4 on page 199.
MSP Commands see para 13.7 on page 204.
MSP Delete see para 13.5 on page 201.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MSP Create, MSP Management, MSP Commands and MSP Delete can also be accessed from the
Transmission > MSP menu.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
194 / 448
13.3 MSP Create

Select the MSP Create option from the Port > MSP menu ( see Figure 141. on page 195) to open
the MSP Schema Creation (see Figure 142. on page 195).
Figure 141. MSP Create Option
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 142. MSP Schema Creation
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
195 / 448
In this release two MSP Protection Schemas are supported:
MSP 1+1 standard
MSP N:1 standard (only for 1660SM)
Select one and then click on Add Port button in the Ports field to create a MSP schema.
Figure 143. on page 196 is opened.
Following steps are necessary:
choose Port
select a Port Role (protected or protecting)
define Channel Id (mandatory for MSP N:1)
define SDH Priority (type of traffic, High or Low)
Figure 143. MSP schema creation Port dialog
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Select the Choose Port button to define the Protected Port and Protecting Port units.
Figure 144. on page 197 is opened.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
196 / 448
Figure 144. TP Search (example)

Click on RackSubrack and select the Board ( Protected / Protecting ) on the Equipment window (left
side).
The termination Points list (right side) is available.
On this right side select the OpS TP of the chosen board and then click on the OK button. It is possible
to select the board through the Board History button selecting the board list menu.
The Filter Section is divided into different fields. It permits to visualize a reduced TP Class. If used, OpS
class must be selected. The complete TP research description is reported in the Transmission View
chapter 14.5.1.2 on page 223.
Click on the OK button and repeat the operation for both Protected Port and Protecting Port. If it has
been selected a Protected/Protecting port configured in a previously MSP schema protection an error
message of access denied will be appear on the screen.
In the dialogue of Figure 142. on page 195 also configure the MSP protection schema with the chosen
Protection Schema and enter the related Schema Parameters according the following rules:
1+1 Standard can be:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
singleended, Not Revertive for 1640FOX, 1650SMC, 1660SM

dualended , Not Revertive for 1660SM
N :1 Standard can be only dualended Revertive (not supported by 1640FOX, 1650SMC)
At the end click on the OK button to confirm the MSP protection schema configuration. An error message
will be appear if the selected schema is not supported by the NE.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
197 / 448
Figure 145. MSP 1+1 standard protection schema (example)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 146. MSP N:1 standard protection schema (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
198 / 448
13.4 MSP Management

Select the MSP Management option from the Port > MSP menu ( see Figure 147. on page 199 ) to
open the MSP Schema Configuration (see Figure 148. on page 200).
Figure 147. MSP Management Option

The MSP Schema Configuration dialog shows the current state of the MSP schema, settings and state
(protected or protecting) of the current SDH-n port.
This dialog allows to set the configuration parameters for the designated multiplex section:
Protection Schema reported in the previous paragraph 13.1 on page 193.
Schema Parameters:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Dual Ended / Single Ended protection switch and directionality.
Revertive/Non Revertive mode.
The WTR Time (Wait To Restore) is the delay time for switching protection and protecting port
after recovery from failure / defect.
Enable Switch on SD is not operative in current release.
Ports area display the current MSP schema:
Port Id: identify the location of the board
Role: identify the role of the board (Protecting or Protected)
Channel Id: mandatory for MSP N:1 (max. value is 14)
Priority: type of traffic, High or Low
Configure the MSP protection Schema with the chosen protection schema and enter the related schema
parameters. At the end click on the OK button to configure the MSP protection schema. An error message
will be appear if the selected schema is not supported by the NE.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
199 / 448
Figure 148. MSP Management View (example)
13.4.1 MSP modification

The same MSP Management option can be used to modify the schema parameters of an active MSP
configuration.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Before changing a single ended (unidirectional) schema into a dual ended (bidirectional), all active
switches must be cleared (manual switch, lockout,... ). If the operator wants to change the protection
schema architecture or the ports involved in the MSP schema, the current schema must be removed and
recreated.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
200 / 448
13.5 MSP Delete

Select the MSP Delete option from the Port > MSP menu (see Figure 149. on page 201) to open the
MSP Schema Deletion (see Figure 150. on page 201).
Figure 149. MSP Delete option
Figure 150. MSP Schema Deletion (example)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Click on OK button to delete the selected MSP Schema Configuration
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
201 / 448
13.6 Display of Protection State

The MSP protection state of a port is displayed at the bottom of the Port view. Some examples are reported
in Figure 151.
The following states are always displayed:
Port Status Active (red color) or Standby (orange color). The active protection status is referred
to a protected/protecting port ( where the traffic is transported): when a failure is detected, the
protecting port is ready to save the traffic (and becomes active). The standby protection status is
referred to a protecting/protected port that is ready to save the traffic.
MSP Protection Role Protected (green color) or Protecting (ochre color). The protection role
depends on the selected port type (Protected / Protecting).
MSP Group Status, MSP Own Unit and MSP Related Unit (green color) Displayed if an automatic
switch is requested. Own Unit stands for the currently displayed unit in the port view, Related Unit
stands for the related unit of the same protection group . The status indications are:
NR: (abbreviation of No Request); normal, idle condition, the traffic is on the main port
DNR:(abbreviation of Do Not Revert); the SF or SD have been recovered but the traffic is
switched on the spare port
PF: a protection failure has been detected on the port
RF: a release command has been failed
FOP: a failure of protocol has been detected
complete: = the bridge/switch actions are completed
pending: = the bridge/switch actions are pending
The complete and pending indications precede the following statuses:
AS: automatic protection switching enabled
MS: a manual local protection command has been activated
FS: a forced local protection command has been activated
LO: a lockout local protection command has been activated
SF/SD: Signal Failure or Signal Degraded has been detected
WTR: wait time to restore status
MSP Request Source (green color) indicates where the operator commands (force/manual/lockout)
have been performed. Only present when a command is operative.
Local: switch due to near end SD/SF or local user switch command
Remote: switch due to received K1/K2 bytes.

A remote switch cannot be released locally, but can be overwritten by a switch with higher priority.
MSP Protocol Status
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This parameter indicates the current APS Protocol status.

The following values are possible:
OK
Failure (in case of FOP)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
202 / 448
MSP statuses displayed in a normal conditions
MSP statuses displayed after an automatic protection switching
MSP statuses displayed after a forced command
Figure 151. MSP Protection Status Examples
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 151. represents a MSP configuration with a normal condition, with an automatic protection
switching and with a forced command. In any situation are represented the statuses displayed on both
protected/protecting Port views. The Active status indication, with a forced command on the protecting
group, shows where the forced command is applied.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
203 / 448
13.7 MSP Commands

Select the MSP Commands option from the Port > MSP menu ( see Figure 152. on page 204 ) to
open the MSP Commands window (see Figure 153. on page 205).
Figure 152. MSP Commands option

Protecting Port : the location of the board hosting the protecting port is displayed.
Protected Port : the location of the board hosting the protected port is displayed.
The Lockout of protection command denies working channel access to the protection section by issuing
a Lockout of protection request (on the Protection Status of MSP Management).
It is possible to Lockout the Protecting Port or Lockout the Protected Port; to remove the lockout
commands select Release Ping (for the protecting) and Release Ped (for the protected).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Force to command switches the working channel (Protected port) to the protection section
(Protecting port), unless an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exits on
the protection section, by issuing a Forced switch request for that port (on the Protection Status of
MSP Management). It is also possible to switch back to the working channel using again the Force to
Protected port command.
For 1+1 nonrevertive system, forced switch no working channel transfers the working channel back from
protection to working section, unless an equal or higher priority request is in effect. Since forced switch
has higher priority than SF or SD on working section, this command will be carried out regardless of the
working section condition.
The Manual to command switches the working channel (Protected port) to the protection section
(Protecting port), unless a failure condition exits on the protection section or an equal or higher priority
switch command is in effect, by issuing a Manual switch request for that port (on the Protection Status
of MSP Management). It is also possible to switch back to the working channel using again the Manual
to Protected port command.
For 1+1 nonrevertive system, manual switch no working channel transfers the working channel back from
protection to working section, unless an equal or higher priority request is in effect. Since manual switch
has lower priority than SF or SD on working section, this command will be carried out only if the working
section is not in SF or SD condition
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
204 / 448
The Clear WTR command cancel the delay time for switching protection and protecting port after
recovery from failure/defect.
The Exercise command issues an exercise request for protection channel and checks responses on MSP
bytes, unless the protection channel is in use. This check controls the k1/k2 communication protocol
functionality to be sure that the protocol is right also on the protection section.
Not Operative in current release.
The Release command clears all previously switching commands.
Figure 153. MSP Commands (example)

The priority levels for the MSP commands are (from the higher to the lower one): Lockout, Force to,
Autoswitch (SF&SD), Manual to.
Table 3. on page 205 gives the priority rules when are occurred two different commands. The first column
on the left and the first row at the top report the switch protection and the external MSP commands. The
row/column crossing gives the command or protection result (i.e.: if an Autoswitch and a Manual to
command are present, Autoswitch is operative.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Table 3. MSP commands and Autoswitch protection priority
ED
Lockout of
protection
Forced to
Autoswitch
Manual to
Lockout of
protection
Lockout
Lockout
Lockout
Forced to
Lockout
Forced
Forced
Autoswitch
Lockout
Forced
Autoswitch
Manual to
Lockout
Forced
Autoswitch
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
205 / 448
13.8 MSP overview

MSP Overview allows to display as well as search for MSP states.
Selecting the MSP Overview option from the Configuration pull down menu Figure 154. opens
Figure 154. MSP overview

To Search the MSP groups two different ways of filtering are supported; a filtering for all protection units
located on a dedicated Board Type as well as a filtering for protection units carrying a specific Status.
The search criteria can be chosen with the help of a combo box:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Board Type: allows to filter for the MSP protected boards (example P4ES1N, P4E4N, L41N,
Ignore, etc.)
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
206 / 448
Status: allows to filter for all possible MSP protection states;the following filters values should be
offered (examples):
Ignore
NR (Normal)
DNR
AutoSF
AutoSD
AutoWTR
Manual
Force
Lockout
APS Invalid (Fail)
Bad channel (Fail)
After the filter selection click on Search button to start; the field below the Search button will be updated
(see Figure 138. )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 155. MSP overview after Search (Example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
207 / 448
Each protection unit is presented with the following information:
Protection Group (example protection GroupId, 137)
Port Id (example r01sr1sl33/port#02OpS )
Role:
Ped
Ping
Status (board status):
Protected
Protecting
A
S
F
ET
(Active)
(StandBy)
(Faulty)
Extra Traffic (Not operative)
Protection Status: defines the current state of the protection unit as follow
NR
DNR
AutoSF
AutoSD
AutoWTR
Manual
Force
Lockout
APS Invalid
Bad channel
(Normal)
(Do Not Revert)
(AutoSwitch Signal Fail)
(AutoSwitch Signal Degrade)
(AutoSwitch Wait Time To Restore)
(Manual Switch)
(Protection fail condition APS invalid)

(Protection fail condition Channel Mismatch)
The colors used for each row have the following meaning:
Green (OK):
for protected protection units active
Red (Critical):
for protected protection units in fail condition, protection unit in lockout or active
on autoswitch or commands
Orange (Major):
for protected units in standby after a command and protecting protection unit
in standby for autoswitch or commands
Cyan (Indicative:
for protecting protection unit active and no fail condition present in the schema
(Do Not Revert State)
At the bottom of the MSP Overview windows are available five button that allows to navigate through the
MSP management views and to open the Port View.
By clicking on Open Port View the operator has a quick link towards the view showing the correlation
between the alarms and the protection states.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
Before to click on one of the five buttons select a row
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
208 / 448
The buttons available are:
Open Port view:
opens the port view showing the correlation between the alarm and the MSP
protection states. See Figure 156. on page 209.
MSP Create:
opens the MSP Create dialog box. See Figure 142. on page 195 and the
MSP Delete:
opens the MSP Delete dialog box. See Figure 150. on page 201 and the
MSP Management: opens the MSP Management dialog box. See Figure 148. on page 200 and
the relevant description.
MSP Commands: opens the MSP Commands dialog box. See Figure 153. on page 205 and the
Click on Close button to exit from the MSP Overview window
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 156. Port view after Open Port View command (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
209 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
210 / 448

14 TRANSMISSION VIEW
14.1 Overview
This section describes the operations necessary for the consultation, modification and configuration of
TPs, providing a representation of the entire signal flow.
The generic Transmission View, described in this chapter, offers the possibility of displaying a single TP
or a set of all kinds of TPs (or collected functionality which is represented by one/several TPs).
To display the termination points in the Transmission View, either select specific TPs from a TP search
dialog or access the view directly from another view, e.g. by navigating from the Port View.
The Transmission View provides the following features:
Brief overview regarding transmission resources.
An overview concerning all TPs belonging to a port can be called in by activating the function
to expand the selected TP. TP names are listed in an additional information area if the mouse
pointer is positioned over it. The following states are indicated (see Figure 157. on page 212):
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
the alarm state is indicated by the alarm synthesis icon

the cross-connection state is indicated by a cross
whether a TP can be structured is indicated by a circle
whether a TP is under Performance Monitoring indicated by a blue P letter
whether a TP is involved in a loop action, it is indicated by a backfolded arrow
An overview concerning signal flow can be requested by a user action. The user can select
a TP and apply the action Transmission > Show Cross-connected TPs. The result is that
the objects related to the TP are displayed and lines indicate the connections. Expanding and
hiding TPs that are related to the currently selected TP (e.g. show all TPs that are above the
TU-12 CTP) enables all related TPs to be added to the view, thus providing a representation
of the entire signal flow.
Display of single or multiple termination points.
Search for and select a termination point in a TP search dialog and display it in the Transmission
View.
Pop-up the Transmission View from the board view. All TPs/compound TPs associated with the
physical port are displayed (i.e. TPs down to AU-4).
Provide the functionality to create/show cross-connections.
Provide the functionality to create/show Multiplex Section Protection
Provide the functionality to create/show Loopback commands.
Provide the possibility of configuring a selected TP. This functionality is accessed by calling the
configuration dialogs of the common Transmission/Port Views category.
Provide the possibility of showing a detailed view of a TP with alarms, navigating to the Port view.
Provide the possibility of showing and setting Performance Monitoring parameters and data.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
211 / 448
14.2 View elements

The Transmission View uses the symbols illustrated in Figure 157.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 157. Symbols Used in Transmission View
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
212 / 448

14.3 View Layout

The Transmission View is a main view. It provides views of specific areas, which display the transmission
resources, and the specific Transmission View pulldown menu which provides the Transmission View
operations.
14.3.1 View Description
Figure 158. illustrates the Transmission View area. TPs that are received from the network element are
displayed in the Transmission View with the respective TP and connection symbols described in
Figure 157. The number of TPs presented initially depends on whether the Transmission View is popped
up from a board view, whether a TP has been selected in another view or whether it is called without a
selected TP.
When the Transmission view is reached selecting the Transmission option in the View pull down menu
in its initial state contains no objects.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 158. Transmission View Area (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
213 / 448
It is possible both to expand a VC-4, thus displaying all underlying TPs, and to hide TPs which are of no
interest. The objects initially displayed depend on the situation/definition.
14.3.3 Naming TPs
The following rules are applied in order to identify the TPs displayed:
the root node contains the full user label,
all child nodes contain a short label indicating the position inside the tree.
14.3.4 Dynamic View Behavior

The following section describes the view states and provides a short description of events that affect the
view.
14.3.4.1 Initial state of the view
In its initial state, the Transmission View contains no objects when it is reached selecting the
Transmission option in the View pull down). Objects can be searched for and displayed using the Add
TP dialog.
14.3.4.2 Working state of the view
In its working state, the Transmission View already contains objects. If the operator searches for and
displays a TP using the TP Search dialog, the view is first initialized again and then the TP is displayed.
The same applies in the case of navigation from another view to the Transmission View the Transmission
View is always initialized and the corresponding objects are then displayed in it.
14.3.4.3 Navigation to Transmission View from other views
If the Transmission View is popped up from the Port View, only the selected TP is displayed.
14.3.4.4 Alarm notification
Alarms concerning the TPs displayed are indicated graphically by the alarm synthesis icons of the TP
objects. The TP objects are updated accordingly.
14.3.4.5 Object deletion
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
All kinds of object deletion events related to TPs displayed are indicated by the TP objects. The graphical
objects are removed accordingly from the Transmission View. Example: modification of the payload
structure from 63 TU-12 to 3 TU-3.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
214 / 448

14.3.2 Number of TPs Displayed in Transmission View
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

14.4 Transmission view access and menu

The Transmission view can be reached selecting the Transmission option in the View pull down menu.
In this case, in its initial state, the Transmission View contains no objects.
In the case of navigation from another view (example the Port view) to the Transmission View, the
Transmission View is always initialized and the corresponding objects are then displayed in it (see for
example Figure 158. on page 213.)
Selecting the Transmission option in the menu bar of Figure 158. on page 213. the complete pull down
Transmission menu is presented (Figure 159. )
The following menu items are available:
Add TP
Select the TP to show on the Transmission view.

It is described in the following paragraph.
Expand
Display TPs that are related to the selected TP.

It is described in this chapter, see para 14.13.1 on page 249.
Hide
Hide TPs that are related to the selected TP or the selected TP.
It is described in this chapter, see para 14.13.2 on page 250

TP Configuration
Set parameters for the Overhead on Synchronous TPs.

It is described in this chapter, see para 14.6 on page 227
TP Threshold Configuration Set B2 ExBER and Degraded Signal parameters.

It is described in this paragraph, see para.14.7 on page 234.
Terminate TP
Terminate a path on a AU-4 CTP

Disterminate TP
Disterminate a path on a AU-4 CTP

AU4 Concatenation:
See paragraph 11.6 on page 148
Cross-Connection
Manage the connection of the paths. See para. 15 on page 253
Monitoring Operations
Create, configure and delete POM, SUT,TCT,TCM TPs.

Performance

Structure TPs
Provides the possibility of structuring and destructuring selected TP

Loopback
Manage the loopback commands, for commissioning or

maintenance purposes. See paragraph 14.11 on page 242.
ED
02
Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G.703/G.704 or ISDNPRA

management
See para. 11.8 on page 170
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
215 / 448
Physical Media
Manage the physical TP setting. See para 14.12 on page 247.
MSP

Not available for PDH port
See paragraph 13.4 on page 199. In this paragraph is not described
the MSP>NE MSP synthesis option of the Transmission menu
because not used in this NE.
Show Supported Board
Navigate to the upper board level.

It is described in this chapter, see para 14.13.3 on page 251
Navigate to Port View
Permit to show the detailed alarm of the TP.

It is described in this chapter, see 14.13.4 on page 252
These options are described in next paragraphs except the previously referenced.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 159. Transmission menu options
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
216 / 448

14.5 ADD TP

Select the Transmission > Add TP option.

This menu item opens the TP Search dialog (see Figure 160. ). The TP Search dialog enables the user
to search for and add a TP to the Transmission View (e.g. search for all TPs on a board with PM enabled).
14.5.1 TP Search
14.5.1.1 Default Mode
In this mode, the dialog displays the structure of the equipment tree. After double-clicking, e.g. on a port,
the contents of the port appear on the right-hand side of the dialog (TP list). To keep the number of items
displayed small, they are displayed in a hierarchical order. Double-click again to recall the next level (see
Figure 162. ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 160. TP Search Dialog, Initial State

After double-clicking on an object, an Information window appears (see Figure 161. ). The message text
corresponds to the object selected.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
217 / 448
The search can be stopped with Cancel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
It is possible to select several individual TPs from the TP list by clicking on them while holding down the
Ctrl key on the keyboard. To select a block of TPs, click on the first TP and then click on the last TP in the
block while holding down the Shift key on the keyboard. But only the first TP selected in the list will be
shown in the Transmission View.
Figure 162. TP Search Dialog with Various TP Selections
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
218 / 448

Figure 161. Information Window (example)

After clicking on Show CC State, a more detailed TP list is displayed (see Figure 163. ) containing TP
cross connection status information.
Figure 163. TP Search Dialog with Status Information Displayed

The symbols in the TP list have the following significance:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 164. Symbols in TP Search
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
219 / 448

After clicking on Show Mon, a more detailed TP list is displayed (see Figure 165. ) containing TP under
monitoring with relevant type information (example TCT, POM, SUT, etc.)
Figure 165. TP search window: Show Monitoring details (example)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
After clicking on Show PM, a more detailed TP list is displayed (see Figure 166. ) containing the TPs under
Perfomance monitoring with relevant performance type information ( example near end 15 min, Farend
15 min., 1 day Nearend etc.)
Figure 166. TP search window: Show Performance Monitoring details (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
220 / 448

An easy way to recall to previously displayed boards is to use Board History ( refer to Figure 167. on page
221 ).
Select the relevant board from the list.
Figure 167. Board History Check List

Filter criteria for ASAP feature, allow to search objects that has a specified ASAP value (example
Figure 168. ). The object classes we are interested in are the ones choosed by the Class option menu
and Monitoring objects, PM objects and Equipment if the check boxes in the ASAP search frame are
checked.
The option menu ASAP value is made by the following items :
Ignore (the search aimed to ASAP value is disabled)
(No Alarms)
Primary Alarms)
(No Remote Alarms)
All Alarms)
#10001 (if exists)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
When a selection different by Ignore is done, all criteria, except Class option menu and the check boxes
related to Equipment/PM/Monitoring objects, are grayed.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
221 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 168. TP Search: ASAP search filtering
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
222 / 448

14.5.1.2 Search Mode

Use Search Mode together with the filtering options provided below the TP list (see Figure 169. ). The
following options are available:
Class:
Ignore, E1S, OpS, PPI, AU-4, VC-4, AU-4+VC-4, TU-3, VC3, AU3 & TU3 & VC3, TU-3+VC-3, TU2,
TU-12, VC-12, TU-12+VC12, AUX, MS, RS, OGPI, GMAU.
Connection State (Current connectivity status):

Ignore, not connected, connected
Alarm State (Path Trace):

Ignore, critical, major, minor, warning, not alarmed
Assign State:
Ignore, NML, EML; not used
Perf. Monitoring (Performance Monitoring condition):

Ignore, Any, None
Monitoring Object:
Ignore, POM, SUT, TCT, TCM, Any; None.
Location:
Permits to insert the location of the TP in the following format:

r<rack#>sr<subrack#>sl<slot#><port#>
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Name: not supported
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
223 / 448

Figure 169. TP Search Dialog with Different Filtering Options

After activating the search process with the Search TP button, the following dialog box appears. The
search can be interrupted by clicking on Cancel.
Figure 170. Information... Dialog for Search Process
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
When searching for PM-enabled TPs on NE, Rack or Subrack, the time for the request can be
very high. It is recommended to search for PM-enabled TPs at the board level (a board is
selected for the search).
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
224 / 448
14.5.1.3 Common Buttons

The following buttons are available in all modes:

14.5.1.3.1 Ok
Closes the dialog and opens the Transmission View containing the selected TP, as for the example of
Figure 158. on page 213.
14.5.1.3.2 Close
Closes the dialog without updating the Transmission View.
14.5.1.3.3 Print
This command is used to generate and print a list of TPs according to the current filter selection (refer to
Figure 173. for an example of a printout).
The command opens the following dialog:
Figure 171. Print to Printer

Select the desired printer from the list box and click on Ok to start the print job or abort with Cancel.
The dialog changes after clicking on File:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 172. Print to File

Enter the name of the output file in the input field or select a file name from the File Select dialog by clicking
on Select file. Select if the output format should be Postscript or ASCII.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
225 / 448

The output file is generated after clicking on Ok. Use Cancel to stop the process.
Figure 173. Example Printout

14.5.1.3.4 Help
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This command opens the online help for the TP-Search dialog.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
226 / 448
14.6 TP Configuration

Select the desired TP and then the Transmission > TP Configuration option.
TP Configuration can also be accessed from the Port view menu.
14.6.1 High Order TP Configuration
Depending on the TP selected, a dialog appears for the configuration of the main parameters of the
following objects:
VC-4 TTP (Matrix resource)
VC-4 TTP (140 Mbit/s PDH) (not available on 1640FOX)
VC-3 TTP (34 and 45 Mbit/s PDH)
The main parameters are:
C2 Signal Label: Automatic (decided by the NE) or Equipped not specific.
J1 Path Trace.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The dialogs of the following figure appears:
Figure 174. High Order TP Configuration
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
227 / 448

14.6.1.1 J1 Path Trace
If the Path Trace is 16 bytes long, the first byte is a CRC7 checksum calculated by NE.
If the Path Trace is shorter than 16 bytes, it is filled with zero bytes (0 hexadecimal).
Received fields is read only.
With the relevant button the operator can set the Expected field as:
TTI Enable
TTI Disable
TTI Repeated
The Transmitted field can be set with TTI Enable or TTI Repeated byte
Empty TTI button permits to send an all zeroes path trace.
To replace modified with the default, enter the default manually according to the following table.
Table 4. Default value for C2/V5 Signal Label
TP
VC4 TTP / AU4 CTP

(SDH)
VC4 TTP
(PDH)
VC3TTP
VC12 TTP
Significant Byte
C2
C2
C2
V5
Default value
18
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Click on Hex button Figure 175. will be opened displaying in hexadecimal code the same value repored
in Trasmitted and Received field.
Figure 175. J1 hexadecimal editor (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
228 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

14.6.1.2 C2 Signal Label

Received and Expected fields are read only.
They can display the following number, according the G.707 recommendations for the C2 Signal Label:
0: Unequipped
1: Equipped non-specific
2: TUG structure
3: Locked TU-n
4: Asynchronous 34/45Mbyte
18: Asynchronous 140Mbyte
19: ATM
20: MAN, DQDB
21: FDDI.
In the Transmitted field it is possible to select the values:
Automatic: the C2 Signal Label value is automatically selected by the NE according the VC
structure.
Equipment not specific (it corresponds to number 1)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
229 / 448
14.6.2 J0 Section Trace management

Select RST block and then select Port> TP Configuration.

The fields of the following figure appears:
Figure 176. J0 Configuration

This function is implemented in order to manage the J0 Trace configuration.
This dialog shows the current values for received, expected and transmitted trail trace and it allows the
operator to change only the values of expected and transmitted trail trace.
The received trail trace is readonly.
Expected and Transmitted fields are editable by the operator.
With the relevant button it is possible to enable or disable TTI Monitoring.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 177. J0 hexadecimal editor
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
230 / 448
14.6.3 Low Order TP Configuration

Depending on the TP selected, a dialog to configure the main parameters of the following objects:
VC-12 TTP.
Select the desired VC12 and then the Transmission > TP Configuration option.
The main parameters are:
V5 Signal Label. Automatic (decided by the NE) or Equipped not specific.
J2 Path Trace.
The following dialogs appears:
Figure 178. Low Order TP Configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
231 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
Figure 179. J2 hexadecimal editor
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
232 / 448

14.6.3.1 J2 Path Trace
If the Path Trace is 16 bytes long, the first byte is a CRC7 checksum calculated by the NE.
If the Path Trace is shorter than 16 bytes, it is filled with zero bytes (0 hexadecimal).
Expected and Transmitted fields are editable by the operator.
Mode1 enable the 16 bytes long sequence for Path trace
One repeated byte allows to set one byte that will be repeated.
Received fields is read only.
With the relevant button it is possible to enable or Disable TTI Monitoring.
Empty TTI send an all zeroes path trace.
14.6.3.2 V5 Signal Label

Received, Expected and Transmitted fields are read only.
They can display the following number, according the G.707 recommendations for the V5 Signal Label:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
Unequipped
Equipped non-specific
Asynchronous
Bit Synchronous
Byte Synchronous
In the Transmitted field it is possible to select the values:
Automatic: the C2 Signal Label value is automatically selected by the NE according the VC
structure.
Equipped not specific (it corresponds to number 1)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To replace modified with the default, enter the default manually according to the value reported in
Table 4. on page 228.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
233 / 448
14.7 TP Threshold Configuration
Select an MST block, or VC12, or VC3, or VC4.

Select the Transmission > TP Threshold Configuration option.
Figure 180. will be opened.
The user can select one of the two different Defect distribution:
Poisson distribution enable configuration of the Excessive Bit Error Ratio (ExBER on MST, VCi)
threshold and Signal Degrade (SD on MST, VCi) threshold of the TPs related counted primitives.
Bursty distribution enable configuration of the maximum number of errored frames and the total
amount of bad block per frame.
(*) ExBER Threshold : 103 to 105
Enable Consequent Actions : fixed to enabled
(*) Signal Degrade Threshold : 105 to 109
Bursty Parameters Threshold : 1 or 10 or 100 or 1000
Bursty Parameters Consecutive Bad Seconds : 2 to 10
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Note (*): the ExBER and Signal Degrade may be: B2 for MST, B3 for VC4 and VC3, BIP12 for VC12.
Figure 180. Degraded Signal Threshold selection (example)

Click on Ok to confirm the chosen parameters.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
234 / 448

This menu allows the operator to set the alarm thresholds for MST and VCi layer.

14.8 Terminate/Disterminate TP
Select the Transmission > Terminate TP or Disterminate TP option.
Only one command in the menu is available, depending on whether a TP is terminated or not.
14.8.1 Terminate TP
Use this action to terminate a path. It can be performed on a AU-4 CTP.
A cross-connection between the selected AU-4 CTP (= aTP) and a modifiable VC-4 TTP (= bTP) is
created. Three TUG-3 and TU-3 are created if the modifiable VC-4 TTP was not already structured.
A cross appears in the icon of the terminated TP:
If the TP is already cross-connected a error message appears.

14.8.2 Disterminate TP
Use this action to disterminate a path. It can be performed on a AU-4 CTP. The related cross-connection
is deleted.
NOTE: the Disterminate action is not possible in the case that is still existing any
operation/connection/termination on the underlying signals, such as:
Performance Monitoring on lower or higher TPs
POM / HPOM operations
Loopbacks on lower TPs

Thus the deletion of every operation/connection/termination is necessary, in the same order as above
listed, before disterminating a TP.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A box message will be presented, in order to confirm the TP distermination .
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
235 / 448
14.9 Monitoring Operations

Select the Transmission > Monitoring Operations option as for the following figure.
Creation/Deletion and Configuration options are presented.
Monitoring Operations can also be accessed from the Port view menu.
The commands of this menu item are for the management of the POM, SUT, TCT, TCM functions (Path
Overhead Monitoring, Supervised Unequipped Termination, Tandem Connection Termination/Monitoring;
SUT function is not operative).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This command is available for:
AU4 CTP (High order POM before and after matrix; TCM before and after matrix)
AU44c CTP (High order POM before and after matrix; TCM before and after matrix)
AU416c CTP (High order POM before and after matrix; TCM before and after matrix) only for
1660SM
TU-3 CTP (Low order POM before and after matrix;TCM before and after matrix)
TU-12 CTP (Low order POM before and after matrix; TCM before and after matrix)
VC4 (TCT after matrix)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
236 / 448

14.9.1 Creation/Deletion
This dialog allows multiple object creation/deletion.
The dialog shown in the following Figure 181. opens:
Figure 181. Monitoring Operations Creation/Deletion

The Path Overhead Monitoring has the following parameters:
Before Matrix
After Matrix
The Supervisory Unequipped Termination, not operative in current release, has the following parameters:
Sink (before matrix)

Sink (after matrix)
Source
Bidirectional
The Tandem Connection has the following configurable parameters:
Tandem Connections Monitoring (TCM):
TCM Before Matrix
TCM After Matrix

Tandem Connection Termination (TCT):
TCT Bidirectional Before Matrix
TCT Bidirectional After Matrix
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Press Ok to apply the parameters or Close to close the dialog and discard the not with Ok applied
changes.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
237 / 448
When select and apply the Path Overhead Monitoring, the changes will be displayed in the Port View in
the following manner:
Figure 182. Display of POM and TCM in Port View (example)

When select and apply the Tandem Connection Monitoring / Tandem Connection Termination, the
changes will be displayed in the Port View in the following manner:
Figure 183. Display of POM and TCM/TCT in Port View (example)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Also refer to para. 11.11 on page 175, about navigation to Monitoring View.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
238 / 448

The TP list... button opens the Clipboard window; refer to paragraph 4.3.2.3 on page 59 about the use
of the Clipboard.

14.9.2 Configuration
Depending on the parameters selected in the Monitoring Operations Creation/Deletion dialog, not all
sections of the dialog are available.
NOTE: It is possible to open the POM and TCT/TCM Configuration dialog for a CTP even if neither
PathOverheadMonitor nor Tandem Connection was created before (SUT isnt available in this
release). No changes can be made in this case and the values displayed can be ignored.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 184. Monitor Configuration
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
239 / 448
TTI Definition

The TTI (Trail Trace Identifier) has a maximum length of 16 characters.

The following TTI Definitions are available:
TTI Expected
TTI Received without the display
TTI Sent
The following TTI Types are available:
TTI Enabled
TTI Disabled
TTI Repeated Byte
Error Distribution
Poisson and Bursty error distribution are supported.
TCM/TCT ConsActions
It is needed to support explicit consequent action activation (AIS insertion) for TCT sink and
bidirectional.
Thresholds
Set the thresholds of the following parameters:
Signal Degrade
Poisson mode only: from 105 to 109.
Excessive Error
Poisson mode only: from 103 also if presented a selection from 103 to 105
Bursty Degrade
Select a value between 1 and 1000 errors/sec for the Bursty Degrade threshold.
Bursty Consecutive
Select a value between 2 and 10 sec for the Bursty Degrade Consecutive.
Alarm Timing
Raising and Clearing Timing are not supported by OMSN.
Unequipped Trail
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Not available.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
240 / 448
14.10 Structure TPs

Select the Transmission > Structure TPs option as for the following figure.
This menu item provides the possibility of structuring and destructuring a selected TP. The level that is
selected defines how the signal is to be structured, e.g. if a VC-4 TTP is selected and the menu item TU-12
is chosen, the signal is structured down to 63 TU-12 CTPs. The following menu items represent all those
possible:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
TU-2. Not supported.

TU-3.
TU-12.
AU3. Not supported.
AU4. Not supported.
VC-3/VC-4. Not supported.
VC-12. Not supported.
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
241 / 448
The commands of this menu item are for the management of the loopback commands, for commissioning
or maintenance purposes.
14.11.1 Loopback Configuration
The loopbacks can be applied at line (external to equipment) level or at internal equipment level. The
loopback commands are used to separate the communication network into independent part checking the
line/equipment functionality during the network installation or maintenance operation.
The loopback architecture provides four configurations ( see Figure 185. ).
Line Loopback And Continue
Line Loopback And AIS
Internal Loopback And Continue
Internal Loopback and AIS
Initial
Destination
Line
Internal
Destination
Line
Initial
AIS
Line Loop And Continue
Line Loop And AIS
Destination
AIS
Initial
Internal
Line
Initial
Internal loop And Continue
Line
Destination
Internal loop And AIS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 185. Loopback configurations
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
242 / 448

14.11 Loopback

Table 5. Supported loopback

Port type
Line Loop &

Continue
Line Loop &

AIS
Internal Loop
& Continue
Internal Loop
& AIS
STM64
(only on 1660SM Rel. 5.x)
OK
Access Denied
OK
Access Denied
STM16
(only on 1660SM)
OK
Access Denied
OK
Access Denied
STM4
Access Denied
OK
Access Denied
OK
STM1
Access Denied
OK
Access Denied
OK
140Mbit/s
(not available on 1640FOX)
Access Denied
OK
Access Denied
OK
34/45 Mbit/s
OK
Access Denied
OK
Access Denied
2 Mbit/s
Access Denied
OK
Access Denied
OK
Select a TP that supports the Loopback Configuration

Loopbacks act on the following TPs:
PDH board (only from the Port View):
Line loopback performed on:
P for 2/34/45/140 Mbit/s PPI (140 Mbit/s is not available on 1640FOX)
Internal loopback performed on:
p12 for 2 Mbit/s CTP
p31 for 34/45 Mbit/s CTP
p4 for 140Mbit/s CTP (140 Mbit/s is not available on 1640FOX)
SDH board:
The loopback configuration can be done only on SDH ports with the acronym ending
with a N letter (i.e. P4S1N, S4.1N, L4.1N, L4.2N, etc.)
Line loopback performed on:
EIS for electrical STM1 SPI
OpS for optical STM1, STM4, STM16 SPI (only available on 1660SM), STM64
SPI (only available on 1660SM Rel.5.x)
Internal loopback performed on:
MsT TTP for STM1, STM4, STM16 (only available on 1660SM), STM64 (only
available on 1660SM Rel. 5.x)
Select the Transmission > Loopback > Port Loopback Configuration option as for the following
figure.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Port Loopback Configuration can also be accessed from the Port view menu.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
243 / 448

Figure 186. opens.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 186. Port Loopbacks View

Choose the TP clicking on the Choose TP button (the second Choose TP button is not available).
Select the TP where to apply the loopback command. For the TP selection procedure, follow the TP
research description reported in para. 14.5.1 on page 217. For this NE the Timed Loopbacks field is
not managed and thus Start/Stop loopbacks time is not editable.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
244 / 448

14.11.2 Loopback Management

To manage the loopback configuration select the Transmission > Loopback > Loopback
Management option as for the following figure.
Loopback Management can also be accessed from the Port view menu and from the Configuration
menu.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 187. opens.
Figure 187. Loopback Management
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
245 / 448
Search Criteria (not operative): to configure the filter select the Loop and Continue type (Yes= Loop
And Continue, No= Loop And AIS) then select the Directionality Internal or Line and edit the Initial
TP Id (write: rack, subrack, board, port# and the TP type: EIS (SPI/PPI Electrical), OpS (SPI/PPI
Optical), MST and so on. For Initial TP has to be intended the outgoing signal while for
Destination TP the incoming signal. Enable the filter through the Toggle Filter Enable/Disable
button. Click on the Search button to start the configured loopback research into the current
loopback table.
The Delete command permits to delete a loopback listed in the Current loopbacks Table: select a
loopback in the list and click on the Delete button.
The Create command permits to create a new loopback configuration: clicking on Create the
previous figure ( Figure 186. ) opens. Follow the previously paragraph indications to create a new
loopback configuration.
The activated loopbacks are signalled in the Port view and in the Transmission view as for the following
figures:
PORT VIEW
Active Loopback
TRANSMISSION VIEW
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Active Loopback
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
246 / 448

The configured loopback are listed into the current loopbacks table. This table can be managed by the
Search criteria, Delete and Create commands.
14.12 Physical Media

Select the Transmission > Physical Media option as for the following figure.
The Physical Media options permit to set physical configuration of each TP.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
It opens a menu in which the various options will be available according the TPs type (for the option
common with the Port view reference is made to the relevant paragraph):
ED
02
ALS Management.
Single Fiber Configuration.
Extra traffic
Not operative
Regeneration Section management
Not operative
Set Domain
HDSL Configuration
Not operative
NT Configuration
Not operative
X21 Configuration
Not operative
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
247 / 448
This option is referred to the SECurity management and allows the user to set the Manager list and the
Access Control Domain of the selected TP.
Select the block: EIS for Electrical SDH port, OpS for Optical SDH port, P (PPI) for PDH port.
Select the Set Domain option from the Physical Media cascade menu to present the following view:
NML Assignment: each connected manager to the TP is highlighted in the list. The user can set a
manager clicking on the denomination.
Several manager can be enabled contemporaneously, having in charge the TP.
The Manager List contains the list of managers ( i.e. RM, SY, NPOS , EML) that work on the NE. The
EMLUSM administrator (SH or Craft Terminal) should set the Manager List only to remove a
manager in case of emergency (i.e. the Manager misses the NE connection).
Resource domain field allow to select the domain among that displayed in the list, assigning it to
the TP.
The different domains could be assigned to different operators.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 188. Set Domain
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
248 / 448

14.12.1 Set Domain

14.13 Navigation Commands

14.13.1 Expand
Select the Transmission > Expand option as for the following figure.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This menu item provides the possibility of displaying TPs that are related to the selected TP. These may
be TPs that are contained by the TP or TPs which belong to the physical port that is actually connected
to the TP.
Show next level of lower TPs,
Show all lower TPs,
Show next level of upper TPs,
Show all upper TPs.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
249 / 448
14.13.2 Hide

Select the Transmission > Hide option as for the following figure.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This menu item provides the possibility of hiding all upper/lower TPs of a selected TP and the deletion of
a selected TP.
Lower TPs,
Upper TPs,
Selected TPs.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
250 / 448

14.13.3 Show Supported Board

Select the Transmission > Show Supported Board option.
This menu provides the possibility of navigating directly to the board that supports the TP.
The Board View appears:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 189. Board View (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
251 / 448
14.13.4 Navigate to Port View
This menu provides the possibility of navigating to the corresponding Port View related to the selected
TP in order to access a detailed overview of alarms quickly.
The Port View appears:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 190. Port View
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
252 / 448

Select the Transmission > Navigate to Port View option.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

15 CROSS-CONNECTION MANAGEMENT
15.1 Introduction
15.1.1 Overview
The purpose of this domain is to manage the connection of the high and low level path.
The following chapters provide the user with information concerning operations on cross-connections:
Para. 15.1.2 on page 254 Multiplex Structures for SDH

gives an overview on the SDH technology
Para. 15.1.3 on page 257 Definition of Termination Points

gives an overview about the termination points implemented on the NE
Para. 15.1.5 on page 262 Cross-Connection Types

provides information concerning cross-connection types supported by the NE
Para. 15.1.6 on page 264 Cross-Connection Protection

provides information concerning cross-connection protection supported by the NE
Para. 15.2 on page 266 Operative sequence to execute Cross-Connections

details the complete procedure to realize cross-connection
Para. 15.3 on page 270 Cross-Connections Management

details the contents of the main cross-connections view
Para. 15.4 on page 277 Create/Modify Cross-Connections

describes the creation and modification of cross-connections
Para. 15.5 on page 292 Activate/Deactivate/Delete Cross-Connections

describes the activation, deactivation and deletion of cross-connections.
Activation and deactivation not supported in current release.
Para. 15.6 on page 293 Split and Join Cross-Connections

describes how to split or join bidirectional cross-connections.
Para. 15.7 on page 296 Protection Switching

deals with switching actions (force, manual, lockout protection) on cross-connections
Para. 15.8 on page 298 Print

deals with printing out list entries on printers or into files
Para. 15.9 on page 299 Show Cross-Connected TPs

describes the possibility of showing connections between two or more TPs of different different
hierarchies, e.g. connection between au4 and vc4.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
253 / 448
By introducing the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH), a standardized transmission has been created,
matching the European with the American standard. The SDH signal structure contains an extended
overhead as well as a fixed pointer controlled assignment of the user signal elements, thus improving the
possibilities of the network management.
Signals of the Synchronous and Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) are packed by synchronous
multiplexers into Virtual Containers (VC). The STM-1 signal structure is achieved by using the multiplex
structure complying with ITU-T and ETSI, (see Figure 191. ). Each of the user channels (2 Mbit/s, 34
Mbit/s, 45 Mbit/s and 140 Mbit/s) is packed into a container synchronous to the STM-1 frame according
to a predefined structure.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To adjust the plesiochronous signals to the synchronous network clock, certain filling algorithms are
available. Fix fill bits are inserted into synchronous signals. A byte column (9 Byte) as Path Overhead
(POH) is added to the Container (C) generated. Path Overhead and Container together form the Virtual
Container (VC). With the pointer pointing to the start of the VC, in respect of the STM-1 frame, an
Administrative Unit (AU) or if several Containers of a group are to be combined a Tributary Unit (TU)
is generated. Several TUs form a Tributary Unit Group (TUG) and TUGs again can be combined into a
VC. The AU of the signal, together with the Section Overhead (SOH), finally make up the STM-1 frame.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
254 / 448

15.1.2 Multiplex Structures for SDH
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 191. SDH Multiplex Structure according to ITU-T G.707
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
255 / 448
C11
VC11
VC12
C12
2 Mbit/s
(1,5 Mbit/s)
VC2
C2
6 Mbit/s
VC3
C3
C4
(45 Mbit/s)
34 Mbit/s
140 Mbit/s
TU11
TU12
TU2
TU3
x3
x1
x1
x4
TUG2
x7
TUG3
x7
VC3
x3
VC4
C
VC
TU
TUG
AU
x1
x3
STM1
xN
not implemented
Pointer -Processing
: Container
: Virtual Container
: Tributary Unit
: Tributary Unit Group
: Administrative Unit
Legend:
AU3
AU4

STMN
The STM-1 frame consists of:

a Section Overhead (SOH)
an AU Pointer area
a payload area

270 Columns (Bytes)

9
270
1
Section Overhead
SOH
3
4
9 rows
AU Pointer
Payload
Section Overhead
SOH
9
Figure 192. Frame Construction within the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
The STM-1 frame has a basic bit rate of 155.520 Mbit/s. A single user channel is packed into a Virtual
Container. These Virtual Containers are of different size and may be nested or packed differently.
Virtual Containers for the European bit rates:
the STM-1 frame contains a VC-4,

a VC-4 may contain one C-4 or three TUG-3,
each TUG-3 may contain one VC-3 or seven TUG-2,
each TUG-2 contains three VC-12 or one VC-2.
An STM-1 user signal can be constructed of:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
either 1 x VC-4
or 3 x VC-3
or 2 x VC-3 + 7 x VC-2
or 2 x VC-3 + 21 x VC-12
or 1 x VC-3 + 14 x VC-2
or 1 x VC-3 + 7 x VC-2 + 21 x VC-12
or 21 x VC-2
or 14 x VC-2 + 21 x VC-12
or 7 x VC-2 + 42 x VC-12
or 63 x VC-12.
STM-N signals are constructed by integer multiples of the basic signal STM-1 of 155.520 Mbit/s. For
example an STM-16 signal of 2.488.320 Mbit/s is generated by combining sixteen STM-1 signals byte
interleaved.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
256 / 448
15.1.3 Definition of Termination Points (TP)

When ports are depicted on the user interface, the following abbreviations are used.
This section concerns the multiplex structure (see Figure 191. ) as well as on the information model of
object-oriented programming which was used when forming the user interface. As a rule, a Termination
Point (TP) is the starting and terminating point of a transmission segment. A distinction is made between
the following types of TPs:
CTP (Connection Termination Point)

The CTP represents the termination of a connection. The transmission signal is terminated, i.e.,
the received signal is monitored and the error signaling evaluated, while own-code signaling is
inserted in the transmitted signal.
TTP (Trail Termination Point)

The TTP represents the termination of a transmission segment. The signal is monitored and passed
on after modification in one form or another.
Both TP types exist on the SDH level and the PDH level.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
CTPs on SDH level

On SDH level (see Figure 193. ) a distinction is made between the following CTPs:
AU-4 (Connection Termination Point)

The AU-4 CTP represents both the creation and termination of an STM-1 connection. The
High-order Connection Supervision (HCS) function is included.
TU-x (Connection Termination Point), i.e. TU-12 CTP, TU-2 CTP, TU-3 CTP.
The TU-x CTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-x connection. The
Low-order Connection Supervision (LCS) function is included.
CTPs on PDH level

On PDH level (see Figure 194. ), a distinction is made between the following CTPs:
E4 (Connection Termination Point)

The E4-CTP represents the nonintrusive monitoring of incoming 140 Mbit/s PPI.
S4 (Connection Termination Point)

The S4-CTP represents the nonintrusive monitoring of outgoing 140 Mbit/s PPI .





The E1-CTP represents the nonintrusive monitoring of incoming 2 Mbit/s PPI. The
Mon.(Monitoring) label indicates that is possible to enable the CRC4 control signal.

The S1-CTP represents the nonintrusive monitoring of outgoing 2 Mbit/s PPI . The
Mon.(Monitoring) label indicates that is possible to enable the CRC4 control signal.
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
257 / 448
TTPs on SDH level
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
ES (Electrical Section TTP)

An ESTTP displays the physical characteristics of a port with electrical access (level and code
monitoring and conversion).
OS (Optical Section TTP)

An OSTTP displays the physical characteristics of a port with optical access (level and code
monitoring and conversion).
RST (Regenerator Section TTP)

An RSTTP displays the creation and/or termination of an RSOH (Regenerator Section
Overhead), i.e., rows 1 to 3 of the first 9xN columns of an STM-N frame.
MST (Multiplexer Section TTP)

An MSTTP displays the creation and/or termination of an MSOH (Multiplexer Section
Overhead), i.e., rows 5 to 9 of the first 9xN columns of an STM-N frame.
VC-4 (Trail Termination Point)

A VC-4 TTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-4 path.
TTPs on PDH level

On PDH level (see Figure 194. ) a distinction is made between the following TTPs:
PPI (Trail Termination Point)

On the PDH side, an PPITTP corresponds to the ESTTP of the synchronous side. Depending
on the type, it can either display the characteristics of a 140 Mbit/s, a 45MBit/s, a 34 Mbit/s or
a 2 Mbit/s port.
E4 (Trail Termination Point)

The E4-TTP represents the creation and/or termination of a 140 Mbit/s connection.

The E3-TTP represents the creation and/or termination of a 34 Mbit/s connection.

The E2-TTP represents the creation and/or termination of an 8 Mbit/s connection.



MSP definition
Transmit side, the MSNP (AU4CTP) input enters two different MSNP/MSN (unProtected CTP)
sources and then the MSNTTP working and protection sources (to insert the K1K2 bytes) are sent
to the own SPI interfaces. Receive side, the working and protection MSN/MSNP outputs (AU4CTP)
enter in the switching selector. The MSNPTTP terminates the selected signal and checks the SSF
and the MSP protocol failure.
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
258 / 448

On SDH level (see Figure 193. ) a distinction is made between the following TTPs:

!"#
$
+

%&
'(
'(
'(
(
')
')
')
')
')
')
')
)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
*)
*)
*)
Figure 193. SDH Transport Level Diagram
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
259 / 448
.+ "
*,+"
!
!
!()&
)+"
(+"
!(*&
!(

%
!(
!*
%(
%(
!)
!)
!*
%*)

%*)
!*
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
%*)

Figure 194. PDH Transport Level Diagram
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
260 / 448

-

15.1.4 Mapping Tables: TP Names

The TP names on the 1660SM reflect the software model the user interface is based on. Therefore they
differ from the TP names given in the ITU-T recommendations. The following tables list the TP names
mapping conventions in the Transmission View.
Table 6. PDH TPs

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Table 7. SDH TPs

!

!

ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
261 / 448
A cross-connection represents the logical connection between the input and output of the matrix, called
the matrix port.
The matrix only receives and transmits signals in GTI format. The Generic Transport Interface GTI,
Alcatels standardized signal format for internal interfaces, is similar to the STM-1 format. The incoming
signals are mapped or converted to GTI format on the plesiochronous and synchronous I/O boards. This
frame is based on the STM-1 frame specified by ITU-T Recommendation G.707. It enables the transport
of all signals in the US hierarchy and ETSI hierarchy levels 1 to 4 (1.5 Mbit/s to 140 Mbit/s) mapped to
Virtual Containers (VCs) (see Figure 191. ).
The VCs are sent from the I/O boards to both copies of the Matrix (A and B) via the GTI. The matrix
performs the cross-connection on the VC-4, VC-3, VC-2 or VC-12 level and transfers the VCs to the
relevant I/O boards via GTI. The configuration of both matrix copies is always identical. On the I/O boards,
one GTI signal is selected from Copy A or Copy B, based on quality.
The NE supports unidirectional, bidirectional and broadcast connections unprotected as well as protected.
15.1.5.1 Unidirectional Connection
Information is transmitted exclusively from the input port to the output port (point-to-point); there is no
routing in reverse direction.
input TP
output TP
Figure 195. Unidirectional Connection

15.1.5.2 Bidirectional Connection
Information is transmitted between input port and output port in both directions (point-to-point).
input TP
output TP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 196. Bidirectional Connection
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
262 / 448

15.1.5 Cross-Connection Types

15.1.5.3 Broadcast Connection (Multi-leg / Multipoint)

In contrast to a cross-connection between just two points (point-to-point), one source and one sink, a
broadcast connection consist of one source and several sinks, different legs that share the same source
TP.
In the example below, information is broadcast from one input to outputs A, B and C on three legs.
output A
input TP
leg 1
leg 2
leg 3
output B
output C
Figure 197. Example of Broadcast Connection with Three Legs
A warning box indicates when the resources available for broadcast connections are exhausted.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
Non-intrusive Monitoring
Adding a protection leg to a unidirectional cross-connection offers the ability to perform
non-intrusive monitoring on this cross-connection. No errors are introduced to the original
cross-connection with applying or removing the protection leg.
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
263 / 448
15.1.6 Cross-Connection Protection
A unidirectional connection is routed from Input A to the Output (primary route). In the case of a failure,
the system automatically switches to the protection path from protection Input B to the Output. This second
connection is permanently kept in hot standby operation (see Figure 198. ).
input A
prot.
input B
output TP
in case of
failure
Figure 198. Protected Unidirectional Connection

15.1.6.2 Protected Bidirectional Connection
A bidirectional connection is routed from Input A to the Output C (primary route). Input A (input protected
see Figure 199. ) can be protected:
in case of
failure
Figure 199. Bidirectional Connection Input Protected
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
By means of this connection are created links with SNCP protection.
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
264 / 448

15.1.6.1 Protected Unidirectional Connection

15.1.6.3 Protected Broadcast Connection

The protected broadcast is realized as a set of independent, protected, unidirectional connections using
the same pair of input termination points, as illustrated in Figure 200. Each protection can be forced,
locked out or switched independently. Therefore, if a failure occurs at a certain input, it is possible that only
some of the protections of the protected broadcast actually switch to the protection input.

/

Figure 200. Protected Broadcast

Figure 200. shows a broadcast connection from input A to outputs A, B and C. Leg 2 and 3 are protected
via input B, whereas leg 1 is not protected.
In current release only one out of N legs can be protected.
15.1.6.4 Drop and Continue Connection
A Drop and Continue connection is a composed by: (see Figure 201. )
a unidirectional connection routed from Input A to the Output C and also to Input protecting B.
a unidirectional connection from Input protecting B to Output C.
a unidirectional connection from Output C to Input A.
Output C is protected; when receive from Input main the connection is defined normal, when receive
from Input Protecting main the connection is defined inverse.
All the connections are created in a single step of configuration.
Input
Prot. input
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Output
Figure 201. Drop and Continue Normal
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
265 / 448
This paragraphs list the complete procedure to realize some examples of cross-connection moving among
the various menus.
The following main cases have been considered:
[1]
High order signal cross connection (AU4s between SDH ports);
[2]
High order concatenated signal cross connection (AU4xc between SDH ports)
[3]
Low order signal cross connection (TU12 cross connected with VC12; ports involved: SDH and
PDH )
[4]
4XANY TPs cross connection (ports involved: 4XANY and SDH)
[5]
ISA board TPs cross connection (ports involved:ISA, SDH or PDH)
[1] Procedure for high order signal (AU4)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In the following example an AU4 will be cross connected with another AU4; the P4S1N board has been
taken like reference board.
In the subrack view click twice on the SDH port; the board view will be opened
Click twice on the daughter board icon; the daughter view will be opened.
Click twice on the SDH port icon present in the daughter view. the port view will be opened with all
the relevant TPs (SPI, RST, MST, MSP and AU4).
Select the AU4 TP and then choose the Port >Cross Connection > Create Cross Connection option
of the menu bar; a new window called Main Cross Connection is opened.
Select the correct value in the fields Type and Protection
The Input field is automatically filled in
Click on Choose relevant to the Output field; a new window called Search for Cross
Connection Output is opened.
On the Equipment field select the Board (in our example is P4S1N), in the Termination Points
field select the AU4
Click on OK; the Search for Cross Connection Output window is closed.
Repeat the same procedure as obove described for the Prot. Input field for protected connections
Click on OK in the Main Cross Connection window to terminate the creation.
To check the presence of the new cross connection select the Port >Cross Connection > Cross
Connection Management option of the menu bar; a new window called Coss connection
Management will be opened
ED
Click on the Search button; all the cross connected Tps will be displayed in the Cros
Connection in list field.
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
266 / 448

15.2 Operative Sequence to execute Cross-Connections
[2] Procedure for AU4 concatenated (AU4xC)

N.B.
Before to create an AU4 concatenated crossconnection is necessary to define that the AU4s
on a STM4 or STM16 (the last only for 1660SM) board are concatenated as explained in para
11.6 on page 148.
In the subrack view click twice on the STM_N SDH port; the board view will be opened
Click twice on the SDH port icon present in the board view. the port view will be opened with all the
relevant TPs (SPI, RST, MST, MSP and AU4xC).
Select the AU4xC (with 4 X 16) TP and then choose the Port >Cross Connection > Create
Cross Connection option of the menu bar; a new window called Main Cross Connection is opened.
On the Equipment field select the STMN Board , in the Termination Points field select the
AU4xC (with 4 X 16) (syntax example: r01sr1sl24/port#01#01AU4P4c ).
Repeat the same procedure as obove described for the Prot. Input field for protected connections
Click on the Search button; all the cross connected Tp will be displayed in the Cros
[3] Procedure for low order signal (example TU12)

In the following example a VC12 will be cross connected with a TU12; the boards P4S1N and A21E1
has been taken like reference board for this example.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Note: the P4S1N STM1 port payload must be structure as TU12
In the subrack view select Configuration > Cross Connection Management the Cross Connection
Management window will be opened.
Click on the Create button; a new window called Main Cross Connection is opened.
ED
Click on Choose relevant to the Input field; a new window called Search for Cross
Connection Input is opened.
On the Equipment field select the Equipment Subrack (SR60M for 1660SM), in the TP Seach
Criteria field select the TU12&VC12, then click on search.
In the Termination Point Field select the TU12 to be connected and subsequently click on OK
button; the Search for Cross Connection Input window will be closed.
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
267 / 448
Click on Choose relevant to the Output field and repeat the same sequence as above
described for the input point but instead of TU12 select now the VC12 to be connected in the
Termination Point Field; click on OK button AND the Search for Cross Connection Output
window will be closed.
Select the VC12 TP and then select the Port >Cross Connection > Create Cross Connection
option of the menu bar; a new window called Main Cross Connection is opened.
Repeat the same on the Prot. Input field for protected connections by selecting the TU12 involved
in the protection.
[4] 4XANY TPs cross connection

Note: before to create a cross connection the following step must be executed:
configure the 4xANY board with the Equipment > Set menu
configure the 4xANY MODULES with the Equipment > Set menu and choose the traffic type
that must be supported by the module (e.g. FICON, FDDI etc.); after having selected the traffic
type, automatically a number of TPs (VC4) are generated for this port and can be viewed in
the port view. All the TPs must be used when the cross connection will be created.
For details on 4xANY board refer to the Technical Handbook.
In the subrack view click twice on the 4xANY board; the board view will be opened .
Click twice on the module to be used; the daughter view will be opened
Click twice on the daughter board icon; the port view will be opened with all the relevant TPs.
In the following will be explained how to connect one TpP of the 4XANY; repeat the same sequence for
all the TPs that has been generated when the traffic type has been defined.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Select the VC4 TP and then choose the Port >Cross Connection > Create Cross Connection
option of the menu bar; a new window called Main Cross Connection is opened.
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
268 / 448


On the Equipment field select the Board to be used for the connection with the 4XANY board
(for example S4.1N), in the Termination Points field select the AU4
repeat the same procedure for all the VC4 generated for the specific traffic type associated to the
4xANY module.
To check the presence of the new crossconnection select the Port >Cross Connection > Cross
[5] ISA board TPs cross connection

Note: before to create a cross connection the following step must be executed:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
configure the ISA board with the Equipment > Set menu
define the TP that must be created on the ISA board by selecting the Configuration > ISA Port
Configuration menu (refer to Chapter 20 for details)
The ISA board TP cross connection is similar to that described for the 4xANY board so refer to point
[4] .
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
269 / 448
A list of cross-connections can be displayed in the Cross-Connection Management dialog (see

Figure 204. on page 275). The dialog can be accessed via the Transmission or Port view or via
Configuration menu as indicated in Figure 202.
Transmission view is presented with the View Transmission pull down menu.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Port view is presented with the View Equipment pull down menu, then clicking on the presented
objects with the sequence board>port.
Figure 202. Cross connection management cascade menu
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
270 / 448

15.3 Cross-Connections management
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The Cross-Connection Management dialog is initially empty (see Figure 203. on page 273).
A list of cross-connections is displayed in the Cross-Connection Management dialog after selecting the
Search command.
There are two possibilities of displaying a list of cross-connections:
do not enter any search criteria and press the Search button to display a list of all existing
cross-connections,
enter Search Criteria (one or more) and then press the Search button to display a selection of
cross-connections. Set Ignore for attributes not to be used as filtering criteria.
Use button Cancel Search to cancel an active search request or close the dialog.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
271 / 448
15.3.1 Search Criteria

Name (not supported in current release)
Number of the crossconnection (automatically assigned)
ACD (not supported in current release)

Enter the Access Control Domain of the relevant cross-connections: E= connection made with
1353SH, M= connection made with 1354RM, empty= connection made with CT.
This filter option can only be used, if at least one ACD is defined on the NE and one or more
cross-connections are assigned to this ACD(s).
Type
Select the connection type:
Unidirectional
Bidirectional
Multipoint
Drop&Continue
Protection
Select protection functionality:
Protected
Not protected
TP Class
Select one of the TP types involved in the requested cross-connection.
State
Select the connection state:
Activated
Deactivated (not operative in current release, the connection state is always Activated)
Prot. State
Select the protection state (for more detailed information, refer to Chapter 9.5):
Forced to Input
Forced to Protecting
Manual Switch to Input
Manual Switch to Protecting
Auto. Switch to Input
Auto. Switch to Protecting
Lockout
Normal I
Normal P
TP ID Prefix
Enter the TP type and physical location of the port, or only the physical location at least down to board
level, according to the following format:
r<rack#>s<subr.#>b<board#>/port#<port#>-TP (see Figure 204. on page 275)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The # within brackets identifies a number.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
272 / 448

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 203. Cross-Connection Management Dialog (Initial State)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
273 / 448

After a successful search, a read only list of cross-connections matching the search criteria appears
(see Figure 204. ). The number of matching cross-connections is displayed in the upper left corner of the
list. The list contains information concerning the following parameters for each cross-connection:
Prot. State
detailed switching information in the format:
<protection state> <traffic ind> (<location>:<signal state><switch status>,
[<location>:<signal state><switch status>])
<protection state>
Normal, Auto, Lockout, Forced or Manual.
<traffic ind>
indicates the location of current traffic:
P (Protecting input) or I (Input).
<location>
indicates the location of the errored signal:
P (Protecting input) or I (Input)
<signal state>
indicates the signal state: SD (Signal Degrade) or SF (Signal Failure)
<switch status>
status of the switch:
c (completed) or p (pending)
Example:
Auto I (P:SD-c)
There has been an Automatic switch from the protecting input to the Input where the traffic is
currently located. The reason for the automatic switch was Signal Degrade in the Protecting input.
The switch was completed.
SNCP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Protection type indication I ( Inherently monitored SubNetwok Protection) or N (Nonintrusively

Sub_Network Connection Protection)
State
connection state indicating whether cross-connection is A(ctivated) or D(eactivated)
Dir.
Direction-related connection type:
uni(directional), bi(directional), mp (multipoint), DC_N (Drop & Continue Normal) or DC_I (Drop &
Continue Inverse)
Input
signal source; contains the TP type and physical location of the port according to the format
<rack#><subr.#><board#><port#>,<port#>#TP (see Figure 204. on page 275)
Protecting Input
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
274 / 448

15.3.2 Cross-Connection List
protecting source (for protected cross-connections only); contains the TP type and physical location
of the port according to the format
r<rack#>s<subr.#>b<board#>/port#<port#>-TP (see Figure 204. on page 275)

Output
signal destination
for point-to-point cross-connections, the TP ID of the destination is specified according to the format
r<rack#>s<subr.#>b<board#>/port#<port#>-TP ; for multi-leg cross-connections, the string
multiple Legs appears instead.
At the bottom of the dialog is a range of buttons to start actions on the listed cross-connections. Before
starting any action apart from creation or printing, mark at least one cross-connection.
To mark several cross-connections (multi-select) that are listed in succession, select the first
cross-connection of a block with a mouse click and the last one with a mouse click while pressing the
<Shift> key.
Or, mark a number of individual cross-connections by clicking the mouse button while pressing the
<Control> key.
Deselect cross-connections by clicking on the respective row while simultaneously pressing the <Control>
key. To deselect a number of cross-connections at a time, press the <Shift> key and hold it down while
moving the mouse pointer to the last entry.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
All actions that may affect traffic must be confirmed. A confirmation dialog pops up in this case and the
user has to confirm the requested action.
Figure 204. Cross-Connection Management Dialog (After Search)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
275 / 448
15.3.3 Actions available
Create a crossconnection (see chapter 15.4 on page 277)

The Main Cross-Connection dialog (see Figure 208. on page 284) is opened.
Modify a Cross-Connection (see chapter 15.4 on page 277)

Available if just one cross-connection is selected from the list. The Main Cross-Connection dialog
(see Figure 208. on page 284) is opened.
Activate a Cross-Connection (see chapter 15.5 on page 292)

Available if at least one cross-connection is selected from the list. Not operative in current release.
Deactivate a Cross-Connection (see chapter 15.5 on page 292)

Available if at least one cross-connection is selected from the list. Not operative in current release.
Delete a Cross-Connection (see chapter 15.5 on page 292)

Available if at least one cross-connection is selected from the list.
Split a Cross-Connection (see paragraph 15.6.1 on page 295)

Available if at least one bidirectional cross connection is selected from the list.
Join Cross-Connections (see paragraph 15.6.2 on page 295)

Available if two cross connections are selected.
Protection Switching (see chapter 15.7 on page 296)

Available if exactly one protected cross-connection is selected from the list. The Protection Actions
dialog is opened.
Print (see chapter 15.8 on page 298)

Prints the filtered list of cross-connections.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The dialog has to be closed explicitly.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
276 / 448

The following actions are available:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

15.4 Create/Modify Cross-Connections

Creation and modification of cross-connections are performed in the Main Cross-Connection dialog. The
dialog can be accessed via the Transmission or Port view as for the following menus example or by using
the Create or Modify buttons (chapter 15.3.3 on page 276) in the Cross-Connection Management
dialog (see Figure 203. on page 273).
The dialog box of Figure 208. on page 284 is presented ( Main Cross Connection view).
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
277 / 448
All operations that may affect traffic must be confirmed. The subsystem provides a confirmation
dialog box before the operation can be executed.
If the window displays an existing cross-connection, the OK button is insensitive when this
cross-connection is assigned to NML or it is not assigned to the user profile.
If the window is used to create a new cross-connection, the system verifies that the relevant TPs can
be used (not assigned to NML and assigned to the user profile) after the OK button is pressed. If a
specified TP is not permitted, the corresponding message box appears.
15.4.1 Cross-Connection Parameters

The Main Cross Connection view of Figure 208. on page 284 permits to create the cross connections.
A cross-connection is defined through a set of parameters which depend on the connection and protection
type. Only those parameters which are permitted within the current context can be accessed. All others
are disabled (faded gray).
To create a cross-connection, one or more of those parameters must be defined according to the
cross-connection type. Table 8. gives an overview about the optional and mandatory input parameters for
the various cross-connection types. Activate the relevant entry boxes first of all by clicking on them with
the mouse.
Configurable Parameters
Type
Select the connection type:
Unidirectional
Bidirectional
Drop&Continue
D&C Topology
Select the direction for Drop&Continue:
Normal
Inverse
Protection
Define protection state:
Protected
Not Protected
Prot. Criteria (only available for protected connections)

Clicking on the Prot. Criteria button, Figure 205. for the Protection Criteria dialog is opened, where
the user can display and configure the SNCP Type Protection. No protection criteria for automatic
protection switching can be configured.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The following SNCP Type are available:
ED
SNCPI (Inherently monitored SubNetwork Connection Protection)
SNCPN (Nonintrusively monitored SubNetwork Connection Protection)
SNCPS (Sublayer SubNetwork Connection Protection) (Not operative in current release)
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
278 / 448

To prevent operation faults, the system is designed according to the following guidelines:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 205. Protection Criteria
Revertive (available only for protected connections)

Select whether protection is to be revertive or not.
In Revertive mode, a protected service is switched back to its initial, protected element when the fault
has been eliminated.
When Revertive mode is active, the Wait To Restore protection period prevents several protection
switches being initiated as a result of an intermittent failure. The protected element must be error-free
during this defined period of time before a protected service is switched back to it.
In the current release the Wait To Restore time period is fixed to 5 minutes.
In Non-revertive mode, switchover to the protecting element is maintained even after the fault has
been eliminated.
HOT (available only for protected connections)

To enter the Hold Off Time expressed in msec. with a range from 0 to 10.000.
HOT is the time between declaration of Signal Degrade or Signal Fail, and the initialization of the
protection switching algorithm.
Input
To enter the input TP, click the relevant Choose button and select the TP in the TP Search dialog
(see Figure 162. on page 218). Otherwise, select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly.
Prot. Input
To enter the protecting TP, click the relevant Choose button and select the TP in the TP Search
dialog. Otherwise, select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly.
Output
It is possible to enter one or more output TPs.
To enter one output TP, click the relevant Choose button and select the TP in the TP Search dialog.
Otherwise, select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly.
To enter more than one output TP and create a broadcast connection, proceed as described
previously and press button Add afterwards. The previously chosen TP is then moved to the list box
located below. Click the Choose button and select the next TP in the TP Search dialog. Otherwise,
select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. Repeat this procedure for each destination
TP. A list of all the selected output TPs is displayed in the list box located below it.
To delete a leg from the list, select the TP in the list box and click on the Delete Leg button.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
279 / 448
Non-intrusive Monitoring
Adding a protection leg to a unidirectional cross-connection offers the ability to perform
non-intrusive monitoring on this cross-connection. No errors are introduced to the original
cross-connection with applying or removing the protection leg.
Table 8. Optional and Mandatory Configurable Parameters for Cross-Connection Creation

"3
&
&

&
&-
&
&-
4#
&
&

&
&
&
&
$33
&
&
&

&

&

&
-

-
#
&
5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

"

12
ED

02
&
3

SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
280 / 448

N.B.
Non-configurable Parameters

CC Topology
The topology of the cross-connection is indicated via two icons. The left-hand icon displays the
current topology and the right one displays a view of the topology following confirmation of the current
modifications.
In addition, the color of an icon indicates the connection state of the cross-connection:
green > active
brown > inactive
The icon is set according to the entries made in Type and Protection:
TPs not cross-connected
Unidirectional, not protected
Bidirectional, not protected
Unidirectional, protected
Bidirectional, protected
Broadcast, not protected
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Broadcast with one protected leg
Drop & Continue normal
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
281 / 448

Drop & Continue inverse
Loopback connection:
unidirectional, same input and output TP
Figure 206. Cross-Connection Icons
Example:
current state:
TPs are not connected
state after creation:

unidirectional, non-protected cross-connection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 207. Creation of a Unidirectional, Non-Protected Cross-Connection
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
282 / 448

15.4.2 Create a Cross-Connection

This chapter lists the steps the user has to take to create a cross-connection using The Main Cross
Connection view of Figure 208. on page 284.
For a detailed description of the single parameters, refer to the previous para. 15.4.1 on page 278.
For information on cross-connection types, refer to para. 15.1.5 on page 262.
N.B.
After creation of a cross-connection, the cross-connection list in the Cross Connection

Management dialog is not automatically updated. Use button Search in this dialog to update
the list.
Create a Point-to-Point Cross-Connection (uni- or bidirectional)

1)
Select the cross-connection Type.
2)
Select the Protection state.
3)
Select or type in the Input TP.
To enter the TP, click the Choose button and select the TP in the Search for Cross Connection
Input dialog (see Figure 209. ), or select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly.
The Search for Cross Connection Input dialog offers the possibility to list TPs according to
different filter criteria. E.g. to obtain a list of all not connected AU-4 TPs of a rack, first select the
rack in the left list box, then select the filter criteria ConnectionState not connected and Class
AU-4 and click on button Search. The matching TPs are listed in the right listbox. Select the
input TPs in the list and confirm with Ok.
For a more detailed description on the Search for Cross Connection dialog see para. 14.5.1
on page 217.
4)
Select or type in the Output TP as described in Step 3 ).
The following steps only apply to protected cross-connections:

5)
Select or type in the Protecting Input (Prot. Input) TP as described in Step 3 ).
6)
Configure the Revertive mode.
7)
Configure the Protection Criteria (Prot. Criteria)
8)
Configure the HOT (Hold Off TIme)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Press the button Ok to confirm the creation.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
283 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 208. Create a Bidirectional Protected Cross-Connection (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
284 / 448

Create a Broadcast Connection

1)
Select the cross-connection Type unidirectional
2)
Select the Protection state.
3)
Select or type in the Input TP.

To enter the TP, click the Choose button and select the TP in the Search for Cross Connection
Input dialog (see Figure 209. ) or select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly.
This dialog offers the possibility to list TPs according to different filter criteria. E.g. to obtain a
list of all TU12 TPs of a board, first select the board in the left list box, then select the filter criteria
Connection State Ignore and Class TU12 and click on button Search TPs. The matching
TPs are listed in the right listbox (see Figure 209. ). Select the input TPs in the list and confirm
with Ok.
For a more detailed description on the Search for Cross Connection dialog see para. 14.5.1
on page 217.
4)
Select or type in the Output TPs as described in Step 3 )
Press the button Add Leg in the Main Cross Connection dialog and all output TPs are displayed
in the list box under the Output field (Figure 210. on page 287).
To delete a leg from the list, select the TP in the list box and click on the Delete Leg button.
The following steps only apply to protected broadcast connections:
5)
Select or type in the Protecting input TP. Note that each single protected leg of the broadcast
has to be assigned to the same protecting input.
Proceed as described in Step 3 ). Afterwards, select the protected output TP in the output list box
and click button Protect Leg. The leg is then marked as protected in the list box. Repeat this
procedure for each protected output TP (only one protected leg is supported in current release).
To unprotect a leg from the list, select the protected TP in the list box and click on the Unprotect Leg
button.
Examples are in Figure 210. and Figure 211.
6)
Configure the Revertive mode.
7)
Configure the Protection Criteria (Prot. Criteria)
8)
Configure the HOT (Hold Off TIme)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Press the button Ok to confirm creation.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
285 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 209. Search for Cross-Connection Output (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
286 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 210. Create an Unprotected Broadcast Cross-Connection (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
287 / 448

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 211. Create a Protected Broadcast Cross-Connection (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
288 / 448

15.4.3 Modify a Cross-Connection

When modifying a cross-connection, note that some of the transformations involved may affect traffic
(because the system may have to destroy and re-create the cross-connection to perform the necessary
transformation). As mentioned at the beginning of this chapter, the user is required to confirm operations
affecting traffic, i.e. a confirmation window warns the user.
Within the Main Cross Connection dialog, modification of a cross-connection is restricted to the
protection state and the parameters required by the protection. Refer to Table 9. for an overview of the
accessible parameter when the protection state has been changed from not protected to protected and
vice versa. For a description of the parameters, please refer to the previous para. 15.4.1 on page 278.
To modify a cross connection select one from the connection list of Figure 204. on page 275. and then click
on the Modify button.
N.B.
After modification of a cross-connection, the cross-connection list in the Cross Connection

Management dialog is not automatically updated. Use button Search in this dialog to update
the list.
Table 9. Modifiable Parameters

&
&
12
"
3
"
3

&

&

&
4#
&
$33
&
-

-
&
#

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
&
5
ED
02

SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
289 / 448
The following few facts should be taken into consideration when modifying connections.
Unprotect a protected cross-connection (see Figure 212. ):
When a protected cross-connection is being unprotected (protection changed to not protected), the
dialog displays the additional option button Unprotected.
It offers the choice of whether to keep the protected input TP (Input) or the protecting input TP (Prot.
Input) as the only signal source of the new unprotected cross-connection. Ensure that the active TP
is selected (i.e. check the protection state in the Cross-Connection Management dialog).
An example is in the following Figure 212.
In addition, a question box appears, asking the user to confirm the unprotect action.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 212. Unprotect a Bidirectional Cross-Connection (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
290 / 448

Protect an unprotected cross-connection:

When an unprotected cross-connection is being protected, the Prot. Input button is available to
select the protection input connection to insert.
An example is in the following Figure 213.
Protection principle are given in para. 15.1.6 on page 264.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 213. Protect one Leg of a Broadcast Connection (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
291 / 448
15.5.1 Activate a Cross-Connection

Not supported in current release.
The Cross Connection Management dialog provides the possibility of displaying a selection of existing
cross-connections (see Chapter 15.3 on page 270). The connection state (Act = A or D) is indicated in this
connection list.
To activate a cross-connection, select one from the connection list (see Figure 204. ) and then click on the
Activate button to initiate the process. A confirmation box appears in which to confirm the state change
request. The connection in the list is automatically updated to indicate the new connection state (Act = A).
If the set of cross-connections selected from the list includes both activated and deactivated
cross-connections, clicking the Activate button only initiates actions on the deactivated
cross-connections which were selected.
15.5.2 Deactivate a Cross-Connection
Not supported in current release.
After creation, a cross-connection is automatically in an active state. To deactivate a cross-connection,
select one from the connection list (see Figure 204. ) and then click on the Deactivate button to initiate
the process. A confirmation box appears in which to confirm the state change request. The connection
in the list is automatically updated to indicate the new connection state (Act = D).
If the set of cross-connections selected from the list includes both activated and deactivated
cross-connections, clicking the Deactivate button only initiates actions on the activated
cross-connections which were selected.
15.5.3 Delete a Cross-Connection
Only deactivated cross-connections should be deleted. However, deletion of active cross-connections is
possible.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NOTE: the Delete crossconnection action is not possible in the case that is still
existing any operation/connection/termination on the underlying supported signals, such as:
Performance Monitoring on lower or higher TPs
POM / HPOM operations
Loopbacks
LAN/LAPD (and any comm/routing channel)
Auxiliary channels
Thus the deletion of every active operation/connection/termination is necessary, in the same order as
above listed, before the deletion of a crossconnection.
To delete a cross-connection, select the corresponding connection from the list and click on the Delete
button. To prevent operation errors, the user must confirm the deletion request.
The deleted cross-connection automatically disappears from the connection list when the operation is
successful.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
292 / 448

15.5 Activate/Deactivate/Delete Cross-Connections

15.6 Split and Join Cross-Connections

15.6.1 Split a Cross-Connection
Precondition
Only bidirectional cross-connections can be split.
Split
Select one or more bidirectional cross connections from the list in the Cross Connection Management
dialog and press Split. The cross-connections are split without further confirmation from the user.
The original cross connection(s) disappear from the list in the Cross Connection Management dialog
after a successful action. The user has to press Search to see the new cross connections.
Depending on the protection state of the original cross-connection, the split action has the following effect:
a)
Unprotected Cross-Connection
An unprotected bidirectional cross-connection is split into two unidirectional cross-connections with
the input TP in one of them being the output in the other and vice versa (see Figure 214. ).
The new cross connection has the same name and activation status as the old bidirectional one.

6
7
*8
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 214. Split/Join Unprotected Bidirectional Cross-Connection
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
293 / 448
Protected Cross-Connection
Splitting a protected connection results in one protected unidirectional cross-connection and one
broadcast with two legs. The input of the original cross-connection is one of the legs in the broadcast.
The other leg in the broadcast is the protecting input. The input of the broadcast is the output of the
original protected cross-connection.
6
7
)8

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 215. Split/Join to Protected Bidirectional Cross-Connection
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
294 / 448

b)
15.6.2 Join Two Cross-Connections

Precondition
Two cross-connections can be joined if they match the following characteristics:
The connections are either

1)
both unprotected, unidirectional and the input is the output of the other one, or
2)
one of them is protected and unidirectional, and the other one a broadcast with two legs.
Restriction: the input of the broadcast connection has to be the output of the protected
connection and the legs of the broadcast match the input and the protection input of the
unidirectional connection, also refer to Chapter Split a Cross-Connection, effect b).
Both cross-connections have the same connection state (activated or deactivated).
Both cross-connections have the operational state enabled, i.e. they are listed in black color in the
Cross Connection Management dialog.
Join
Select exactly two cross connections in the Cross Connection Management dialog and press the Join
button. The cross-connections are joined without further confirmation from the user.
The original cross connection(s) disappear from the list in the Cross Connection Management dialog
after a successful action. Press Search to see the new cross-connections in the list.
The result is either a bidirectional (case 1, see Figure 214. ) or a protected bidirectional (case 2, see
Figure 215. ) cross-connection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
If the original cross-connections have different names, the new name is a concatenation of the names of
both of them.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
295 / 448
The Protection Actions dialog is displayed after clicking on the Protection button in the Cross
Connection Management dialog (see Figure 204. ).
Users can only switch protection on cross-connections belonging to them and not assigned to the NML.
A second condition is that protection is enabled for the cross-connection concerned (protection parameter
is set to protected).
The three protection actions Force, Lock Out and Manual Switch belong to different levels, whereby
Lock has the highest priority and Manual Switch the lowest.
Note that a protection state can only be changed within the same or from a higher priority level, e.g. Force
To Protecting can be reverted with Release but not with Manual Switch To Input.
Figure 216. Protection Actions Dialog

The dialog window enables the user to perform protection- related operations on protected
cross-connections. These are:
Force to Input
The cross-connection is switched to the protected input regardless of signal quality. Automatic
protection is disabled.
Force to Protecting (Input)

The cross-connection is switched to the protecting input regardless of signal quality. Automatic
protection is disabled.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Release Force
Forced switching is disabled and automatic protection switching re-enabled.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
296 / 448

15.7 Protection Switching

Manual Switch to Input (not operative in current release)

The user can switch over to the protected input manually. Switching over is not executed if the signal
quality on the protected path is worse than on the protecting path.
Manual Switch to Protecting Input (not operative in current release)

The user can switch over to the protecting input manually. Switching over is not executed if the signal
quality on the protecting path is worse than on the protected path.
Release Manual Switch (not operative in current release)

A manual switch is disabled and automatic protection switching re-enabled.
Lock Out to Invoke

The connection path is locked for protection switching, i.e. neither forced nor manual switching can
be performed.
Release Lock
The protection lock is disabled.
N.B.
All the operations listed are context-dependent and are enabled or disabled (grayed)
accordingly.
After completion of protection switching, the list entry in the Cross Connection Management dialog is
updated automatically.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
After clicking on an action button and completing the action initiated, the dialog disappears automatically.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
297 / 448
This option is used to print the currently filtered cross-connection list and the related filter settings on the
default printer or to a file in postscript or ASCII format (see Figure 217. and Figure 218. )
Figure 217. Select Printer

N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 218. Select Output Format
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
298 / 448

15.8 Print

15.9 Show Cross-Connected TPs

An overview of signal flow can be requested by means of a user action. The user can select a TP and
initiate the action Show Cross Connected TPs from the Transmission view.
The result is that all other TPs connected to the currently selected TP are displayed (see the example of
Figure 219. on page 300). A line indicates the connection .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This functionality should only be applied selectively (either for a single TP or selected group of TPs).
Expanding and hiding TPs that are associated with the currently selected TP (e.g. show all TPs that are
above the TU12CTP) enables all the related TPs to be added to the view so that the complete signal flow
can be illustrated.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
299 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 219. Show Cross Connected VC4 of an AU4
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
300 / 448

16 OVERHEAD MANAGEMENT
16.1 Introduction
All the descriptions in the following paragraphs are applicable only to 1650SMC and 1660SM.
The purpose of this set of dialogs is to handle the operations on the Overhead (OH) bytes of the NE.
The possible operations are:
Overhead crossconnection
Crossconnection between 2 or more OH bytes

Termination of an OH byte onto an auxiliary port or vocal channel
Total Passthrough of the MSOH bytes for some cards
Definition of the Phone Parameters
There is a TP associated to every OH byte and to every auxiliary port, so TP could be used instead of
OH bytes or auxiliary port, depending on the context.
Note for 1640FOX:

Two bytes of the SDH Overhead frame are accessible for auxiliary purposes, in V11 and RS232 format;
the dedicated bytes are fixed and belong to the STM1#1 or STM4#1 (the module inserted in the highest
position of the CompactADM unit). The auxiliary services on STM1#2 or STM4#2 are not available in
current release, except just in case of 1+1 MSP STMN line protection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
These bytes are E1 (for V11 signal) and F1 (for RS232). The auxiliary signals are available, at the
backside connector, as soon as the CompactADM unit is inserted, without any software presetting.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
301 / 448
16.2 OH Connection overview

Here are described the possible OH connections

For OH Phone Parameters directly refer to the para 16.7 on page 311.
OH Crossconnection
The operator has to be able to crossconnect 2 or more OH bytes on 2 different boards.

The possible crossconnection types are:
unprotected bidirectional point to point

The steps an operator has to do in order to perform the crossconnection are the following:
create the OH TPs involved in the operation

create the OH crossconnection:
select type of crossconnection
select the input OH TP involved in the operation
select the output OH TP involved in the operation
After having deleted an OH crossconnection, the involved TPs have to be deleted.
OH Termination
The operator has to be able to terminate one OH byte onto an auxiliary port or vocal channel.
The steps an operator has to do in order to perform the OH bytes termination are the following:
create the OH TP involved in the operation
create the OH byte termination:
select the created OH TP
select the auxiliary port/vocal channel TP involved in the operation

After having deleted an OH byte termination, the involved TP have to be deleted.
Total MSOH Passthrough
For STM ports it make sense to allow the operator to perform a total passthrough of the MSOH bytes.
A total msoh passthrough connection (connection between msPassThroughCTP points) is setup only
if no single msoh passthrough connection are set and if no single msoh crossconnection are set. If a
total msoh passthrough connection is set, a single msoh passthrough connection or a single msoh
crossconnection cannot be set.
The steps an operator has to do in order to perform the total MSOH passthrough are the following:
create the msPassThroughCTP points involved in the operation
create the total MSOH passthrough:
select the input msPassThroughCTP point involved in the operation
select the output msPassThroughCTP point involved in the operation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
After having deleted a total MSOH passthrough, the involved msPassThroughCTP points have to be
deleted.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
302 / 448
16.3 Overhead views

The Overhead Views allows to perform the previously presented operations.

To access select Overhead option from the Configuration pull down menu; the following options are
presented in the cascading menu, as shown in the following figure:
OH Cross Connection See next para.
OH Phone Parameters See para.16.7 on page 311.
OH TP creation
OH TP deleting
Figure 220. Overhead options
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The options are described in next paragraphs.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
303 / 448
Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Overhead option and then from the cascading menu
the OH Cross Connection option.
The Cross-Connection Management for OverHead dialog opens (see Figure 221. on page 304 ) and
allows to start the configuration.
Figure 221. Cross Connection Management for OverHead dialog (example)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
It is similar to the dialog used for the crossconnection of the TP for paths, then the same
description and functions are valid.
Next configuration steps use the Main Cross-Connection for OverHead (see Figure 222. on page 304)
dialog and the TP Search dialog (see Figure 162. on page 218), also in this case already described for
path management.
Figure 222. Main Cross-Connection for OverHead dialog
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
304 / 448

16.4 OH Cross Connection

For all details, navigation and sequences on these views refer to chapter 15 on page 253.
There is one big difference between the OH TPs and the other kinds of TPs: the OH TPs have to be:
created ONLY BEFORE a crossconnection/termination operation involving them has been

performed.
deleted AFTER a crossconnection/termination deleting involving them has been confirmed.

The current implementation of the TP Search Dialog (TPSD) works only with created TPs.
In the following a description of the main functions and commands is given, also to list the Supported and
Not Supported operation.
16.4.1 Cross-Connection Management for OverHead dialog
See Figure 221. on page 304
Supported operations
Search cross connections/terminations according to one or more of the following filtering

attributes: type, TPs . The operator can set the filtering criteria, can start the search and select
one or more cross connections/terminations among those presented in a readonly list as a
result of the search operation. For each crossconnection/termination matching the filtering
criteria, the following information is shown: direction (bidirectional) and the input, output TPs
involved;
After choosing one or more cross connections/terminations, this dialog allows to:
Delete the selected xconnection/termination
Note: this dialog disappears only when the user explicitly clicks on the close button.
Delete operations can be performed on several cross connections/termination at the same time.
Modify operations can be performed only on single cross connections/terminations.
The OH xconnections are automatically active at the moment of their creation.
The operation buttons availability follows some rules:
The Delete and Print buttons are enabled only if at least one item is selected from the list.
A special dialog will ask the user for a confirmation.
the create button is always enabled. It brings up the Main crossconnection Dialog.
When some operation may affect the existing traffic, the operator is warned about that, and a confirmation
dialog must be answered to carry on/cancel the operation. The choices for this dialog are: yes/no for
single items, yes to all/cancel for multiple items
Not Supported operation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
When used for OH purposes, the Cross-Connection Management dialog doesnt support the following
functionalities:
ED
Protect cross connections/terminations: all the OH cross connections/terminations are

unprotected
Activate/Deactivate
cross
connections/terminations:
all
connections/terminations are automatically active since their creation
Split cross connection/termination
Modify Cross Connection Termination
02
the
OH
cross
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
305 / 448
16.4.1.1 Main Cross-Connection for OverHead dialog
According to the philosophy of offering only meaningful operations to the user, and being the OH
crossconnection operations a subset of those applying to the general cross connections (e.g:protections
are not allowed), some fields of this dialog are disabled.
By clicking on the proper portions of the dialog and on the proper buttons, the operator can perform the
operations hereafter listed:
selection of the crossconnection type
selection of the input TP involved in the crossconnection
selection of the output TP involved in the crossconnection
In order to do that the operator can either type in the involved TPs ID or use the TP Search dialog.
Supported operations
When creating a new cross connection, some or all of the following operations are available,
depending on the NE type characteristics:
Choose one input TP
Choose one output TP

It is possible to directly type in the TP name or to click on the Choose button to select a
TP from the TP Search dialog box
16.4.1.2 TP Search dialog

The TP Search dialog (see Figure 162. on page 218) currently offers:
navigation rack/subrack/board/port
a list of TPs to choose from
When used in the OH domain, this dialog is a subcase of the most generic TP Search.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The operator can choose among a list of:
ED
all the possible OH TPs belonging to a specified class: no board selected and MS, RS or VC
class selected
all the possible OH TPs belonging to a specified board/port: board/port selected and no TP
class selected
all the possible OH TPs belonging to a specified board/port and class: board/port selected and
MS, RS or VC class selected
all the OH TPs already connected (also accordingly to the connection type)
all the OH TPs not yet connected
a combination of the above options

02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
306 / 448

See Figure 222. on page 304.

In 1660SM and 1650SMC to connect the auxiliary / vocal channels and the Overhead bytes the following
operative indication must be observed:
1660SM:
the auxiliary and vocal channels TPs are in the SERVICE board of slot 11
The auxiliary channels are:
2 x G.703 2 Mbit/s; in the screen are indicated as:
r01sr1sl11/port#05P
Expanding this TP, 31 referred TPs are presented
r01sr1sl11/port#06P
Expanding this TP, 31 referred TPs are presented
4 x G.703 64Kbit/s; in the screen are indicated as:
4 x V11; in the screen are indicated as:
r01sr1sl11/port#01#01v24TTP
1 x phonic interface (voice channel); in the screen are indicated as:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
r01sr1sl11/port#07P
r01sr1sl11/port#08P
r01sr1sl11/port#09P
r01sr1sl11/port#10P
02
r01sr1sl11/port#01#01q23TTP
Expanding this TP, four referred TPs are presented:
These TPs permit to connect the voice channel toward four directions.
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
307 / 448
1650SMC:
the auxiliary and vocal channels TPs are in the SERGI board of slot 05
The auxiliary channels are:
1 x G.703 2 Mbit/s (not operative in current release); in the screen is indicated as:
r01sr1sl05/port#03P
Expanding this TP, 31 referred TP are presented from
2 x G.703 64Kbit/s; in the screen are indicated as:
r01sr1sl05/port#04P
r01sr1sl05/port#05P
1 x phonic interface (voice channel): in the screen are indicated as:
Expanding this TP two referred TP are presented:
These TPs permit to connect the voice channel toward two directions.
1650SMC and 1660SM:
The other boards used to terminate or crossconnect the OH bytes are the STMn boards.
The OH TP are present in MS, RS and VC4 TP Class.
In these TPs the indication ......#0011 to 0099 (MS or RS) are referred to the coordinates of the
Section OverHead bytes on the SDH frame (1,1 to 9,9).
The voice channel are identified by the ow indication, the FU is for Future Use, the NU is for
National Use, UC is for User Channel and Pass is for Passthrough channel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The examples of the figure in this OH connection chapter can be helpful to the operator.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
308 / 448

16.5 OH TP creation
the OH TP creation option.
The OH TP creation dialog opens (see Figure 223. ) and allows to create the OH TP to cross connect.
In detail, the dialogbox contains the following graphical object:
a Choose button is used to display a list of OH Tps to be created. The Choose button starts
the TP Search (see Figure 224. ) with predefined filtering; the TP Search dialog allows the
operator to visualize only not created OH Tps.
To visualize the OH TP in the TP Search view double click on the MS, RS or VC4 Tp.
OH Tp field displays the label of the selected OH Tp to be created.
Apply button is used to perform a create request of the tp displayed in the OH Tp field. After having
performed the create request, the OH Tp field is set to empty.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 223. OH TP creation
Figure 224. OH Search TP for creation (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
309 / 448
the OH TP deleting option.
The OH TP deleting dialog opens (see Figure 225. ) and allows to delete the OH TP no more involved
in an OH crossconnection.
In detail, the dialogbox contains the following graphical object:
a Choose button is used to display a list of OH Tps to be deleted. The Choose button starts
the TP Search with predefined filtering; the TP Search dialog allows the operator to visualize
only created and not crossconnected OH Tps.
OH Tp field displays the label of the selected OH Tp to be deleted.
Apply button is used to perform a delete request of the tp displayed in the OH Tp field. After having
performed the delete request, the OH Tp field is set to empty.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 225. OH TP deleting
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
310 / 448

16.6 OH TP deleting

16.7 OH Phone Parameters

The OH phone parameters option permits to configure the telephone number and to manage the
parameter phonic extension.
the OH Phone Parameters option. Figure 226. opens.
Figure 226. Phone Parameters dialog window (example)

In the window are presented:
the interface field (at the top) where can be selected the phonic interfaces to be configured.
It identifies a TP indicated as q23TTP, referred to the physical voice connection on the SERVICE
unit in slot11.
the phone number field, to set the telephone number for operator call on the phonic interface.
The phonic extension field, where enable or disable the extension of the selected phonic interface.
If enabled the phonic signal is extended towards the external on the access panel of the NE.
Apply button performs the configuration change of the modified phone parameters of the selected phonic
interface without close the dialog
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
311 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
312 / 448

17 PERFORMANCE MONITORING
17.1 Introduction
The Performance Monitoring domain on the NE covers the monitoring of counter values for trail
termination points and connection termination points.
Examples of these counters on the SDH PORT are Errored Seconds (ES) and Severely Errored Seconds
(SES).
The Performance Monitoring domain counts these errors during specified granularity periods (15 min,
24h) and stores the values in history data logs.
For the purpose of quality supervision, the values of the error counters can be compared to user-defined
threshold levels. If a counter value has crossed a threshold level, a notification (threshold crossing alarm)
is issued.
The principle performance management functions are:
Configuration of the counting interval for each performance measurement point.
Collection of the performance data.
Configuration of the quality thresholds that generate alarms and log records when predefined values
are exceeded.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
On the ETHERNET PORT a set of performance counters are foreseen, for QoS and maintenance
purpose. By selecting the GMAU TP and subsequently the Transmission>Performance menu, the
following options are available:
Configure Performance Monitoring.
Display Current Data.
Display History Data.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
313 / 448
17.2.1 Overview
Performance Monitoring functionalities, are described in the following paragraph in addition to general
information concerning performance monitoring on the NE.
Paragraph 17.4 on page 325 Configuration ( SDH port) deals with the configuration of performance
monitoring
Paragraph 17.5 on page 330 Display Current Data ( SDH port) deals with displaying current
performance data
Paragraph 17.6 on page 333 Display History Data ( SDH port) deals with displaying history
performance data
Paragraph 17.7 on page 335 PM Threshold Table Selection ( SDH port) deals with the selection
of threshold tables
Paragraph 17.8 on page 339 PM Threshold Table Modification/Display ( SDH port) deals with
the modification of threshold tables and permits to display the same
17.2.2 Supported Performance Counters

The NE uses performance counters to count transmission errors.
A set of performance counters is provided according to the Termination Point (TP), where performance
measurement occurs.
The user can start performance monitoring on one or more subsets of counters for each TP; it is not
possible to start individual performance counters.
Near end performance monitoring events are:
Background Block Error (BBE): A BBE counter measures the number of errored blocks which do
not occur as part of an SES.
Errored Second (ES): A one second period with one or more errored blocks or with a defect.
Severely Errored Second (SES): A one second period which contains > 30% of errored blocks, or
at least one Severely Disturbed Period (SDP). An SES is also counted as an ES.
Near End Unavailable Second (NEUAS): An Unavailable Second is a second which is part of the
Unavailable Time.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The corresponding Far End (FE) performance monitoring events are:
Far End Background Block Error (FEBBE): A far end errored block which does not occur as part
of an FESES.
Far End Errored Second (FEES): Identifies, at a terminal, a one second period with one or more
errored blocks or with a defect which were received by the Far End Terminal.
Far End Severely Errored Second (FESES): Identifies, at a terminal, a one second period which
contains > 30% of errored blocks, or at least one Severely Disturbed Period (SDP) which was
received/detected by the Far End Terminal. An FESES is counted as an FEES.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
314 / 448

17.2 Performance Monitoring on SDH port

Far End Unavailable Second (FEUAS): An Unavailable Second is a second which is part of the
Unavailable Time at the far end.
The Termination Point (TP) type determines which performance monitoring events can be counted:
SDH TPs
Both near end and far end counters are supported in receive direction of the signal for all SDH path
layers and for the multiplex section layer. For the regenerator section, no far end information is
transmitted and, therefore, only near end counting is supported.
PDH TPs
Only near end counters are supported in receive direction for all PDH path layers.
Further definitions:
Errored Block (EB): A block in which one or more bits associated with the block are erroneous.
Remote Error Indicator (REI) [formerly Far End Block Error (FEBE)] : Identifies, at a terminal,
the count of errored blocks that were received by the far end terminal.
Remote Defect Indicator (RDI) [formerly Far End Receive Failure (FERF)]: indicates to a terminal
that the far end terminal has detected an incoming failure.
Unavailable Time (UAT): A period of unavailable time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive SES
events. These 10 seconds are considered to be part of unavailable time. A new period of available
time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events.
Pointer Justification Event (PJE): A PJE is an inversion of I or D bits of the pointer , together
with an increment or decrement of the pointer value to signify a frequency justification.
Out of Frame Second (OFS) ): An OFS is defined as a second in which one or more out of frame
events have occurred. This event is identified by the A1/A2 byte of the SDH Frame.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The counting of OFS is only supported for the regenerator section termination. Please note that this
counter is deprecated by ETSI and will be removed from international standards.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
315 / 448
Far end performance monitoring parameters are derived from Remote Defect Indicators (RDI) and
Remote Error Indicators (REI) (refer to Figure 227. ).
Node B
Node A
Source
transmission
signal
Sink
significant bits
significant bits
far end
defect
RDI insertion
Sink
near end
defect
near end
counter
far end
counter
far end
defect
significant bits
near end
defect
far end
counter
near end
counter
RDI insertion
Source
significant bits
transmission
signal
Figure 227. Far End Performance Monitoring Principles
At Node A, the near end information represents the performance of the unidirectional section/path
from B to A, while the far end information represents the performance of the unidirectional
section/path from A to B.
At Node B, the near end information represents the performance of the unidirectional section/path
from A to B, while the far end information represents the performance of the unidirectional
section/path from B to A.
Near end performance data at Node A and far end performance data at Node B correspond as long as
neither direction is disturbed, and vice versa.
In compliance with ETSI and ITU-T standards, far end errors cannot be counted in the case of near end
failures.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
17.2.4 Bidirectional counting (24 h Bi) for QoS

As specified in G.826, G.784 and ETSI 300417, the bidirectional PM collection for Quality of Service has
been supported by combining the information on each direction of transport to assess a single
unavailability state: the bidirectional path is in the unavailable state if either one or both directions are in
the unavailable state.
PM data are collected by a single UAS plus two sets of three event counters (BBE,ES,SES) for NEPM
and FEPM respectively. When the path transports unidirectional payload just the four counters for the
NEPM are activated (BBE, ES, SES and UAS).
Data collection is performed only on 24 hours registers and the NE maintains a buffer of two registers: the
24hours current registers and the historical one.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
316 / 448

17.2.3 Far End (FE) and Near End (NE) Performance Counting

17.2.5 End to End (ee 24h) Performance Counting

VCn trails can be monitored in intermediate node through the activation of performance monitoring
process on Monitoring function.
As the trails are often responsible of the endtoend customer service, the end toend monitoring can be
requested to provide monitoring for Quality of Service purposes and , in addition, for network Maintenance
applications.
If SNCP is configured the Quality of Service collection have to be enable in the monitoring functions after
the matrix .
End to end monitoring is achieved by activation of Performance monitoring on the two direction of path
and using farend primitives. This process can be unidirectional (for Monitoring) or bidirectional process
(for QoS).
In case of unidirectional process one direction can be monitored end to end and both 15minute and 24
h collection can be activated 15min./ 24H FE_BBE, FEES, FESES, FEUAS on incoming or egress
signal depending of the POM is enable. The TCA are also evaluated in both 15 minute and 24 H counters.
The bidirectional process needs the presence on the two Monitoring functions in the two directions in one
NE and among the two monitoring function a 24 hour collection can be activated with the collection of
incFE_BBE, incFEES, IncFESES, UAS, eFEBBE, eFEes, eFESES.
17.2.6 Performance Monitoring on AUPJE
AU PJE (Administrative unit point justification event) is an optional parameters request in G.784.
For AU PJE counters , the positive and negative PJE shall be counted separately on one selectable AU
within an STMN signal, after the AU has been resynchronized to the local clock. Refer to G.783.
The number of positive and negative outgoing PJE per second are collected in 15 minutes and 24 H
counters. A history of 16 x 15minutes counters and 2x 24H are stored in the NE for each AU selected.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
No Threshold crossing mechanism is supported on AUPJE counters.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
317 / 448
TCM allows monitoring within the operator domain. The quality within the operators own domain can be
proven regardless of the received quality of the signal at the entry point of the network. At the input point
the reference value is set to zero by using the TCM feature.
Tandem Connection Monitoring is applicable to VC4nc (n=1, 4, 16, ...), VC4, VC3 and VC12 layers.
TCM provides:
Incoming error count (IEC);

TC_REI to indicate errored blocks within the TC to the far end;
OEI to indicate errored blocks of the egressing VCn;
TC_API as access point identifier complying with generic 16byte string format;
TC_RDI indicating to the far end that defects have been detected within the TC at the near end TC
sink;
17.2.8 Performance Monitoring on 2 Mbit/s ISDNPRA

The feature provides PM data collection at the 2 Mbit/s ISDNPRA terminations.
The performance monitoring capabilities (applied on p12Mon TP) support both the standard data
collection modes:
G. 826 bidirectional for QoS
M2120 unidirectional nearend / farend for maintenance
17.2.9 Performance Data Collection

Near end and far end performance monitoring events are counted over fixed monitoring periods of 15
minutes and 24 hours.
The 24-hour monitoring periods start at 00 : 00 (UTC) and the 15-minute monitoring periods start at
xx : 00, xx : 15, xx : 30 and xx : 45.
Performance monitoring can be enabled and disabled at any time during a monitoring period. An entity
of all near end or far end performance monitoring events is always counted, it is not possible to start
individual performance counters (e.g. SES only). BBE, ES and SES counting is stopped during
Unavailable Time.
Event Counting
The performance events (e.g. SES) are counted in a counter per event. These counters are called the
current registers. At the end of the monitoring period, the contents of the current registers are transferred
to the first of the recent registers, together with a time stamp to identify the period (including the day). Time
stamping is performed using UTC (as for all alarms). After that, the current register is reset. It is also
possible to reset an individual current register manually.
Suspect Flag
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A suspect interval flag is set as an indication that the data of the corresponding register may be either
incomplete or invalid.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
318 / 448

17.2.7 Tandem Connection Termination (TCT) and Monitoring (TCM)

Zero Suppression
Zero suppression is a basic mechanism to remove irrelevant PM information and to reduce the amount
of PM reports in the system. A PM report is suppressed and hence no history record is created by the entity
which is responsible for PM reporting when all of the following conditions are true for the monitoring period:
an interval is error-free (all PM counter values are zero)

PM was enabled during the entire monitoring interval (the elapsed time equals its nominal value, i.e.
900 for 15 min. and 86400 for 24 h)
PM was running properly (the suspect interval flag is not set)
By default, zero suppression is active for all PM enabled TPs. The number of suppressed intervals is
indicated.
17.2.10 Data Collection
N.B.
PM data is not counted on boards that were plugged out at the moment of enabling data
collection (see PM Configuration dialog). Nevertheless, PM data is counted on boards that
were plugged in at the moment of enabling data collection, but were plugged out and back in
some time during data collection.
Performance Monitoring can be started at any time.

As soon as Performance Monitoring is started on the Craft Terminal, current PM data is collected on the
I/O boards, incrementing the performance counters each time an error is detected.
The performance data counted is evaluated every quarter of an hour or every 24 hours and stored there
in a history record.
When the user disables the monitoring of a TP within the first 10 minutes of a 15-minute period, it is
possible that have still not been received the PM data of the previous monitoring interval.
Since PM data is not stored after monitoring is disabled, the PM data of the previous interval is lost in this
case.
If equipment or line protection switching occurs during a counting interval, the NE does not provide
complete performance measurement for the protected TPs.
Only the period between the last switch and the end of the counting window is counted.
The interval is marked for suspect data and the elapsed time indicates the length of the measured period.
17.2.11 Performance Monitoring History
Performance Monitoring history data is necessary to assess the recent performance of transmission
systems. Such information can be used to sectionalize faults and to locate the source of intermittent errors.
History data, in the form of performance monitoring event counts, is stored in registers in the NE. All the
history registers are time stamped.
In compliance with ETSI and ITU-T standards, the history registers operate as follows:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The history data is contained in a stack of registers. There are sixteen 15-minute period registers and one
24-hour period registers per monitored event. These registers are called the recent registers. At the end
of each monitoring period, the contents of the current registers are moved to the first of the recent registers.
When all recent registers are full, the oldest information is discarded.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
319 / 448
For quality supervision purposes, the recorded errors through the performance counters can be compared
to threshold levels. If a counter value has crossed a threshold level, a Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA)
is transmitted to the alarm manager.
The threshold values are defined in threshold tables together with a severity and a flag indicating whether
crossing this value should be notified by an alarm and logged or only stored in the current problem list.
The user can modify and delete such tables.
Different thresholds can be assigned for near end and far end and for granularity of 15 minutes and 24
hours.
The TCA only reports the value of the counter which has crossed the threshold, it does not provide a
complete set of all counters. Therefore, the user has to explicitly retrieve all current performance data after
receiving the alarm. The user can retrieve this information from the Current Performance Management
Data Dialog.
Two thresholds mechanism are supported:
For 24hour (implicit clearance) monitoring periods, one threshold value is defined: if the event count
reaches or exceeds the threshold value during the monitoring period, a TCA is generated. To clear
a TCA, the alarm must be manually acknowledged by the user.
For 15minute (explicit clearance) monitoring periods, two threshold values (set, reset) are defined:
a TCA is generated during the monitoring period when the event count reaches or exceeds the set
threshold value the first time. This TCA is automatically cleared by the system at the end of the
following monitoring period in which the event count is less than or equal to the reset threshold value
and there was neither an unavailable nor a suspect period during this monitoring period
The following limitations apply for explicit clearance:
The value of the low threshold is fixed to 0 (only a single threshold is provided by a threshold table).
An SES threshold crossing is cleared at the end of the interval if no unavailability was detected and
SES had not reached the low threshold (low threshold equal to 0).
Even in case of a suspect interval the TCA is cleared if no unavailability was detected and the low
threshold had not been reached.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Additionally an explicit clearance of TCAs for all granularity periods is executed if one of the following
events occurs during the current interval:
deletion of the current data instance (TP),
resetting of counters (only for 24 h),
increased thresholds (higher than current value of counters) (only for 24 h).
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
320 / 448

17.2.12 Thresholds

17.3 Performance Monitoring on ETHRNET port

Performance Monitoring on Ethernet port, can be applied to ETHATX, GETHAG, ETHMB, GETHMB
cads and are described in the following paragraphs:
Paragraph 17.9 on page 343 Configuration (Ethernet port) deals with the configuration of
performance monitoring
Paragraph 17.10 on page 344 Display Current Data (Ethernet port) deals with displaying current
performance data
Paragraph 17.11 on page 348 Display History Data (Ethernet port) deals with displaying history
performance data
An Ethernet link can be defined between two 10/100 Ethernet interfaces, or between two Gb Ethernet
interfaces, or also between a Fast Ethernet and a Gb Ethernet interface.
At the terminations of Ethernet link, it s possible to monitor the Ethernet frames and to collect information
about the Ethernet traffic by means of some counters.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Definitions of incoming and outgoing counter direction

[1]
Incoming (network centric view): it refers to the direction starting from Ethernet domain toward SDH
domain (see Figure 228. ). The traffic arrives to the board from an Ethernet link and goes out from
an SDH link.
[2]
Outgoing (network centric view): it refers to the direction starting from SDH domain toward Ethernet
domain (see Figure 228. ). The traffic arrives to the board from an SDH link and goes out from an
Ethernet link.
Figure 228. Counter directionality: network centric view
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
321 / 448
17.3.1 Overview
They are:
Physical interface counters
Aggregate counters
Flow counters
Besides this classification, some counters can be of Quality of Service, others only of maintenance.
Port interface#1
TRSEFin
TRSEFout
Interface
Counters
TRCOin
TRCFin
TDFin
TTOin
TTFin
SDH
Ethernet
Symbol Error
Media Available Exits
Jabber State
False Carrier
TRCOout
TRCFout
TDFout
TTOout
TTFout
Flow
Counters
Aggregate
Counters
Figure 229. Counter subdivision
17.3.2 Ethernet physical interface counters

Ethernet physical interface counters are used to test Ethernet interface working state.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
They are:
Symbol Error : for an interface operating at 100Mb/s, the number of times there was as invalid data
symbol when a valid carrier was present. For an interface operating in fullduplex mode at 1000 Mb/s,
the number of times the receiving media is nonidle carrier event for a period of time equal or greater
than minFrameSize, and during which there was at least one occurrence of an event that causes the
PHY to indicate Data reception error on the GMII. The count represented by an instance of this object
is incremented at most once per carrier event, even if multiple symbol errors occur during the carrier
event. This count does not increment if a collision is present.
Media Available Exits : number of times that ifMauMediaAvailable for this MAU instance leaves
the state available. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at reinitialization of the
management system, and at other times as indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
322 / 448

Ethernet counters can be distinguished from different points of view as depicted in Figure 229.

Jabber State : number of times that mauJabberState for this MAU instance enters the state
jabbering. This counter will always indicate zero for MAUs of type dot1MauTypeAUI and those of
speeds above 10Mbps. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at reinitialization of the
management system, and at other times as indicated by the value ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.
False Carrier: number of false carrier events during IDLE in 100BASEX and 1000BASEX links.
For all other MAU types, this counter will always indicate zero. This counter does not increment at
the symbol rate. It can increment after a valid carrier completion at a maximum rate of once per 100
ms for 100BASEX and once per 10s for 1000BASEX until the next CarrierEvent. Discontinuities
in the value of this counter can occur at reinitialization of the management system, and at other times
as indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.
They are only maintenance counters.

17.3.3 Aggregate counter
Aggregate counters count frames that pass through the same port.
Aggregate counters are:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TRSEF (Total Received Service Errored frames): it is the sum of three contributions.
Alignment Errors:
A count of frames received on a particular interface that are not an integral number of octets
in length and do not pass the FCS check.
The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the alignment Error
status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user).
Received frames for which multiple error conditions obtain are, according to the conventions
of IEEE 802.3 Layer Management, counted exclusively according to the error status presented
to the LLC.
FCSErrors :
A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in
length but do not pass the FCS check. This count does not include frames received with
frametoolong or frametooshort error.
The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the frameCheckError
to the LLC.
Note: Coding errors detected by the physical layer for speeds above 10 Mb/s will cause the
frame to fail the FCS check.
Frame Too Longs :

Number of received Ethernet frames that exceed the MTU.
The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the frameTooLong
to the LLC.
They are Quality of Service counters.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
323 / 448
TRSEF outgoing
SDH VCn
pipe
Node A
Node B
Transmitted
frames
Received
frames
ISA Eth/GbE port
ISA Eth/GbE port
OMSN
OMSN
Incoming direction
Outgoing direction
Eth > SDH
SDH >Eth
Figure 230. Ethernet Aggregate counter
17.3.4 Flow counter

Counters definitions are: .
TRCO (Total Received Correct Octets): total number of octets of Ethernet frames received correctly,
including Ethernet header characters.
TRCF (Total Received Correct Frames): total number of Ethernet frames received correctly
TDF (Total Discarded Frames): total number of Ethernet frames which were chosen to be discarded
due to buffer congestion.
TTO (Total Transmitted Octets): total number of octets of Ethernet frames transmitted out, including
Ethernet header characters.
TTF (Total Transmitted Frames): total number of Ethernet frames transmitted out.
TTO incoming
TTF incoming
TRCO incoming
TRCF incoming
TTO outgoing
TTF outgoing
TRCO outgoing
TRCF outgoing
SDH VCn
pipe
Node A
Node B
Transmitted
frames
Received
frames
ISA Eth/GbE port
ISA Eth/GbE port
TDF incoming
OMSN
OMSN
Incoming direction
Outgoing direction
Eth > SDH

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TDF outgoing
SDH >Eth
Figure 231. Ethernet Flow counter
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
324 / 448

TRSEF incoming
17.4 Configuration (SDH port)

Use menu item Add TP to display a special TP in the Transmission menu (see para.14.5 on page 217).
Select the TP and open the PM Configuration dialog (see Figure 232. ) by clicking on the menu item
Transmission >Performance >Configure Performance Monitoring.
This PM Configuration dialog serves as the main interface to all PM services. Every
configuration of all monitoring intervals is defined using this dialog.
It is possible to access the same PM Configuration dialog selecting a TP in the Port view and opening
the same Performance > Configure Performance Monitoring option in the Port pull down menu (see
para.11 on page 139).
N.B.
To configure PM for au4CTPs and tuxCTPs, Path Overhead Monitoring (POM) ,Supervised
Unequipped Termination (SUT, not supported) or Tandem Connection (TCT, TCM) must be
created first (see description in para. 14.9 on page 236 ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The PM Configuration dialog is designed as a notebook consisting of a text field, to identify the selected
TP, and page labels.
The selected TP is indicated in the first box at the top of the screen: TP Identifier.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
325 / 448
PathOverhMon After Matrix
PathOverhMon Before Matrix
TP (Performance is made on AUPJE )
TCM After Matrix
TCM Before Matrix
When more than one of the above options is chosen, a Question dialog box is displayed (see Figure 233. );
click on Cancel to continue or OK to interrupt any action.
N.B.
As long as the PM Configuration dialog is open, a modified POM/SUT/TC configuration is not

automatically recognized and displayed. This may lead to rejections or confirmations of
forbidden PM configuration. Therefore make sure to reopen the PM Configuration dialog each
time the POM/SUT/TC configuration is changed.
Each page label presents a range of parameters for one near end or far end granularity period (15 min.
or 24 h) which together form a dataset. To select a special page label, click on the top part of the label:
NE15, near end 15 minutes page
NE24, near end 24 hours page
FE15, far end 15 minutes page
FE24, far end 24 hours page
24hBi , near and far end 24 hours page bidirectional (UAS is the sum of far end and near end)
ee 24h , end to end 24 hours page (enable only on HPOM)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Each dataset has to be configured independently. For AU4 CTP and TUx CTP the highest criteria is
POM and SUT. I.e. select the POM or SUT option first and then configure the different associated datasets.
Confirm the configuration with Apply before you continue with a different POM or SUT option.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
326 / 448

In case of au4CTP tuxCTPs and VcxCTP, the PM Configuration dialog also contains a cascading menu
that allows to configured the POM/SUT/TC options as follow:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 232. PM Configuration Dialog (example)
Figure 233. PM question dialog box (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
327 / 448

Activate any item within the page label by selecting the respective radio button.
Mode
Data Collection
Select this button to activate performance monitoring. Disabling Data Collection leads to
clearance of the current and all history data of this entity.
Create History Data

If this item is selected, history data collection is performed in the selected entity for the
corresponding TP.
Note that on disabling this mode item, no history data is available. Nevertheless, datasets
collected prior to deactivation are not cleared and are displayed after re-enabling the item, as
long as the number of displayed datasets does not exceed 16 for 15 min. granularity and one
for 24 hours granularity.
Lock Data Collection. Not supported

If Lock is selected, PM remains enabled but data collection is stopped. All history performance
data remain available. All current values are set to zero.
EML OS Monitoring (only accessible from SH)

Not available for Craft Terminal.
Notifications
UAT (only available for 24 h granularity)

For 24 h granularity, UAT (UnAvailable Time) notifications are created if enabled. This
notification results in an UAT alarm in the Alarm Surveillance.
N.B.
This parameter can only be selected during creation and cannot be subsequently
modified.
Suppress Additional Threshold

Disabled: the alarm is generated every time the value exceed the upper threshold (value up).
Enabled: after a first alarm generation, the alarm is generated again when the value exceed the
upper threshold (value up) after the lower threshold (value down) has been exceeded.
Threshold Table
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Attach a threshold table to the selected TP. Only assign threshold tables that match the granularity
period of the datasets (i.e. a 15 min. threshold table must not be assigned to a 24 h dataset).
Otherwise the Transmission view is blocked and only released by closing and reopening the PM
Configuration window and the Transmission view.
Click on button Attach... to open the PM Threshold Table Select dialog (see Figure 236. ) and
configure the threshold table (see Chapter 17.7 on page 335).
Select button Remove to disassociate the threshold table from the entity.
N.B.
ED
02
A threshold table can only be attached if Data Collection is enabled.
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
328 / 448

Set Alarm Severity UAT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ASAP Id
This field shows the label of the ASAP pointer assigned to the UAT alarm
Set ASAP
Allows to set a new ASAP pointer for the UAT alarm. The Set ASAP button opens the window
displayed in Figure 20. on page 57.
The Tp List... button opens the Clipboard windows; for details refer to paragraph 4.3.2.3 on page 59.
Confirm the configuration with the button Apply before closing the dialog. Otherwise the configuration is
lost.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
329 / 448
17.5 Display Current Data (SDH port)
Select the TP and open the Current PM Data dialog (see Figure 234. ) by clicking on the menu item
Display Current Data.
This Current PM Data dialog serves to show the results and status of the Performance
Monitoring counters.
It is possible to access the same Current PM Data dialog selecting a TP in the Port view and opening
the same Performance > Display Current Data option in the Port pull down menu (see para.11 on page
139).
The Current PM Data dialog is designed as a notebook consisting of a text field, to identify the selected
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In case of au4CTP tuxCTPs, VCxCTP the Current PM Data dialog also contains a cascading menu that
allows to choose the POM/SUT/TC options to display as follow:
TCM After Matrix
TCM Before Matrix
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
330 / 448

Use menu item Add TP to display a special TP in the Transmission view (see para.14.5 on page 217).

Each page label presents a range of parameters for one near end and far end granularity period (15min.
or 24h) which together form a dataset. To select a special page label, click on the top part of the label:
15 min, near end and far end 15 minutes page

24 h, near end and far end 24 hours page
24hBi, far end 24 hours page bidirectional (UAS is the sum of far end and near end)
ee 24h, end to end 24 hours page (enable only on HPOM)
All datasets available which are related to the selected TP and recorded in the current monitoring interval
are displayed in this dialog.
The following items are indicated for each entity:
Administrative State
Indicates whether the PM collection is locked for the local user or not.
Operational State
Indicates whether PM is enabled or disabled.
Suspect Data
Indicates if collection errors occurred during the collection period.
Threshold Table
Indicates which threshold table is assigned to the entity.
Current Problem List

Indicates current UAT (Unavailable) and TCA (ThresholdCrossed) alarms.
N.B.
The entry Unavailable ThresholdCrossed indicates, that both alarms are active. Since
the text field is too small to display the full text at a time, use the cursor to scroll the text
field in this case.
Elapsed Time
Indicates the time which has elapsed since the monitoring interval was started. This information tells
the user whether the data collection covers the whole period.
At the bottom the PM results are listed.

Reset button is used to restart the counting period. Two buttons are present for nearend and farend
periods.
Press the Refresh button to update the window contents and display the latest data.
Using the Print button, PM data can be saved to a file or printed on paper.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
331 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 234. Current PM Data Dialog (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
332 / 448
17.6 Display History Data (SDH port)

Select the TP and open the PM History Data dialog (see Figure 235. ) by clicking on the menu item
Display History Data.
This PM History Data dialog serves to show stored Performance Monitoring counting.
It is possible to access the same PM History Data dialog selecting a TP in the Port view and opening
the same Performance > Display History Data option in the Port pull down menu (see para.11 on page
139).
The PM History Data dialog is designed as a notebook consisting of a text field, to identify the selected
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In case of au4CTP , tuxCTPs VCxCTPs, the PM History Data dialog also contains a cascading menu that
allows to choose the POM/SUT/TC options to display as follow:
TCM After Matrix
TCM Before Matrix
Each page label presents a range of parameters for one near end and far end granularity period. To select
a special page label, click on the top part of the label.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
333 / 448
15 min, near end and far end 15 minutes page

24 h, near end and far end 24 hours page
24hBi, far end 24 hours page bidirectional (UAS is the sum of far end and near end)
ee 24h, end to end 24 hours page (enable only on HPOM)
The PM data is displayed containing information concerning:
Interval End Time

in the format dd.mm.yyyy hh:mm:ss.
The number of recorded events concerning an entity is divided into near end and far end data
Elapsed Time
indicating whether the data collection was complete (see para. 17.2.10 on page 319)
susp
indicating suspect data where collection errors occurred during the collection period.
In case of 15 min. entities, a maximum of 16 datasets can be displayed simultaneously for each counter,
the 24h entities display a maximum of one dataset. These figures cannot be changed by the user.
If the limit of 16 datasets for 15 min. granularity and one datasets for 24 h granularity is reached, the oldest
set in the list is cleared when the next data set arrives.
Using the Print button, PM data can be saved to a file or printed on paper.
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Monitor
Figure 235. PM History Data Dialog (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
334 / 448

All available datasets (entities), which are related to the selected TP, are displayed in the table:

17.7 PM THRESHOLD TABLE SELECTION (SDH port)

The PM Threshold Table Select dialog (see Figure 236. ) pops up if the Attach button is clicked in the
PM Configuration dialog (see Figure 232. ).
In addition, this dialog can be accessed using the Configuration menu:
N.B.
Do not open several dialogs at the same time using both possibilities. Since those dialogs are
not synchronized, they could display different contents.
The dialog presents a list of existing threshold tables.

The tables are individually indicated with a number.
Each table is dedicated to a specific entities, as reported in Table 10. Each table can be modified according
the operator selections.
The filtering criteria are not operative.
The user can perform the following actions:
Create / Modify / Display a threshold table.
Delete an existing threshold table

Mark the table in the list and click on the Delete button.
Note that a threshold table cannot be deleted if it is attached to a PM entity. An error message informs
the user of this situation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Attach the selected threshold table to a TP entity. It is only available entering from the PM
Configuration dialog (see Figure 232. )
The user has to close the dialog explicitly by clicking on the button Close.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
335 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
1660SM example
ED
02
1640FOX and 1650SMC
Figure 236. PM Threshold Table Select
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
336 / 448
Table 10. 1660SM Threshold table entities association

layer
TPs ASSOCIATED
granularity
STM16
RS
15 minutes
STM16
RS
24 hours
STM4
RS
15 minutes
STM4
RS
24 hours
STM1
RS
15 minutes
STM1
RS
24 hours
STM16
MS Near End / Far End
15 minutes
STM16
24 minutes
STM4
15 hours
10
STM4
24 hours
11
STM1
15 minutes
12
STM1
24 hours
13
VC4
Path Termination Near End / Far End
15 minutes
14
VC4
24 hours
15
VC3
15 minutes
16
VC3
24 hours
17
VC12
15 minutes
18
VC12
24 hours
Table 11. 1640FOX and 1650SMC Threshold table entities association
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
layer
TPs ASSOCIATED
granularity
STM4
RS
15 minutes
STM4
RS
24 hours
STM1
RS
15 minutes
STM1
RS
24 hours
STM4
MS NE / FE
15 minutes
STM4
MS NE / FE
24 hours
STM1
MS NE / FE
15 minutes
STM1
MS NE / FE
24 hours
VC4
Path Termination NE / FE
15 minutes
10
VC4
24 hours
11
VC3
15 minutes
12
VC3
24 hours
13
VC12
15 minutes
14
VC12
24 hours
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
337 / 448

After the activation of a PM on a TP, it will be signalled in the Port view and in the Transmission view as
for the following figures:
PORT VIEW
Active PM
TRANSMISSION VIEW
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Active PM
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
338 / 448

17.8 PM Threshold Table Create / Modification / Display (SDH port)

17.8.1 Creation
The PM Threshold Table Create dialog (see Figure 237. on page 340) pops up when the Create button
is clicked in the PM Threshold Table Selection dialog (see Figure 236. on page 336).
Carry out the following steps to create a threshold table:
1)
Enter the table name in input field Name.

Leaving the input field blank or entering only blanks is not allowed and rejected.
2)
Select a Granularity of 15 min. or 24 h for the entity.
3)
Enter the set (Value Up) and the reset (Value Down) threshold values. Note that the reset value
if supported, will be available with 15 min. monitoring periods.
Table 12. on page 341 shows the maximum performance monitoring event values.
The respective value is automatically reset to the maximum if a larger figure is entered.
4)
Select the alarm Severity for each PM attribute in case a threshold is crossed.
5)
Disable Send notification if no notification message should be sent in the case of a crossed
threshold.
6)
Confirm the entries with Apply to create the threshold table. A number of threshold tables can
be created from the same window.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Explicitly close the window with button Close.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
339 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 237. Create PM Threshold Table
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
340 / 448

17.8.2 Modification
The PM Threshold Table Modify dialog (see Figure 238. ) pops up if a threshold table is selected in the
PM Threshold Table Selection dialog (see Figure 236. ) and the Modify button is clicked.
Carry out the following steps to modify a threshold table:
1)
Modify the upper threshold value (Value Up) and the lower value (Value down)
Table 12. shows the allowed maximum performance parameter values.
2)
Modify the alarm Severity for each PM attribute in case a threshold is crossed.
3)
Disable Send notification if no notification message should be sent in the case of a crossed
threshold.
Note that the Name (really number) cannot be changed.

4)
Confirm the modifications with Apply.
5)
To modify more than one threshold table, do not close the dialog, but select the next threshold
table in the PM Threshold Table Selection dialog and press the Modify button
(see Figure 236. ).
Explicitly close the dialog with button Close.

17.8.3 Display
The PM Threshold Table Display dialog (similar to Figure 238. ) pops up if a threshold table is selected
in the PM Threshold Table Selection dialog (see Figure 236. ) and the Display button is clicked.
Refer to the previous chapter for a description of the attribute values and types.
Table 12. Maximum Performance Parameter Values
Performance Parameter
Max. Value for 15-min.

period
BBE, FEBBE on STM-16
34,559,100
3,317,673,600
BBE, FEBBE on STM-4
8,639,100
829,353,600
BBE, FEBBE on STM-1
2,159,100
207,273,600
539,100
51,753,600
OFS, ES, UAS, FEES,
900
86,400
SES, FESES
810
78,760
1,800,000
172,800,000
BBE, FEBBE
PJC high, PJC low
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Max. Value for 24-h period
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
341 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 238. Modify PM Threshold Table
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
342 / 448
17.9 Configuration (Ethernet port)

Use menu item Add TP to display a special TP in the Transmission menu (see para.14.5 on page 217).
Select the TP (Gmau) and open the PM Configuration dialog (see Figure 232. ) by clicking on the menu
item Transmission >Performance >Configure Performance Monitoring.
The Create Ethernet Counter window is opened (refer to Figure 239. on page 343)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 239. Create Ethernet counter

In that dialog the operator will be allowed to create/delete the currentData by checking/unchecking the
corresponding checkbox for the incoming and outgoing direction.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
343 / 448
17.10 Display current Data (Ethernet port)
Select the TP and open the Current PM Data dialog (see from Figure 241. to Figure 242. ) by clicking
on the menu item Display Current Data.
Figure 240. Display Current Data

This Current PM Data allows the operator to send a request in order to retrieve the maintenance
counters.
The layout of the dialog maintenance counters is depicted in Figure 242.
At startup the dialog displays an empty table; the dialog allows to choose the polling time and how many
times the action will be done; the default values for those entries are 0 for polling time and 1 for number
of retries, with that default configuration if the the Start polling button allows to perform the configured
request.
If the number of retries is bigger than 1, several actions are performed on the NE.
During the polling interval the label of the button Start polling will be changed to Stop polling, and for
every response arrived a row is added to the table.
Every time the operator push the Start polling button new lines will be added to the lines already present
in the table.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The button Display Graph. allow to visualize the counter values in a graphical view but is not operative
in current release.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
344 / 448

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 241. Display Current Data example (Interface counters)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
345 / 448

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 242. Display Current Data example (Flow counters)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
346 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 243. Display Current Data (Aggregate counters)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
347 / 448

17.11 Display history Data (Ethernet port)
Select the TP (Gmau) and open the PM History Data dialog (see Figure 235. ) by clicking on the menu
item Display History Data.
The menu item Display History Data will be opened (refer to Figure 244. ):
In case of one hour history data, the showed values are the hourly historic data collected by NE.
If the NE has collected only one history data, the dialog shows directly counter values.
If the NE has collected more than one history data, the displayed counter values are calculated as
a difference from the older available history data value.
The older one will be added in the first line with the label and for each cell a tooltip will show the
history value received.
In the bottom of the dialog, the description of the showed counters value is dispalyed.
The layout of the dialog Display History Data is depicted in Figure 244. ; this dialog shows the numeric
value for each counter calculated as described before.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The button Display Graph. allow to visualize the counter values in a graphical view but is not operative
in current release.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
348 / 448

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
OUTGOING
INCOMING
Figure 244. Display History Data
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
349 / 448

This menu provide a NE global view for PM and Monitoring operations helps the operator to list these
resources.
Select the PM overview option from the Configuration menu (refer to Figure 245. ); the PM Overview
dialog will be opened (refer to Figure 246. )
Figure 245. PM Overview menu
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
PM/Monitoring Overview (PMO) dialog is able to show both PM and Monitoring objects.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
350 / 448

17.12 PM overview

Figure 246. PM overview window

Search operation are allowed for PM objects, monitoring object or both. Search operations are divided
in two phases:
[1]
the operator chooses a list of interesting TP using TP search; at the end fo this search operation then
operator moves such a list of TPs into PMO dialog.These TPs define a list of search roots for
Monitoring and PM.
[2]
the operator configure the filtering criteria in PMO and starts PM/Monitoring search oeprations using
the Show button in PMO.
Figure 247. represents the interworking between these two dialogs.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The button area contains the following button (refer to Figure 246. ):
[1]
ADD TP: it starts the search operations using the TP Search dialog. Only TP references are moved
by TP search into PMO dialog. This is a precondition to start PM/Monitoring search operations, using
TP selected by TP search as search roots.
[2]
Show: it starts the search for PM/Monitoring objects in the MIB. according to the filtering criteria.
[3]
Reset Filter : it reset all filtering settings to default conditions.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
351 / 448
Preferences : it start the user preferences dialog. It is greyed out in USM not supporting this feature.
[5]
Config PM : it starts the dialog for Current Data create/delete.
[6]
Config Mon : it starts the dialog for monitoring object create/delete.
[7]
Current Data: it starts the dialog for PM counter visualization
[8]
History Data: it starts the dialog for PM counter visualization
[9]
Print: it starts a request to print the tree content
[10] Delete: it starts a request to remove the selected objects (monitoring and/or).
[11] Delete All: it destroys the TP list and make empty the TreeGadget
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
[12] Port View: it starts the Port View . PMO dialog is not closed after Port View or Port details dialog
opening.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
352 / 448

[4]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 247. PM overviewTp search windows interworking
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
353 / 448

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
354 / 448

18 SYNCHRONIZATION MANAGEMENT
18.1 Introduction
All SDH NEs require timing in order to generate the necessary synchronization and frame phase reference
information. The timing can be provided by a source external to the NE or an internal timing generator.
The derived timing shall be used for all signals and interfaces in the NE that are related to the SDH frame
structure.
Follows a brief description of the heart of the NE clock known as the Synchronization Equipment Timing
Source (SETS).
It can be divided into 2 parts:
OSC: the internal oscillator.

SETG: the Synchronization Equipment Timing Generator.
The SETG is responsible for the generation of the external timing source for the Frame structure and the
clock, whilst the internal oscillator (OSC) is useful only in the abnormal functioning Freerunning mode
that will be explained later.
The simplified figure that follows represents the internal organization of the SETS.
Squelch
A
Selector
A
Selector
C
T4/T5 (**)
Squelch
B
T1
T2
T3/T6 (*)
Selector
B
SETG
T0
OSC
SETS
S15
NOTES:
(*) T3/T6 are not available on 1640FOX
(**) T5 is not available on 1640FOX
Figure 248. Internal organization of the SETS.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The internal sources (inputs) are:
T1: Reference obtained from incoming STMN signals,

T2: Reference obtained from incoming 2 Mbits signals,
T3/T6: Reference obtained from an external incoming 2.048 MHz (T3) or 2.048 Mbit/s (T6) signal.
T3/T6 reference clocks are not available on 1640FOX
OSC: the internal oscillator.
The number of timing reference inputs depends on the configuration of the NE.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
355 / 448
T0: is the reference output signal for the clock and signal frames,
T4: is the 2 MHz reference output for the external equipment synchronization.
T5: is the 2 Mbit/s reference output for the external equipment synchronization.
T5 reference clock is not available on 1640FOX
Other reference points:
Y: is used for communication of Synchronization Status Message (SSM) between SETS and MST
functional blocks.
S15: is used to provide notifications and loss of incoming timing reference reporting to the
Synchronous Equipment Management Function (SEMF).
Selector A provides the capability to select timing reference from available T1 inputs, either automatically
based on the priority and quality level of the candidate sources (SSM algorithm), or manual as a result of
commands issued from the managing system.
Selector B is capable of selecting timing reference from T1, T2, or T3/T6 inputs, according to the SSM
algorithm. The capability for manual selection of the timing source is also provided.
Selector C is only operated in manual mode, to switch between SETG output signal (T0) and a T1 timing
reference.
The squelch functions A and B mute the relevant timing references in the presence of failure condition,
or SSM threshold violation.
The choice of the timing reference is done in two ways:
Automatically:
Following a particular algorithm based on the quality and the priority of the incoming timing signals.
The automatic selection is based either on the priority of the incoming timing source (Priority
algorithm) or on the priority and the quality level of the incoming sources (SSM algorithm).
Manually:
Following an order from the Operator.
N.B.
The priority level is determined by the Operator for each candidate timing source. It is static
information. On the other hand, the quality of the source is dynamic information, dependant
of the quality of the reference clock generating the timing.
In an SDH signal frame, the quality of the timing source is located in the Section Overhead.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The SETG has 3 modes of operation:
Locked mode:
The SETG output is fully controlled by the external timing references (T1, T2 and T3/T6).
HoldOver mode:
The external timing reference is malfunctioning. The SETG during normal functioning stores
regularly the value of the external timing reference. In this case the SETG output is controlled by this
memorized value.
Free running mode:

This is not a normal operating mode. The external timing reference and the memorized timing
reference are malfunctioning. In this case the SETG output is controlled by the internal clock source.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
356 / 448

The external sources (outputs) are:
18.2 Synchronization Management

The operations that can be done on the synchronization sources are the following:
Timing Source Configuration,

Protection Commands,
T0 Configuration,
T4 Configuration,
SSU Configuration,
Transmitted SSM Quality Configuration,
Frame Mode Configuration (see para. 11.8 on page 170)
Remove Timing Reference,
Change T4<> T5 (not applicable to 1640FOX)
Set T0 Equal T4,
Change 2 MHz > 2 Mbit (available only if T3 has been configured as timing source) (not applicable
to 1640FOX)
Remove T0 Equal T4,
Show Timing Source.
Before any other operation the synchronization view has to be displayed.

18.2.1 Displaying the Synchronization View
The synchronization view can be normally opened using the menu Views options (see Figure 249. ).
Using menu options, select the Synchronization option from the Views pull down menu as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 249. Obtaining the synchronization view.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Selecting this menu option the synchronization representation will be displayed directly into the current
window instead of the current view. All the operations that can be done on the synchronization sources
are performed from this synchronization view.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
357 / 448
The Synchronization view shows the external timing reference sources and the T0, T4 or T5, generation.
The selection is based on the SSM algorithm or on the priority of the incoming timing sources. Activating
the SSM algorithm implies that the selection of the source is before done on the quality criteria and then
on the priority criteria for sources at the same quality level.
After selecting the Synchronization option from the Views menu the Synchronization View is visualized
in Figure 250.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 250. Synchronization View Example
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
358 / 448

18.2.2 Synchronization View
Synchronization View Description

The synchronization view provides two list of allowable timing references:
one for T0 timing output; T0 list is always present;

one for T4 or T5 timing output; the presence of the T4/T5 list is configurable using resource files.
T0 list contains :
a timing reference associated to the Internal Oscillator timing source; it is always present
and it cannot be removed or redefined.
6 max timing reference for candidate inputs belonging to the allowable timing reference
T1, T2 or T3/T6 configurable by the operator.
T4 list contains :
6 timing reference for candidate inputs belonging to the allowable timing reference T1
configurable by the operator.
The T0 and T4/T5 lists are used for the management of reference timing source protection; a 1:n protection
like mechanism is used for the selection of the timing source from T0 (T4/T5) list of the allowable timing
references, . The protection system chooses the timing reference to generate the output T0 (T4/T5) either
automatically, basing on the priority and quality level of the candidate sources according a selection
algorithm or manually under control of the managing system.
View elements description
Here after, the basic component contained in the synchronization view are described:
Timing reference
Each allowable timing reference, , is represented by the graphical object displayed in the view;
the timing reference graphical object displays (with the exception of Internal Oscillator timing
reference) the following information (if the timing source has been declared by the user):
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
the name of the selected timing source

the status of the synchronization source: (lockout, manual switch, force switch, automatic
switch, no request, failure)
the label of the quality level of the timing input source
the priority of the timing input source
2 small boxes representing the SSF (Los) and DRIFT alarms detected on the timing
source;
DRIFT means that the Frequency Offset between the external signal source and the
internal clock is high then the maximum tolerance value.
SSF means that the Server Signal Failure is sending a wrong reference signal to the NE.
In case of alarm indication the operator can select Show Timing Source ( Figure 268. )
to visualize the alarm detail.
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
359 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
the name of the timing source: Internal Oscillator

a small box representing the LOS alarm; the small box will be lighted up when all the
selected timing source are lost, indicating the Holdover or Free Running operation mode;
a label field representing the abnormal clock operation modes; one of the following strings
can be displayed in the label field:
Holdover, displayed when the clock operates in Holdover mode;
Free Running, displayed when the clock operates in Free Running mode
empty string is displayed when the clock operates in Lock

a label 0 representing the priority of the Internal Oscillator
Selectors
small ellipse are used to represent respectively:
the selector A;
the selector B;
the selector C;
Squelch Status
boxes contained a label field are used to represent the squelch statuses T0/T4 and T4. The box
dis plays the configured quality level threshold and it is lighted up when the output timing signal
is inhibited.
Output Signal
an arrow and a label field are used to represent respectively:
the output signal T0;
the output signal T4/T5;
line Type
the following different line type are used to link the output signals and the respective allowable
timing reference:
A solid line between an output signal and an allowable timing reference means that timing
reference is currently used to generate that signal;
A dashed line between an output signal and an allowable timing reference means that
timing reference is not currently in use as timing source but will act in the protecting role.
In the same way, a solid line between T0 signal and T4/T5 signal (or T0_Test signal) box is
drawn when T0 signal is used to generate T4/T5.
SSU
box indicating a possible external SSU (Synchronization Source Unit).
Timing Generator
box indicating the status of the timing generator .
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
360 / 448

In the timing reference graphical object associated to the Internal Oscillator the following
information are displayed :

18.2.3 Timing Source Configuration

This functionality allows to configure the input synchronization sources and configure or modify the timing
source priority and quality.
Figure 251. Synchronization Menu

The menu options are greyed according to the current state of the dialogue box that the user can open.
Firstly select an empty synchronization source reference and after the Synchronization menu to open the
Synchronization Option List (as shown in Figure 251. ). Then select the Timing Source Configuration
option from the cascading menu, as shown in the above figure.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
361 / 448

Figure 252. Timing source configuration for crossconnect equipments

The Timing source configuration dialogue box displays the extracted quality of the selected timing source.
It permits to configure the following timing source information:
Input source
Quality level
Priority level
Click on the Input Source Choice field and then on its related button Choose; Figure 253. shows the
opened window, to search a TP as a source.
Following the TP Search procedure described in para.14.5.1 on page 217 ( rack, subrack, board, port )
enter the termination point (TP) value.
The valid TPs for timing reference are : EIS for electrical SDH ports, OpS for optical SDH ports, PPI for
2Mb/s ports.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This operation can be repeated for all the available empty synch. sources both for T0 clock and for T4
clock.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
362 / 448

Figure 253. TP Synch. source search (example)

Click on the Input Quality Configuration: the option button opens the option menu to select the desired
quality level.
Input Quality Configuration can be fixed by the user, in increasing order, with five quality levels: G.811,
G.812T, G.812L, G.813, Q. Dont use (where the highest quality level is G.811 ); or it can be taken as the
actual Rx quality, retrieved from the signal received from the line (Extracted option).
If Input Quality Configuration is set to a value other than Extracted, Rx quality is forced to this value.
Click on the Priority: the option button opens the option menu to select the desired priority level.
The internal oscillator timing source will have the lowest priority (priority=0) and its priority can not be
changed. The other timing sources will have a priority of 1 to n.
Priority of 1 is the highest priority. Levels 6,...2 are intermediate levels between level 0 and 1, in increasing
order of priority (i.e. 0 6 5 4 3 2 1).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
When the configuration of the timing source is completed, click on the OK push button to validate the
choice and close the dialogue box. The Cancel push button cancels the configuration and closes the
dialogue box.
Positioning the mouse on the synch. source box Port# test, the corresponding physical interface
denomination (racksubrackboardport) is written on the window bottom left.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
363 / 448
Select the timing reference from the synchronization view. As in Figure 251. , select the Synchronization
pull down menu. You can then select the Protection Commands to open the Figure 254. Menu options
are greyed according to the current state of the selected timing source.
Figure 254. Lockout, Force and Manual commands

a)
Invoke/Release Lockout: Locking or unlocking a timing source enables or disables the timing
source from being considered as a possible timing source for T0 or T4/T5.
b)
Invoke/Release Force and Manual Selection of Timing Source
General selection
A timing source can be selected manually or automatically. Furthermore, the selection of a particular
incoming timing source (except the internal oscillator) may be forced.
This selection is independent of the priority or quality of the timing source. If the timing source is lockout
or unavailable, this operation is impossible. A timing source is considered to be available if it is not lockout
and has not a failure condition or Priority level of 0.
The forced switch mode is terminated by releasing or inhibiting the force selected timing source.
The manual selection option is only possible if the quality and priority of the selected timing source are
sufficient. Otherwise the automatic selection algorithm overrules the manual selection.
If the previously manual selected timing source becomes unavailable the automatic selection is activated.
The Status indication describes the current synch. status (No Request, Automatic Switch, Failure, ...)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
The internal oscillator cannot be forced or manually selected.
From the dialogue box that opens, you can confirm or cancel the operation.
To perform or release a T0 or T4/T5 lockout, forced or manual selection, the following operations have to
be done:
Select the T0 or T4/T5 source.
Click on the Synchronization menu.
Select the Protection Commands option then invoke/Release the Lockout, Forced or manual
Selection option.
Click on Apply in the displayed confirmation box.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
364 / 448

18.2.4 Synchronization Protection Commands

18.2.5 Synchronization Configuration for T0/T4/T5 and T4 squelch criteria

Select the available T0 or T4 synchronization sources and then the T0 or T4 Configuration... command.
This command permits to select/deselect the SSM algorithm, to set the wait time to restore and to enable
the revertive procedure if all these features are available.
In this NE revertive mode is hardware set, with fixed WTR.
In Revertive mode the internal selector A/B (Figure 248. ) changes every time to the best reference clock
with the highest quality; on the same quality level basis the reference clock Source with the best priority
will be selected. The changing mechanism of the reference inputs is controlled by the wait time to restore:
this time sets a delay before to change the input source.
Selecting the T0 or T4 Configuration set the SSM algorithm and the Wait To Restore Time in the dialog
box upper part of Figure 255.
Click on the SSM Algorithm to select/deselect it.
Wait To Restore Time button and Revertive option button are disabled
Selecting Synchronization > T4 Configuration it is possible to set the T4 squelch criteria in the bottom
dialog box of Figure 255.
This functionality allows to configure the external timing reference (T4) squelch criteria. The squelch
function mutes the relevant timing references in the presence of a failure condition.
Squelch may be forced by the Operator or according to squelch criteria which consists in a choice of quality
level.
Different squelch criteria may be applied:
when T0 is selected to generate T4 (squelch B Figure 248. ): T0 may be squelched if all the
allowable timing references of Selector B have Quality Level lower than the programmable
threshold.
when T1 is selected to generate T4 (squelch A Figure 248. ) :T1 may be squelched if T1 Quality
Level is lower than the programmable threshold or if it becomes unavailable.
The T0/T4 and T1/T4 squelch fields enables the operator to configure the quality level of the T0 or T4
timing source, opening the relevant option menu.
When the configuration of T0/T4 Configuration is completed, click on the OK button to validate the choice
and close the dialogue box.
The T5 output field allows to select the bit used (from #4 to #8) for SSM (refer to Figure 256. )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Cancel button cancels the configuration and closes the dialogue box.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
365 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 255. Configuring the T0 or T4 SSM algorithm and the squelch criteria
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
366 / 448

Figure 256. T5 output SSN bits configuration

The T4 squelch configuration dialogue box enables you to configure the quality level of the T4 timing
source.
Click on the T0: option button to open the option menu and select the desired quality level.
Click on the T4: option button to open the option menu and select the desired quality level.
The T4 Force Squelch enables you to activate the T4 forced squelch.
When the configuration of T0/T4 Configuration is completed, click on the OK push button to validate the
choice and close the dialogue box.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Cancel push button cancels the configuration and closes the dialogue box.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
367 / 448
The SSU configuration command allows either to configure the single NE or the NE with SSU. In the last
case the SSU quality has to be defined.
SSU: Synchronization Source Unit, it is an external equipment that serves the NE for timing reference.
Selecting SSU Configuration from the Synchronization menu is Figure 257. is presented
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 257. SSU Configuration
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
368 / 448

18.2.6 SSU Configuration

18.2.7 Remove Timing Reference

Select the synch. source to remove and click on the Synchronization > Remove Timing Reference
option (Figure 258. ). To remove the selected source click on OK button of the confirmation message
(Figure 259. ).
Figure 258. Synchronization source removing (example)

To remove the selected source click on OK button of the confirmation message (Figure 259. ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 259. Synchronization source removing confirmation
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
369 / 448
18.2.8 Change T4 <> T5
This menu allows the change of the synchronization physical interface from 2Mhz (T4 ) to 2 Mbit/s (T5)
and viceversa.
NOTE: this menu is enable only if the SERGI board ( on 1650SMC) or SERVICE board (on 1660SM) is
present in the subrack.
Select Change T4 <> T5 from the Synchronization menu as shown in Figure 257.
Figure 260. Change T4 <> T5 menu (example)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A confirmation message appears (see Figure 261. on page 370)
Figure 261. Change T4 <> T5 confirmation message
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
370 / 448

This option is not applicable to 1640FOX.

Click on ok to confirm; the new window display T5 instead of T4 (see Figure 262. on page 371)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 262. Change T4 <> T5: command execution (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
371 / 448
18.2.9 Change 2MHz >2Mbit
This menu is enabled only if the operator selects a protection unit which have as source a 2 MHz (T3)
or a 2 Mbit/s (T6) without traffic.
Select Change 2MHz >2Mbit from the Synchronization menu as shown in Figure 263.
Figure 263. Change 2MHz >2Mbit menu (example)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A confirmation message appears (see Figure 264. on page 372)
Figure 264. Change 2MHz >2Mbit confirmation message

Click on ok to confirm;
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
372 / 448

This option is not applicable to 1640FOX.

The label of the protection unit will be changed depending on the kind of source selected (see Figure 265.
on page 373):
If the selected protection unit is a 2 MHz, then the label will be changed into 2Mbit/s (2 Mbps
T6#A in the example of Figure 265. )
If the selected protection unit is a 2 Mbit/s, then the label will be changed into 2MHz (2MHz T3#A
for example)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 265. Change 2MHz >2Mbit: command execution (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
373 / 448
To connect T0 internal synch. select a synch. source and click on Synchronization > Set T0 Equal
T4 menu option. The connection between T0/T4 will pass from a shaped to a continue line as in the
example of Figure 266.
Figure 266. T4 equal T0 setting (example)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To separate T4 from T0 click on the Synchronization > Remove T0 Equal T4 menu option. The T0/T4
connection will become shaped while the connection between T1/T4 will pass from a shaped to a
continue line.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
374 / 448

18.2.10 Set and Remove T0 Equal T4

18.2.11 Transmission of SSM Quality Configuration

Select the T1 SDH Reference Source in the Synchronization View (Figure 250. ) hence the Transmission
SSM Quality Configuration is enabled. This selection allows, with the Inserted option, to transmit the
system internal T0 clock quality towards the external SDH interface. It is also possible to transmit different
quality level selecting a different value.
Click on Transmitted SSM Quality Configuration of the
Figure 267. opens.
Synchronization menu option.
Figure 267. Transmission SSM Quality (example)

This Transmission SSM Quality window can be also opened from any SDH boards. Select the Equipment
option of the View menu, then access the Board view> Port view> Physical Media> SDH Tx Quality
Configuration; it is also possible to open the window selecting the Transmission option of the View
menu, then access the Physical Media> SDH Tx Quality Configuration option.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In both cases select the MST block
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
375 / 448
Selecting any T1 or T2 Reference Source in the Synchronization View (Figure 250. ) hence the Show
Timing Source is enabled. This selection allows to analyze the input source considering its payload
structure and the related alarms (Port view is presented) .
Click on Show Timing Source of the Synchronization menu option. Figure 268. opens.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 268. Show Timing Source (example with T2 reference source)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
376 / 448

18.2.12 Show Timing Source
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

19 MSSPRING MANAGEMENT
MSSPRING is a feature applicable only to 1660SM Equipment; it cannot be applicable
to 1640FOX and 1650SMC.
19.1 MSSPRING introduction

Different MSSPRING protections architectures are provide: 2Fiber (Terrestrial), and 4Fiber NPE
(Transoceanic). See ITUT Rec. G.841.
The description of the MSSPRING protections is inserted in the Technical Handbook.
4 Fiber MSSPRING is not operative in this release.
Note for 1660SM Rel. 5.1 only: in the following paragraphs the 2F MS SPRING at STM 16 will be
explained; the same description can be apllied to 2F MS SPRING at STM 64 taking into account that 64
AU 4 are available and that the bandwidth is divided into two halves of equal capacity called respectively
working (AU4# 1 to AU4# 32) and protection capacity (AU4#33 to AU4# 64).
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
377 / 448
In the following paragraphs 2Fiber advices are reported, to follow before to implement the MSSPRing
protection: there are some limitations concerning the aggregate types or the AU4s crossconnections to
be considered.
19.2.1 2Fiber MSSPRING connection configuration advices
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The following suggestions must be considered in the MS SPRING connection configuration:
ED
SNCP, 4 Fiber MS SPRING and MSP protection connections cannot be installed in a 2 Fiber
MSSPRING network. This leads to an unprotected connections installation.
AU4s from #9 to #16 dont have to be used for connections nor considered in any parameter
of Squelching table provisioning. Only AU4s from #1 to #8 must be used and configured for
path installation.
AU4 permutation (change of AU4 allocation) is not allowed. The AU4 allocated to passthrough
in HVC connections must be the same through the node.
AU4 crossconnection line side, i.e. paths received from the line and loopedback to the same
line are not allowed.
Follow the Squelching Table Configuration in order to define the Squelching Table HO for
East and for West Side describing, for each connection installed, as Source Node, the Node
Identifier of the node generating the considered AU4 and as Destination Node, the Node
Identifier of the node terminating the AU4.
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
378 / 448

19.2 MSSPRING connection configuration advices

19.3 Operative sequence to configure MSSPRING

19.3.1 Operative sequence to configure 2Fiber MSSPRING
Next paragraphs list the operative sequence according the type of procedure to obtain.
Activation procedure
a)
Create an MSSPRING schema with WTR, Node Identifier, Ring map and the related Squelching
Table for each node of the ring, in the desired order. WTR Ring must be the same in all the nodes.
b)
In the Main dialog for MSSPRing management select ACTIVATE in each node of the ring, in the
desired order.
Consider that, in this step, Default K byte West or East detection by View Protection Status
Parameter (under MSSPRing label > Protocol exception), will occur on those Ports connected
to the nodes not provisioned yet with the MSSPRing protection created (active).
c)
Verify in the View Protection Status Parameter screen, at the end of the provisioning update, that all
the nodes of the ring are in MSSPRing active and No request state.
Deactivation procedure
a)
In the Main dialog for MSSPRing management select DEACTIVATE in each node of the ring.
Consider that, in this step, Default K byte West or East detection by View Protection Status
Parameter (under MSSPRing label > Protocol exception), will occur on those Ports of the
activated nodes connected to the nodes just deactivated.
b)
In the Main dialog for MSSPRing management select DELETE in each node of the ring.
Removing a node
a)
In the Manage ring Map view select the node and click on theRemove Node button.
b)
Modify the table in the Configure Squelch Table view according the new Ring Map.
c)
Opening the View Protection Status Parameter screen, send Force Ring command to both NEs
adjacent to the node to be removed.
d)
Physically remove the node.
e)
Connect the fibers and send the Release command of the relevant Force Ring to both NEs
adjacent to the removed node.
Adding a node
a)
In the Manage ring Map view insert the node in the selected position. Next nodes are automatically
shifted.
Modify the table in the Configure Squelch Table view according the new Ring Map.
Opening the View Protection Status Parameter screen, send Force Ring command to both NEs
adjacent to the node to be added.
Physically add the node and configure with 2Fiber MSSPRING activated with the right
configuration (Ring Map, Squelching table, WTR, Node Identifier).
Connect the fibers and send the Release command of the relevant Force Ringto both NEs
adjacent to the added node.
b)
c)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
d)
e)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
379 / 448
19.4 MSSPRING Management

In the current release the NE supports the MSSPRING protection as Terrestrial architecture.
The Transoceanic application with 4Fiber is not supported in current release.
For the 2Fiber Terrestrial application a max. of 16 nodes are available.
The available tables permit to visualize for the same NE the architecture 2 x 2Fiber.
Figure 269. shows the MSSPRing pull down menu.
Figure 269. Display MSSPRing pull down menu

The first Main Dialog for MSSPRing management option contains all the commands to configure and
manage the MSSPRing.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In any dialog box is present the Cancel or Close buttons. When the user clicks on these buttons the dialog
box will close without starting any operation.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
380 / 448

19.4.1 MSSPRing Main Configuration

Select the MSSPRing pull down menu. Then select the Main Dialog for MSSPRing management
option from the pull down menu.
The following dialogue box is displayed (Figure 270. ) when no protection have been previously
configured.
Figure 270. MSSPRing Management dialogue box.

The only command available is Create. The name of Schema Selection is not editable but is fixed to No
Schema.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Click on Create to start the MSSPRing configuration. Figure 271. opens.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
381 / 448

Figure 271. Creation Schema dialog box.

The user can select the MSSPRing Application and the Architecture types supported by the Network
Element.
Terrestrial MSSPRing Application is a 2 Fiber architecture.
Transoceanic MS_SPRING is a 4 Fiber architecture (not supported in current release)
The Port Selection depends on the Architecture type: if the architecture is a 2F MSSPRing, the working
and protection port on each side is the same and the Protecting West and East fields are disabled
(greyed).
If the architecture is a 4F MSSPRing, the working and protection ports on each side are different.
The label r(xx)sr(y)sl(zz)port#(hh) where r=rack, sr=subrack, sl=slot give the position of the physical port.
In the same board it is generally possible to have different port numbers.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The OK button will start the selected operation. The cursor is displayed busy up to receiving a reply. Then
the dialog window will be closed. Figure 272. opens and all commands are now available.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
382 / 448

Figure 272. Activated MSSPRing Management

The Holdoff Time command is not operative in current release.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
It is possible to give an identification name to the schema by means of the Set Name command (refer to
Figure 273. on page 383).
Figure 273. Set scheme name
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
383 / 448

Click on Ring Map to configure the network node connection. Figure 274. opens.
Figure 274. Node Id and associated ring node position.

The Ring Map sets the connection sequence of the nodes within the ring. The matrix represents up to 64
nodes for transoceanic application and up to 16 nodes for terrestrial application.
Select Current NodeId (it means the NE where the operator is acting) in the box and enable ( n ) Change
NodeId button (Id means Node Identifier).
Select Available NodeId in the pull down list (0 to 63 for transoceanic application, 0 to 15 for terrestrial
application) releasing the left mouse button or pushing the stepper arrows and enter keys to select the
NodeId value.
This will be displayed in the Available NodeId box then click on Add Node button.
Clicking on the Add Node button the selected Ring position will shift one step on the right starting from
1 position and in the NodeId field the Available NodeId value is inserted. In the same time the Available
NodeId will be updated to a new value.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The default association for a four node ring related to the fourth node (NodeId=3; Ring Position=4) is
depicted in Figure 275.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
384 / 448

Figure 275. Ring map configuration

Repeat the procedure for all nodes of the ring selecting the different NEs and edit the different Current
NodeId value.
To remove a node, select the node and click on Remove Node button. The following Ring Position of
the nodes on the right decreases by one and the erased NodeId is inserted into Available NodeId , so
it can be assigned to other nodes.
The OK button will start the selected operation, displaying the busy cursor up to receiving the reply to the
actions. Then the dialog window will be closed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Click on the WTR button. Figure 276. opens.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
385 / 448

Figure 276. WTR dialog box.

Click on the push mouse button on the up/down Seconds arrows to select the required delay for the
relevant WTR. The step value is 60 sec.
The range value accepted is from 60 sec. to 900 sec. (in current release is fixed to 300 sec.)
Click on OK to apply the WTR Configuration.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The same WTR Time Ring must be set on each Node of the ring.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
386 / 448

19.4.2 Squelching Table with 2 fiber Terrestrial applications

With a 2 fiber Terrestrial application can be selected the Squelching Table while with a 4 fiber
Transoceanic application (not supported in current release) can be selected the Ring Traffic (see
Figure 272. on page 383).
If the operator tries to select a different table a error message is visualized. Figure 277. shows the error
message visualized when is selected the Ring Traffic with a Terrestrial application.
Figure 277. Example of error message

Click on Squelching Table of see Figure 272. on page 383 to configure the AU4 (AU4#1 to AU4#8 for
2F Architecture,) connection between the different nodes. Figure 278. opens. The same opens clicking
on Configure Squelch Table of the MSSPRing pull down menu of Figure 269. on page 380.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 278. Squelching table

When the window is opened for the first time the squelching table is N/A ( not available ) because the NE
has never been configured. Point the mouse on the matrix position and click on the right mouse button
to open the node list menu. Select the node identification number (0 to 15) from the available list using
the slider or the stepper arrows on the right scroll region.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
387 / 448
19.4.2.1 Squelching table example

Figure 279. is an example of ring traffic.

Figure 280. represent in a table the connections of the ring example.
Figure 281. to Figure 288. show how to configure the relative squelching table.
AU4#3
AU4#1
AU4#2
West
East
West
East
B
AU4#1
AU4#2
AU4#3
AU4#2
AU4#3
AU4#3
East
East
West
West
AU4#1
Figure 279. Example of a ring traffic

The squelching table is applicable only for HOVC signals.
AU
Number
1
2
3
west
A
Node
east
VC
VC
VC
4
5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 280. Connections of the ring of Figure 279.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
388 / 448

Node A: 1660SM MSSPRINGSquelch Table Configu...
Figure 281. Squelching table of Node A, West side.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Node A: 1660SM MSSPRINGSquelch Table Configu...
Figure 282. Squelching table of Node A, East side.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
389 / 448

Node B:1660SMMSSPRINGSquelch Table Configu...
Figure 283. Squelching table of Node B, West side.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Node B:1660SMMSSPRINGSquelch Table Configu...
Figure 284. Squelching table of Node B, East side.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
390 / 448

Node C:1660SMMSSPRINGSquelch Table Configu...
Figure 285. Squelching table of Node C, West side.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Node C:1660SMMSSPRINGSquelch Table Configu...
Figure 286. Squelching table of Node C, East side.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
391 / 448

Node D:1660SMMSSPRINGSquelch Table Configu...
Figure 287. Squelching table of Node D, West side.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Node D:1660SMMSSPRINGSquelch Table Configu...
Figure 288. Squelching table of Node D, East side.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
392 / 448

19.4.3 Activate, Deactivate and Delete commands

The Main Activities commands ( Figure 272. on page 383) manage the MSSPRing configuration. The
MSSPRing status can be Enable, Active, Disable and Inactive.
After having configured the protection schema by means of the Create button, the status becomes
Enable .
The Activate button selection enables the MSSPRing protection mechanism on the selected schema
configuration.
To change from Active to Enable click on the Deactivate button. This command starts the request to
deactivate the MSSPRing protection mechanism.
When the selected protection schema is Enable the Delete button starts the request to remove it. The
delete action is started after confirming the window message Figure 289. .
Figure 289. Confirmation message
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
During the activation procedure on different ADMs some of these can be in Active status , others in Inactive
status. The statuses, the protocol request and the protocol protection errors are described in the chapters
describing theMSSPRing Protection Status and Commands .
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
393 / 448
19.5.1 2F MSSPRing protection commands

If a protection schema is Active it is possible to select one of the above commands.
Clicking on the Prot. Commands button in the MSSPRing >Main Dialog for MSSPRing management
( see Figure 272. on page 383), Figure 290. is opened.
8
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 290. Protection states and commands Idle status (2F)

The working/protection
architecture.
ED
02
span state boxes are not available (greyed) for the 2Fiber MSSPRing
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
394 / 448

19.5 MSSPRING Protection Status and Commands for 2 fiber terrestrial

application

In the MSPRing 2 Fiber configuration, the 18 working channels are inserted into the 916 protection
channels in the opposite side of the failure event as shown in Figure 291.
w/p
A
w/p
w/p
B
w/p
Ring Protection:
the working channels (AU4 1 to 8) are substituted
by the ring protection channels p (AU4 9 to 16)
( B on East side )
( A on West side )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 291. Ring Protection (2F)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
395 / 448
The external protection commands are : Lockout, Force, Exercise (not operative in current
release),Manual, WTR.
The lockout commands disable the MSSPRing management.
The lockout section presents six lockout commands, four operative ( Figure 292. ). Each lockout
command is applicable on different points where the lockout actions has to be performed ( Figure 293. )
and any Lockout command is associated to a Release command to come back to the previous status.
Term Span identifies the section interested by the command, it doesnt assume the Span meaning of the
four fiber protection.
Figure 292. Lockout commands (2F)
West
w
p
p
w
East
w
p
p
w
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
w= working (AU4 1 to 8)
p=protection (AU4 9 to 16)
Figure 293. Protection and working channels where the lockout command can be activated (2F)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
396 / 448

19.5.2 External commands (2F)

The protection events can be equipment/signal failure, signal degrade or external command or a
combination of them.
The Events will be served if some actions (B/S=bridges and switches) are executed and the network
has been updated.
The Events will be signalled if the K1/K2 protocol communicates to the network nodes what has
happened, without execute actions.
A single ring failure is completely restored but not two ring failures. When are present multiple ring failures
the automatic B/S protection will try to maintain on all the possible connections.
The K1/K2 communication protocol MSSPRing is generated from the two nodes adjacent to Event via
the protection communication channels. A node is defined tail end when it firstly receives the Event,
the second node is defined headend when it receives back the protocol answer. Figure 294. shows the
association of tailend / tailend or headend / tailend.
Some network protection mechanisms are accepted or rejected depending on the end type (tail/head)
(lockout command,...)
w/p
w/p
X
w/p
w/p
Tailend
Tailend/Headend
Tailend
Figure 294. Tailend / Headend association

If the node is tailend, the lockout working ring command disable the protection MSSPRing
mechanisms, while if the node is headend, it serves the request node protection (protection not
disable). See Figure 295. on page 398.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
With the lockout protecting span command and a ring failure, the ring protection is served if this ring failure
occurred along the same section; the ring protection is disabled if the ring failure has occurred in
another ring section.
On the contrary, with the lockout working ring command failure and a ring failure along a different section,
the ring protection is served ((protection not disable). See Figure 296.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
397 / 448
Lockout working
w/p
w/p
head
E
W
failure
W
B
E
tail
ring protection
Lockout working
failure
w/p
w/p
tail
W
E
W
B
head
E
no ring protection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 295. Tailend / headend protection with a lockout working and a one direction ring failure (2F)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
398 / 448

Lockout protecting Span
W
no ring protection
ring protection
Lockout working
A
W
Lockout working
failure
w/p
w/p
E
Lockout working
failure
w/p
B
E
w/p
w/p
w/p
E
failure
failure
w/p
Lockout protecting Span
w/p
E
W
B
E
ring protection
B
E
no ring protection
Lockout working
failure
w/p
w/p
W
A
E
C
W
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ring protection
Figure 296. Ring protection with a lockout and a ring failure (2F)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
399 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Combinations
of nonserved
failures and
external commands
02
W
E
3
B
w/p
w/p
A Node
A Node
Ring E
Lockout Working
Ring W
Lockout Working
E
2
ring protection on
the opposite side
if the ring failure
occurs between
AB or BC nodes
A Node
Ring E
Lockout Protection

w/p
w/p
ring protection on
the opposite side
if the ring failure
occurs between
AC or CB nodes
A Node
Ring W
Lockout Protection
Figure 297. shows a ring with three nodes and the actions performed by the lockout commands. This
command disables the acknowledgment of the signal failure/degrade on the receiving ports.
Figure 297. Lockout command and nonserved failures (2F)
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
400 / 448

The Force command ( Figure 298. ) executes a forced protection. The Force Ring command substitutes
the working channels (AU4 1 to 8) with the opposite direction protection channels (AU4 9 to 16) between
two adjacent nodes (Figure 299. ).
The Force Span command is not operative in 2 fiber MSSPring.
Figure 298. Forced and Manual commands (2F)
Manual/force Ring East
A
W
Manual/force Ring West
A1
E
W/P
w18
p916
w18
B1
W/P
p916
w18
w18
p916
p916
w18
w18
p916
p916
W
W/P
w18
p916
w18
p916
W. 18 channels are substituted by P. 916 channels

on the opposite side for both adjacent nodes
Figure 299. Manual and Force Ring command (2F)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Manual command is similar to Force command but it is at a lower priority level with respect to
automatic MSSPRing. The general priority scale that can be applied to solve antithetical situations
starting from the lowest priority level is: manual ring automatic working ring force ring lockout
Working Ring lockout Protecting Span.
When a force ring command is applied a next working failure is not able to modify the forced configuration
applied. That is because force ring command has a higher priority respect to the Automatic working
protection. In this condition the ring can be split according the location of command and event. Vice versa
the Manual protection is exceeded by the Automatic protection. Figure 300. visualizes the ring
protection with a Force/Manual command and a signal failure. FSR is for Force Switching Request,
SFR is for Signal Failure Request.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
401 / 448
Force Ring East

failure

w/p
w/p
E
W
E
ring protection for FSR

Force Ring East
failure
A node is isolated
w/p
w/p
W
A
E
C
E
W
Manual Ring East

ring protection for SFR and FSR
failure
w/p
w/p
E
B
E
ring protection for SFR

Manual Ring East
failure
w/p
w/p
W
A
E
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
W
ring protection for SFR
Figure 300. Ring Protection with Force and Manual commands (2F)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
402 / 448
Signal fail/degrade Signal fail/degrade

Ring W
Ring E
A node

A node
12 w. channels are
sobstituted by 34 p.
channels
B/S actions
w/p
34 w. channels are
sobstituted by 12 p.
channels
w/p
A
w/p
C
3
w/p
Figure 301. Automatic protection Bridge/Switch (2F)

Each command starts when the proper button is selected. A dialog box ( Figure 302. ) has to be confirmed
before the command is performed.
From each command exists its own Release button to cancel the previously selected command and come
back to normal MSSPRing protection.
Figure 302. Example of confirmation dialog box
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Clicking on the WTR command (of Figure 272. on page 383) next figure opens. If the WTR box, in the
Local Condition field of Figure 290. on page 394, becomes red a waiting time has been activated after
repairing the ring failure. The waiting time, set in the configuration menu, can be cleared selecting the
Clear WTR Ring command. A confirmation dialog box opens and, if the operator clicks OK, the WTR
box turns off and the protection status window is updated.
Figure 303. Clear WTR command (2F)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
403 / 448
19.5.3 2F MSSPRing dual protection commands
two external commands

an external command and a ring failure
two contemporary ring failures
Dual Events can appear on the same side W/W (West/West) or E/E (East/East) (SS= same side) or on
the opposite side W/E or E/W (OS= opposite site) of the ring network. In the SS or OS the Events can
appear on the same node (SN) or on the different nodes (DN), the different node can be an adjacent node
(AN) or a remote node (RN). Figure 304. depicts a clockwise ring network . The network propagation
K1K2 protocol signals are according to the following legend :
C
= served the column element
= served the row element
= served both row and column elements
Cs
= signalled (not served) the column element
Rs
= signalled (not served) the row element
Bs
= signalled (not served) both row and column element
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
when a command (Manual switch, Force switch) is neither served nor signalled, it is erased ( it is
not pending at the node)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
404 / 448

In general dual contemporary Events can be:

Reference point
clockwise
OS SN
SS SN
1
SS RN
OS RN
OS AN
2
W
SS AN
w/p
w/p
3
w/p
SS RN
w/p
OS RN
Figure 304. Ring network reference scheme (2F)

Figure 304. visualizes the ring reference scheme: the adjacent node (AN) is the node connected to the
reference point.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The automatic protection for dual ring failures is represented in Figure 306. Consider the network
reference scheme of Figure 305. with a tailend / headend alarm propagation. In this figure are depicted
the node switches for any reported double events.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
405 / 448
failure
w/p
E
4
W
SSAN
failure
failure
w/p
1
W
w/p
E
4
W
SSRN
3
failure
failure
w/p
1
failure
w/p
E
W
E
4
W
OSSN
3
failure
w/p
w/p
E
W
E
failure
W
4
W
OSAN
failure
w/p
1
E
w/p
4
W
OSRN
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
failure
Figure 305. Examples of Double ring failure
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
406 / 448

w/p
Reference
point
Automatic Protection Ring
Other
points
Automatic Protection Ring
SN
SS
AN
Node 2 : isolated = Bs
Node 13 in switching for SF alarm =B
Node 4=intermediate
RN
Nodes 1,2,3,4 in switching for SF alarm =B
SN
Node 1: isolated=Bs
Nodes 2,4 in switching for SF alarm=B
Node 3= intermediate
AN
Node 1,2 in switching for alarm=B

Nodes 3,4 = intermediate
RN
Node 2: isolated=Bs
Node 1,3 in switching for SF alarm=B
Node 4 = intermediate
OS
Figure 306. 2F Automatic protection (tail/head) for double ring failure visualization
The same reference Figure 304. and Figure 305. schemas are applied to describe dual generic Events
where both ring failures and external commands are considered.
The first row at the top of the protection table (Figure 307. ) shows the Events at the reference point. For
each of them the associated Event is listed on the first column at the left of the table.
Two manual ring commands can be only signalled: Bs (Manual SSSN and OSAN commands give the
same ring protection switching and then both can be served).
Two Lockout commands are both always served: B
Force command has priority with respect to the Manual one.
Automatic protection has priority with respect to the Manual command.
Force Ring and Automatic Protection (or two Force ring commands) are always served if they are not
applied on the SSSN. In this last case has to be considered the priority level. The behavior is that seen
for two automatic protection switching ( Figure 305. )
Lockout working SSSN has priority with respect to Manual, Automatic protection and Force commands.
In the other cases, both commands are served (B).
Lockout protection SSSN / OSAN and Manual or Automatic or Force command are both served
because the switching SSSN / OSAN channels are not managed by the lockout protection: B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Lockout protection SSAN / OSSN overrides the Manual or Automatic or Force command because the
lockout protection controls the switching channels of the same Node.
Lockout protection SSRN / OSRN and manual or automatic or force command: the lockout protection
prevents the working 18 channels from being inserted into the protecting 916 ones. The lockout
protection is served, because it has a higher priority, the ring protection will be only signalled (pending).
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
407 / 448
Other
points
Automatic
Manual
Ring
Ring
Manual
OS AN
SN
RN
Force
Ring
SN
SS
AN
RN
SN
OS
AN
RN
Lockout Protecting
Lockout Working
SN
SS
AN
RN
SN
OS
AN
RN
SN
SS
AN
RN
SN
OS
AN
RN
Ring
Force
Ring
Lockout
Protection
Working
R
R
R
R
B
R
R
B
R
R
R
R
R
R
RCs
R
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
C
B
B
B
B
B
B
C
RCs
B
R
RCs
C
C
C
C
B
B
B
B
B
B
C
R
C
B
B
B
B
B
C
B
B
B
B
B
B
C
CRs
C
B
CRs
CRs
C
B
CRs
CRs
C
B
CRs
SN
SS AN
RN
Working
Bs
Bs
Bs
B
Bs
C
C
C

Reference
point
R
B
B
B
B
B
R
B
RCs
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 307. Tail / head dual Events Protection table (2F)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
408 / 448
19.5.4 2F Protection Status Visualization

The protection statuses ring network are:
1 Lockout Switching
2 Forced Switching
3 Automatic Switching ( MSMSPRing protection for equipment/signal failure ).
4 Manual Switching
5 Idle ( regular operation without MSSPRing protection )
These protection states are represented with the following color state boxes:
Green: Active State, No Request condition.
Red: Inactive State and any external or protection executed command ( that has been served ).
Yellow: ordered but not executed command ( that has only been signalled= pending status ).
Greyed: not available state box.
Automatic switching and external commands are revertive: then when the Events have been cleared,
the MSSPRing configuration comes back to its idle status.
The state boxes visualize the Node Condition Request as a consequence of the equipment/signal failure
or the external commands detected on the corresponding side (Event). The state boxes dont describe
the protection actions provided on the NEs.
The served Events ( B/S=bridges and switches are executed and the network has been updated ) are
completed B/S actions visualized as red box indications
The signalled Events ( the K1/K2 protocol communicates to the network nodes what has happened )
are pending B/S visualized as yellow box indications.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 308. shows the protection status with a served East manual ring command. Any protection status
window is divided in different status fields: Schema description and status, Local Conditions, Node
Conditions and Protocol Exceptions. The first one describes the network configuration and application
type and its status, the second gives the local external commands indications, the third the Events results
on the nodes and the fourth one checks the k1/k2 ring protocol. The window is divided into three parts:
West, Middle and East. On the West there are all the box indications corresponding to the West protections
and commands. In the middle WTRRing refers to West and East sides, No Request corresponding
to Idle Status, and Intermediate Node denotes that the protections and commands dont concern the
node involved. The Manual Ring command visualizes Manual Ring on the local node and Request
Node Ring in the both Local Conditions adjacent East ADM1West ADM2 nodes, while the 3 and 4
nodes are Intermediate Node. The red color means that the command has been served. A regular
protocol Exceptions is represented with white boxes, a protocol alarm is signalled with red boxes. The
Prot. Unavailable indications are activated when a lockout protection command is applied in a network
node.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
409 / 448
ADM1: 1660SM MSSPRINGProtection States and Commands

Figure 308. Manual command applied at the Reference Point ring network Figure 305.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 309. reports the Protection Status for external Force and Manual commands in a 3 node ring
(A, B, C). Figure 310. shows the lockout statuses and Figure 311. the automatic protection statuses.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
410 / 448
Force/Manual
Ring W
A
Force/
Manual
Ring
W
Force/
Request
Node
Ring
E
w/p
Request
Node
Ring
E
w/p
A
w/p
w/p
Request
Node
Ring
W
Node
Request
Node
Ring
W
Manual
Ring
E
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Intermediate
Node Conditions
Force/Manual
Ring E
Node
Local Conditions
Intermediate

Reference
node: A
Figure 309. Visualization of the Forced / Manual protection Statuses (2F)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
411 / 448
Lockout
Ring E
w/p
w/p
A
w/p
Lockout
Prot W
Node
Conditions
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
w/p
Lockout
Prot E
Prot. Unavailable
Lockout
Ring W
Intermediate
Node
Figure 310. Visualization of the Lockout command Statuses (2F)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
412 / 448

Prot. Unavailable
Intermediate
Node
Lockout Working Lockout Protecting Lockout Protecting

Ring E
Span W
Span E
Prot. Unavailable
Local
Conditions
Lockout Working
Ring W
Prot. Unavailable
Reference
node: A
Request
Ring
E
w/p
Request
Ring
E
w/p
A
w/p
w/p
Request
Ring
W
Node
Request
Ring
W
Signal fail/degrade
Ring E
Intermediate
Node
Node Conditions
Intermediate

Signal fail/degrade
Ring W
Reference
node: A
Figure 311. Visualization of Automatic Protection Statuses (2F)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The WTR status is visualized on the side where the link has been repaired. The considered network
failures are related to a tailend/headend node connection. The WTR Clear command can be executed
by the user without waiting the WTR setting time.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
413 / 448
19.5.4.1 Double ring failure

The double ring failure visualization of Figure 305. are here following reported.

Figure 312. Protection status with double ring failure (reference pointSSAN)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 312. reports the protection status with double ring failure (reference pointSSAN. The node 2
isolated, the nodes 23 in switching and the node 4 Intermediate. The box color is white unless otherwise
specified:
Active: green
Request Node Ring West ADM3East ADM1: red (served)
Request Node Ring West ADM2East ADM2: yellow (pending)
Intermediate Node ADM4: red
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
414 / 448

Figure 313. Protection status with double ring failure (reference pointSSRN)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 313. reports the protection status with double ring failure (reference pointSSRN). The nodes
1,2,3,4 are being switched for signal failure alarm and both the two signal failures are served. The box
color is white unless otherwise specified:
Active: green
Request Node Ring East ADM3East ADM1: red (switching for SF)
Request Node Ring East ADM4East ADM2: red (switching of the opposite nodes)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
415 / 448

Figure 314. Protection status with double ring failure (reference pointOSAN)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 314. reports the protection status with double ring failure (reference pointOSAN). The nodes
1,2 are being switched for signal failure alarm and both signal failures are served: B. The box color is white
unless otherwise specified:
Active: green
Request Node Ring West ADM2East ADM1: red (switching for SF)
Intermediate Node ADM3ADM4: red
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
416 / 448

Figure 315. Protection status with double ring failure (reference pointOSAN) recovering to idle
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 315. reports the previous protection status with double ring failure (reference pointOSAN)
while the ring protection comes back to its idle status. The WTR (Wait To Restore) Ring on ADM1 node
becomes red to signal that the SF disappears at the reference point . The box color is white unless
otherwise specified:
Active: green
WTR Ring : red (to signal the SF recovering)
Request Node Ring West ADM2East ADM1: red
Intermediate Node ADM3ADM4: red
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
417 / 448
19.5.4.2 Double external command or an external command and a ring failure

Some more significative double events of Figure 307. are here following reported.

Figure 316. Double manual ring command (reference pointSSAN)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 316. reports the protection status with double manual command (reference pointSSAN). Both
the commands can be only pending. The Request ring to 1,2,3 nodes becomes pending while the 4 node
is Intermediate node. The box color is white unless otherwise specified:
Active: green
Request Node Ring
Request Node Ring
Request Node Ring
Intermediate Node
ED
02
East ADM1 West ADM2: yellow ( pending ) for Manual Ring East ADM1
East ADM2 West ADM3: yellow ( pending ) for Manual Ring East ADM2
West ADM1 East ADM3: yellow ( pending ) for switching of the opposite nodes
ADM4: red
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
418 / 448

Figure 317. Double manual ring command (reference pointOSAN)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 317. reports the protection status with double manual command (reference pointOSAN). Both
the commands can be served. The Request Manual ring to ADM1 (East) and to ADM2 opposite side
(West) collapses in the same manual command. Both the manual commands are served. The box color
is white unless otherwise specified:
Active: green
Request Node Ring East ADM1 West ADM2: red ( served )
Intermediate Node ADM3, ADM4: red
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
419 / 448

Figure 318. Manual ring and Lockout Protection (reference pointSSSN)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 318. reports the protection status with a manual command and a lockout protection (reference
pointSSSN). Both the manual and the lockout commands are visualized to the same ADM1 node
(East). Both the commands are served because the bridge/switch points are different. The box color is
white unless otherwise specified:
Active: green
Request Node Ring East ADM1 West ADM2: red ( served )
Intermediate Node ADM3, ADM4: red
Manual Ring and Lockout Prot. commands East ADM1: red
Prot. Unavailable East ADM1 : red .
N.B.
The Prot. Unavailable is not propagated on West ADM2 node because on West ADM2 the
protection switching has been executed.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
420 / 448

Figure 319. Manual ring and Lockout Protection (reference pointSSRN)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 319. reports the protection status with a manual command and a lockout protection (reference
pointSSRN). The manual command is pending while the lockout command is served. The box color
Active: green
Manual Ring command East ADM1: yellow
Request Node Ring East ADM1 West ADM2 : yellow ( pending )
Request Node Ring West ADM1 East ADM2 : yellow ( pending ) for switching of the opposite nodes
Lockout Prot. command: East ADM3 : red
Prot. Unavailable East ADM3 and West ADM4: red (served)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
421 / 448

Figure 320. Automatic working ring and Manual Ring (reference pointOSAN)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 320. reports the protection status with a ring failure and a manual ring command (reference
pointOSAN). The automatic protection has a higher priority with respect to the manual command and
then it has been served. The box color is white unless otherwise specified:
Active: green
Request Node Ring East ADM1 West ADM2 : red (served)
Intermediate Node ADM3 ADM4 : red
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
422 / 448

Figure 321. Automatic working ring and Force Ring (reference pointSSAN)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 321. reports the protection status with a ring failure and a force ring command (reference
pointSSAN). The ADM2 is isolated and the force command is pending. The box color is white unless
otherwise specified:
Active: green
Request Node Ring East ADM1: red (served) the West ADM1 switching is applied for SF
Request Node Ring West ADM3: red (served) the East ADM3 switching is applied for the force command
Request Node Ring West ADM2, East ADM2: yellow (pending) the ADM2 is isolated
Intermediate Node ADM4 : red
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
423 / 448

Figure 322. Automatic working ring and Lockout working Ring (reference pointSSSN)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 322. reports the protection status with a ring failure and a lockout working command (reference
pointSSSN). The Lockout command has a higher priority with respect to the automatic protection
switching and then only the lockout command has been served. The box color is white unless otherwise
specified:
Active: green
Lockout Ring command East ADM1: red
Request Node Ring East ADM1 West ADM2 : red (served)
Intermediate Node ADM3 ADM4 : red
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
424 / 448

Figure 323. Automatic working ring and Lockout Protection (reference pointOSRN)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The lockout protection has a higher priority with respect to the automatic ring protection. The box color
Active: green
Lockout Prot. command West ADM3: red
Prot. Unavailable West ADM3 East ADM2 : red (lockout protection is served)
Request Node Ring East ADM1 West ADM2 : yellow (automatic protection is pending)
Intermediate Node ADM4 : red
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
425 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
426 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

20 ISA PORT CONFIGURATION

20.1 Introduction
This Chapter describes the operations necessary for the ISA boards creation (ATM, PR_EA, PR,
ETHERNET, ES) in the Equipment view and the ISA TTPs creation; as a matter of fact ISA boards does
not crate TTPs when they are configurated.
The ISA board creation is performed (following the same rules of all the other SDH/PDH ports as
explained in paragraph 9.2 on page 122) when a CT user sets an ISA board and then configure the IP
Address (as described in paragraph 8.14 on page 110).
For the TTPs creation refer to paragraph 20.2 where all the operation are explained.
For the ISA traffic configuration (for example creation of Hard/Soft cross connection, PNNI configuration
etc.) refer to the relevant OPERATORS HANDBOOK (ATM, PR, PR_EA or ES) where Specific Terminal
application is explained in details.
The operational sequence to follow to manage ISA crossconnection is:
a)
ISA board declaration (Equipment Set)
b)
ISA IP Address Configuration ( Called ISA board IP Address) (not needed for ISAPR and
ETHERNET boards)
c)
ISA board TTPs creation (VC4XV , VC12XV, VC3XV, VC44c TTP, VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP,
s31 TTP, E1 TTP) (not needed for ISAPR board)
d)
TTPs crossconnection ( refer to paragraph 15.3 on page 270) (not for ISAPR board)
e)
ISA traffic configuration with Specific Terminal application
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
427 / 448
20.2 ISA board TTPs creation
20.2.1 ISAATM boards

On the ATM 4X4 board can be configurated up to 16 TPs (VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP, s31 TTP, E1
TTP) with a maximum throughput of 622 Mbit/s.
On the ATM 4X4 V2 board can be configurated up to 252 TPs (E1 TTP, E3 TTP, VC12 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC4
TTP, T3 TTP) with a maximum throughput of 622 Mbit/s.
On the ATM 8X8 board (present only on 1660SM) can be configurated up to 32 TPs (VC44c TTP, VC4
TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP, s31 TTP, E1 TTP) with a maximum throughput of 1.2 Gbit/s.
Select ISA Port Configuration option from the Configuration menu to open the ISA ports Configuration
(see Figure 324. on page 428).
ATM 4X4 MATRIX (initial empty fields)
ATM 4X4 MATRIX (with defined TPs)
Figure 324. ATM TPs creation

The ISA ports Configuration window is filled with notebook pages (initially blank), each page is an ATM,
Ethernet or PR_EA board with relevant ports;
The user can create a new port, delete an existing one and change port associations (that means
modify the STM1 number and STM1 Time Slot on ISA ports already created) via the three buttons
contained in the notebook page.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
When the user want to create a new ATM port he can select an empty row, then in the Selected Item
sections , he can fill the field Signal choosing among the available options and push theCreate button.
The STM1 Number and the STM1 Time Slot are automatically assigned.
If the user want to change the port attribute association he can select a filled row, then in the Selected
Item section he can change the fields STM1 number and STM1 Time Slot and than push the Time
Slot Sw. button.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
428 / 448

In the following paragraphs will be explained how to create, delete and modify ISA board TTPs.
To delete a port the user can select a row and push Delete button.

To close the dialog box click on the Close push button.

It is possible to see the ATM Ports created as above explained by selecting the relevant row in the ISA
configuration window and then click on the Navigate button; Figure 325. on page Figure 325. shows
an example.
LCA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 325. Navigate to ATM port view (example)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
429 / 448
20.2.2 ISA PR_EA board
PREA4ETH: up to 59 TPs (SDH VC4, SDH VC3, SDH VC12 ) with a maximum throughput of 622
Mbit/s.
PREA1GBE: up to 62 TPs (SDH VC4, SDH VC3, SDH VC12 ) with a maximum throughput of 622
Mbit/s.
PR_EA MATRIX (initial empty fields)
PR_EA MATRIX (with defined TPs)
Figure 326. PREA4ETH: example of TPs creation

When the user want to create a new PR_EA port he can select an empty row, then in the Selected Item
sections , he can fill the field Signal choosing among the available options and push theCreate button.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Slot Sw. button.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
430 / 448

On the PR_EA boards can be configurated the following TPs:

It is possible to see the PR_EA Ports created as above explained by selecting the relevant row in the ISA
configuration window and then click on the Navigate button; Figure 327. on page 431 shows an
example.
LCA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 327. MPLS port view exaple
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
431 / 448
On the FAST ETHERNET boards can be configurated up to 11 TPs (VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP,
VC12XV and VC3XV) on the port card (ETHMB) and up 14 TPs (VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP, VC12XV
and VC3XV) on the relevant access card (ETHATX).
ETHMB (initial empty fieds)
ETHMB (with defined TPs)
Figure 328. Example of Fast Ethernet (ETHMB) TPs creation

When the user want to create a new TPs he can select an empty row, then in the Selected Item sections,
he can fill the field Signal choosing among the available options and push theCreate button.
Note: in case of concatenated VC TP creation (example VC12XV or VC3XV), before to push on Create
button it is also necessary to choose the Concatenation Level value; after creation command new fields
and a new button appear.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Slot Sw. button.
The Ctrl Path Act. button allows to change the state of the concatenated virtual VCs (example VC12XV
or VC3XV) that could be Idle or active.;
Click on Ctrl Path Act. button a new window will be opened (Figure 329. ); for details about the mening
of the field refer to paragraph 11.7.8 on page 165.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
432 / 448

20.2.3 10/100 Mbit/s fast ETHERNET board

Figure 329. Control Path activation window (example)

It is possible to see the VCs created on the ETHERNET board as above explained by selecting the
relevant row in the ISA configuration window and then click on the Navigate button; Figure 330. on
page 433 shows an example.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
LCA
Figure 330. ETHERNET port view example
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
433 / 448
20.2.4 Gigabit/s ETHERNET board
[1]
10/100Mbit/s Ethernet board (ETHMB)+GBIT Access (GETHAG); this feature is supported only
on 1650SMC and 1660SM.
With this architecture can be configurated up to 2 TPs (VC4XV TTP Type concatenation level=1) on
the GETHAG access card and up to 11 TPs (VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP, s31 TTP, E1 TTP Type)
on the ETHMB main board taking into account that the maximum throughput must not exceed 622
Mbit/s.
[2]
GIGABIT board (GETHMB) standalone; this feature is supported on all OMSN (1640FOX,
1650SMC and 1660SM).
With this architecture can be configurated up to 4 TPs (VC4XV Type) on each board taking into
account that the maximum throughput must not exceed 622 Mbit/s in 1640FOX and 1650SMC (for
example it is possible to configure 1 port VC4XV with a max. concatenation level equal to 4 or as
alternative 4 ports VC4XV with concatenation level equal to 1).
The same rule above described are applicable to 1660SM when the GIGABIT board (GETHMB)
is equipped in normal slot (i.e. slot with a throughput of 622 Mbit/s).
In 1660SM are also available slot called enhanced (25, 26,28,29,34,35,37,38) where the
throughput per board is 1.2 Gbit/s.
If the GIGABIT board (GETHMB) is equipped in one of these slot it is possible to reach a max.
concatenation level equal to 7 per port ; of course this means that there is only one VC4XV with
concatenation level =1 available for another port and no resources for the last two ports present on
the board.
For more details read the Gigabit Ethernet description reported in the Technical Handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Gigabit Ethernet TPs creation follows the same rules described for the 10/100Mbit/s Ethernet Board;
refer to paragraph 20.2.3.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
434 / 448

Two architectures are possible to provide Gigabit Ethernet ports:
20.2.5 ISA ES boards

On the ETHERNET SWITCH boards can be configurated the following Tps:
On the ISA ES18FE up to 8 among VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP, VC12XV (XMAX= 21), VC3XV
(XMAX= 2)
On the ISA ES18FX up to 8 among VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP, VC12XV (XMAX= 21), VC3XV
(XMAX= 2)
According to the settings made in the Equipment Set procedure (SMII or GMII), the board ISA
ES48FE can be configured with the following TPs:
ISA ES48FE SMII mode: up to 16 TPs among VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP, VC12XV
(XMAX= 50), VC3XV (XMAX= 2), VC4XV (Xmax=1).
SA ES48FE GMII mode: up to 2 TPs among VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP, VC12XV (XMAX=
63), VC3XV (XMAX= 12), VC4XV (Xmax=4).
On the ISA ES16 (not available on 1640FOX) up to 16 among VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP,
VC12XV (XMAX= 63), VC3XV (XMAX= 12) , VC4XV (XMAX= 8)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 331. Example of Ethernet Switch (ES18FE) TPs creation (EMPTY FIELDS)
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
435 / 448

Figure 332. Example of Ethernet Switch (ES18FE) TPs creation (WITH DEFEINED TPS)
The ISA ports Configuration window is filled with notebook pages (initially blank), each page is an ES, ATM
or PR_EA board with relevant ports;
modify the STM1 number and STM1 Time Slot on ISA ports already created) via the buttons contained
in the notebook page.
When the user want to create a new TPs he can select an empty row, then in the Selected Item sections,
he can fill the field Signal choosing among the available options and push theCreate button.
Note: in case of concatenated VC TP creation (example VC12XV or VC3XV), before to push on Create
button it is also necessary to choose the Concatenation Level value; after creation command new fields
and a new button appear.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Slot Sw. button.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
436 / 448

The LCAS Cfg.. button allows to Enable / Disable the LCAS scheme protocol selecting the relevant button
(refer to paragraph 11.7.9 on page 167).
The Ctrl Path Act. button allows to change the state of the concatenated virtual VCs (example VC12XV
or VC3XV) that could be Idle or active.;
Click on Ctrl Path Act. button a new window will be opened (Figure 329. ); for details about the mening
of the field refer to paragraph 11.7.8 on page 165.
Figure 333. Control Path activation window (example)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
It is possible to see the VCs created on the ETHERNET SWITCH board as above explained by selecting
the relevant row in the ISA configuration window and then click on the Navigate button; Figure 330.
on page 433 shows an example.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
437 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 334. ETHERNET SWITCH port view example
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
438 / 448

LCA

21 SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT
21.1 Generalities and descriptions
The Craft Terminal provides a set of functions which allow software packages manipulation within NEs.
The downloading operation consists in the establishment of session between the NE and a software
server for the purpose of file transfer.
Actions can then be performed on the NE software version as update and activation operation, or roll back
to the previous software version operation. In this way the NE can follow the product evolution with in
service equipment.
The same function is used during maintenance phase, to update spare boards for substitution after
troubleshooting.
The operations that can be undertaken in this section are:
display Software Download Information,

initiate / Abort Software Package Download,
manage Software Packages within NEs, activating the downloaded Software Package or coming
back to the previous condition.
A backup/restore can be also done on the MIB of the NE. Indeed the MIB can be saved to or restored
from the mass storage of the Craft Terminal.
The software download general principle is represented in the following figure.
Software Management
OPERATOR
MANAGER
Download
Control
Event
Report
AGENT
NE
Software Downloading
OPERATOR
Transfer
Request
SERVER
CLIENT
Binary & Data

Files
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 335. Software Download general principle
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
439 / 448
21.1.1 Naming Conventions
Software Package: Software Package stands for a piece of software which can be executed by an
NE of a particular type. It consists in one or more Software Units and a Descriptor File. A software
package is identified by its name, release, version and edition.
On the NE (i.e. once downloaded) a software package can be:
the active version: the software package currently running on the NE
a standby version: a software package which is neither the active version nor the boot
version
Software Unit: A Software Unit is a part of a software package which can be either executable code
or a data segment of a particular board within an NE. A software unit is also identified by its name,
release, version and edition.
Descriptor File: A Descriptor File contains information about the software package it belongs to and
lists the composing software units. Each software package must have a descriptor file otherwise it
would not be possible to interpret the content of the package.
Software Management Function: The Software management function offers information about all
current software packages present in an NE. Indicators enable software management (running
package, activated package, etc...).
The following software version states are available:
Commit (active) version: the software version currently running on the NE.
Standby version: is a software version which has been downloaded on the NE but which is
not in the active state.
Two main functions are involved in the software downloading:
Software Download Manager function
Software Download Server function

The Software Download Manager function takes the downloading and management requests of the
operator and sends them to the NE. Thus, this function enables a download process to be initiated and
monitored by the operator. It manages the NE software releases and initiates software download
operations.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Software Download Server is only responsible for fulfilling the requests received from NEs and
performing software package file transfer operations to the NE.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
440 / 448

The naming conventions used for Download Management are the following:
21.2 Software download operative sequence

Two main different operative condition are defined for this Equipment:
First installation of an OMSN

The NE is received without the relevant software install. The software download must be done
as described in the SIBDL section of this Handbook.
Updating an OMSN with an already installed software.

Follow the operative indications of para. 21.2.1 on page 441 .
21.2.1 Software Download upgrade

N.B.
In order to migrate from Release 1.1A to a Higher Release, the download procedure requires
two steps. The first is from 1.1A to 1.1X (intermediate package) and the second is from 1.1X
to the Higher Release (e.g. 1.1B1).
In order to update the following procedure is to be done as explained in the next steps:
a)
Install on the PC the NE Software Package present in the CDROM (refer to 1320CT Basic
Operators Handbook for details).
b)
open a session on Craft Terminal application (startup of the application, start supervision and NE
login)
c)
Check the present status of the software on a selected NE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Download should not be performed in presence of unstable alarms

d)
Open the Download menu as for para. 21.3 on page 442.
e)
Select the new software package in the server and triggers the download process, as presented at
para.21.4 on page 443.
A message will indicate the completed download.
f)
Activate the package as presented at para.21.5 on page 445.
g)
Check that the activated package is in the Commit status.
h)
If problems are found with the new activated package, activate the previous software package
(revertback operation) to come back to the previous condition and then try to repeat the procedure.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
441 / 448
21.3 Software Download Manager menu

All the software download operations are carried out from the software download manager.
Figure 336. Equipment view (example)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To display the software download manager menu from the main view, select the NE on which you want to
perform download operations, then select the Download pull down menu. The following menu is displayed:
Figure 337. Download menu
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
442 / 448

21.4 Init download

You can request the NE to start / abort a software download operation. After selecting the desired NE you
must choose an available software package and then start the download process. All these operations
can be performed from the SW downloading dialogue box.
Select the Init download option from the Download cascading menu.
The Software download initiate dialogue box is opened.
Figure 338. SW Downloading dialogue box example

The following fields are available to search a specific package:
Server filter: to enter the server name selected,

Package filter: to enter the package name selected.
To use the filter and display the selection, push on Apply filter(s) button. The SW packages existing on
the Craft Terminal are displayed.
In the next field the list of the packages is displayed:
Server: name of the server,

Package: name of the package,
Version: version number of package.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Click on Forced push button to set the forced download attribute: then all software units of the Descriptor
file have to be downloaded. Otherwise only the units with different software version will be loaded.
If you want stop the download, click on the Cancel push button of the Software download initiate dialogue
box to close it.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
443 / 448
Figure 339. Software download in progress (example)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Software download in Progress dialogue box displays the name and type of the NE and the SW
package name, the total of bytes, the current percentage and the current file which is being downloaded.
Click on the Abort push button to abort the complete download transaction. From the confirmation
dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the abort.
Click on the Close push button to close the SWDL Work in Progress dialogue box at the end of the software
download.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
444 / 448

Click on the OK push button to start the download. From the confirmation dialogue box that opens, you
can confirm or cancel the download. If you confirm the operation, the SW Downloading dialogue box then
disappears and the Software download in Progress dialogue box is displayed (see Figure 339. ) from
which you can if necessary abort the software download.
You can monitor the download progress by means of the Software in Progress dialogue box which also
enables you to possibly abort the current download.

21.5 SW package Activation and Units information

This item permits to activate the downloaded software package and to get information about the software
of the various units of the equipment.
The operator is able to get information about the software package of the NE at any moment, even if no
download operations have been performed previously.
For this, select the Units info option from the Download pull down menu.
Figure 340. Software Package Information dialogue box (example)

The SW Information dialogue box displays the name and type of the NE, and the respective package name
and status of the committed and (if existing) the uncommitted software.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
You can select one software package by clicking on the name.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
445 / 448
Software package: name, release, version, edition of the package,

Service Specific Components: name, release, version, edition of the Service Specific Components
(example ATM, IP etc.)
Operational state: enabled or disabled,
Activation date: date and hour of the last activation
Vendor: the supplier of the product,
Current state\Action: commit or standby and with the option button; none/Force/Activate/Delete
current state = standby means the package is not active on the NE
current state = commit means the package is active on the NE
action = (none) means no action to do
action = activate serves to activate the selected SW package
action = force
Select the Activate option of the CurrentState\Action field, to activate the Software package
The Sw units Det. button allows to give more information about a selected software package.
Clicking on it, the following window is displayed:
Figure 341. Detail software package (example)

Clicking on [] symbol behind each software package all details disappear.
When you click on Close the previous view is displayed (Figure 340. ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In Figure 340. when you click on the:
ED
OK push button you close dialogue box,

Cancel push button you close the SW Information dialogue box,
Help push button you access to help on context.
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
446 / 448

The following fields are displayed:

21.6 Mib management

This function allows to make a backup and/or a restore of the Mib.. (MIB is a data base pertaining the
configuration of the equipment).
Select the Mib management option from the Download pull down menu. The following window is displayed:
Figure 342. NE MIB management (example)

The following fields are displayed:
Available backups on local server: gives the list of the backups available on the Craft Terminal,
Backup name: to enter the new backup name.
Three push buttons allow to choose the action with click on:
Backup: performs the backup on the CT of the Mib present on the NE,
Restore: this function allows the managing system to restore the NE configuration database of the
managed system. Only one restore operation can be performed at the same time on a given NE.
Delete: this action allows to delete a backup of the NE database. The NE is not involved in this action.
The only effect is to delete the selected backup version stored in a specific directory of the FT server.
To activate an already restored MIB you click on Activate push button. Only at this point it becomes
operative on the NE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To exit of the NE MIB management window, you click on Close push button.
To save or load the Mib to/from an external disk follow the indication of the Basic 1320CT Operators
Handbook using the menu options of the Network Element Synthesis.
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
447 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

END OF DOCUMENT
ED
02
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 91670 AA AA
448
448 / 448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.1 Document scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.2 Target audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
2 MAINTENANCE INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 Maintenance of the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Problems with Craft Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 Purpose of the procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.2 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
8
8
8
8
3 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (TROUBLESHOOTING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1 Purpose of the procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Troubleshooting organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 On site Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 Troubleshooting by means of the Craft Terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1 Preliminary Concepts and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2 Alarms/states view Organization (subrack view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3 Alarm synthesis indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.4 Alarm Surveillance (AS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.5 Port View alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.6 Board view alarms and states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.7 Subrack and Rack view alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.8 AC/DC Rectifier alarms view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.9 Equipment View alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.10 External Points alarms (HouseKeepings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
9
9
13
17
18
19
20
22
30
37
40
43
44
47
4 UNIT REPLACEMENT WITH A SPARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1 EQUICO or PQ2/EQC unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 COMPACT ADM unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 ATM MATRIX 4X4, 4x4 V2, 4X4 D3 units replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
50
52
56
02
050414
01
041119
ED
DATE
ECR 23082
CHANGE NOTE
C. FAVERO ITAVE
J.MIR S.MAGGIO
C. FAVERO ITAVE
J.MIR S.MAGGIO
P.GHELFI ITAVE
APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
ORIGINATOR
P.GHELFI ITAVE
METRO OMSN
Rel. 4.4/5.2A
OPERATORS HANDBOOK
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
1 / 76
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
58
58
5 UPGRADING WITH NEW HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.1 MATRIX substitution with MATRIXN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 SYNTH1 substitution with SYNTH1N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1 Procedure for 1650SMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2 Procedure for 1640FOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 P4S1, S41, L41, L42, S161, L161, L162 substitution with P4S1N, S41N, L41N,
L42N , S161N, L161N, L162N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 P21E1 substitution with P21E1N (only for 1640FOX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
60
61
61
65
6 FLASH CARD SUBSTITUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.1 Flash card substitution procedure for 1660SM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 Flash card substitution procedure for 1650SMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 Flash card substitution procedure for 1640FOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
69
69
71
74
ED
02
67
67
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
2 / 76

4.4 ATM MATRIX 8X8 unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5 CONGI unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10


FIGURES
Figure 1. General Flowchart for on site troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2. FlowChart for 1660SM/1650SMC Power Supply alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3. FlowChart for 1640FOX Power Supply alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4. Transmission network level structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5. Alarms/status view Organization (subrack view example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6. Alarm pull down menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 7. Alarm Surveillance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 8. Example of SDH Port View alarms (without MSP schema) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 9. Example of SDH Port View alarms (with MSP schema) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 10. Example of ATM Port View alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 11. Example of 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet Port View alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 12. Gigabit/s Ethernet Port View alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 13. Example of board view alarms and status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 14. Example of daughter View alarms and status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 15. Example of PDH Board View alarms and status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 16. 1660SM Subrack view alarms and status example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 17. 1660SM Rack view alarm and status example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 18. 1660SM Fans subrack alarms view example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 19. AC/DC Rectifier View alarms and status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 20. Example of Equipment View alarms and status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 21. Example of 1650SMC Equipment View alarms and status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 22. Example of 1640FOX equipment View alarms and status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 23. Example of External Points alarms and status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 24. EQUICO or PQ2/EQC unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 25. COMPACT ADM unit replacement (EPS protected) part A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 26. COMPACT ADM unit replacement (EPS protected) part B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 27. COMPACT ADM unit replacement (EPS not protected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 28. ATM MATRIX 4X4 and 4x4 V2 units replacement without EPS protection . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 29. ATM MATRIX 4X4 unit replacement with EPS protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 30. 1650SMC: Upgrading with a new SYNTH1N EPS not protected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 31. 1650SMC: Upgrading with a new SYNTH1N EPS protected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 32. 1640FOX: Upgrading with a new SYNTH1N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 33. FLASH CARD substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 34. FLASH CARD substitution (COMPACT ADM EPS protected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 35. FLASH CARD substitution (COMPACT ADM EPS not protected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 36. FLASH CARD substitution (on COMPACT ADM unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
15
16
18
19
22
22
31
32
33
34
35
38
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
51
53
54
55
56
57
62
64
66
70
72
73
75
TABLES
Table 1. Alarms colors and Severity association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2. Alarm Synthesis indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3. Domain Alarm Synthesis indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4. Management States Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5. Alarm Surveillance information general description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6. General aspect of alarms meaning and relevant maintenance actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 7. Boards alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 8. Module alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
20
21
21
23
24
25
29
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
3 / 76
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
4 / 76

1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope
The Maintenance Manual mainly describes the NE troubleshooting with Craft Terminal.
The Maintenance Manual is intended for all users.
The documents of this Handbook that should be read before starting this document are:
Introduction manual
NE Management manual
1.2 Terminology
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
5 / 76
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
6 / 76
2 MAINTENANCE INTRODUCTION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The maintenance procedures consist of the following steps:
Maintenance of the PC.

See Chapter 2.1 on page 8
Problems with Craft terminal (shutdown and restart of the PC).

See Chapter 2.2 on page 8.
Corrective Maintenance (Troubleshooting).

Unit replacement with a spare.

Upgrading with new Hardware.

See Chapter 5 on page 59 .
Flash Card substitution.

See Chapter 6 on page 69 .
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
7 / 76
2.1 Maintenance of the PC
2.2 Problems with Craft Terminal

2.2.1 Purpose of the procedure
This procedure describes the Shutdown and restart the PC should the Craft Terminal SoftWare Product
not be working properly or not responding to the operators commands.
2.2.2 Procedure
In order to shut down the PC execute the command :
Start > Shut down
A window (Windows NT Security user dialog) is displayed. It permits to shut down the computer or restart
it.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The same window is displayed pressing he keys <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <Del> simultaneously.
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
8 / 76

With regard to maintenance PC, refer to the constructors documentation.

3 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (TROUBLESHOOTING)

3.1 Purpose of the procedure
Troubleshooting involves the detection, location and correction of failures in the equipment and the
replacement of the defective parts.
3.2 Troubleshooting organization

The troubleshooting procedure is carried out with the help of some flowcharts and tables, reported
hereinafter. Anyway this method does not deal with the following aspects (which are to be deduced in other
ways):
faulty electronic alarm indication, processing and detection circuits

faulty wiring (backpanel, connectors, etc.)
The following interfaces are present to troubleshoot the equipment :
Q3 interface for Telecommunication Management Network
QECC interface for Telecommunication Management Network (via DCC channels, linked to
the relevant OS)
F interface for Craft Terminal (Local or Remote)
Remote Alarm for Supervisory Center
LEDs on the units of the NE
Usually maintenance is firstly done via software (TMN or Remote Craft Terminal) to locate the faulty
equipment and the faulty unit or the faulty path and then on site to physically solve the trouble.
The Maintenance can be done :
[1]
from a TMN network management center
[2]
from a Remote Craft Terminal (RCT) management center
[3]
from a station supervisory center
[4]
on site
[1] TMN network management center: by means of the TMN the maintenance technician can see the
alarms sent by each equipment of the managed network (see the relevant TMN handbooks).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
[2] Remote craft terminal: the operator, connected to a local NE , can remotely manage and
troubleshooting a network composed of max 32 NEs included itself. This handbook is used.
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
9 / 76
1660SM and 1650SMC
T URGENT (MAJOR and CRITICAL), T NOT URGENT (MINOR): remote alarms pertaining to
the urgent, not urgent alarm type.
TOR, TAND: remote alarms respectively due to the decrease or loss of one or both station
power supply DC voltages.
INT: Remote alarm pertaining to the local (internal) alarm type
When a second CONGI unit is used the following remote alarms are added:
TORC, TANC: remote alarms respectively due to the loss of +3,3V generated by the on board
converter in of one or both the CONGI units.
IND: Indeterminate alarm synthesis. Indicates synthesis of alarms not associated to others
severities. Not operative.
TUP: remote alarm due to microprocessor fault in the EQUICO unit (for 1660SM), PQ2/EQC
unit (for 1660SM Rel. 5.1) or SYNTH1N/SYNTH4 unit (for 1640FOX,1650SMC)
LOSQ2: remote alarm due to loss of communication with Mediation Device. Not operative.
1640FOX
T URGENT (MAJOR and CRITICAL), T NOT URGENT (MINOR): remote alarms pertaining to
the urgent, not urgent alarm type.
INT (MAJOR or CRITICAL): Remote alarm pertaining to the local (internal) alarm type
INTALM (WARNING): Remote alarm due to alarm detection from the external Converter
SR40R.
TAND (MAJOR or CRITICAL): remote alarm due to the loss of power supply (batteryfail or
3.3VService fail).
FANSOFF1 (WARNING): remote alarm due to failure of FOX fans.
FANSOFF2 (WARNING): remote alarm due to failure of external Converter (SR40R) fans.
Depending on the supervisory center organization, it is possible to locate the equipment in troubles and
to detect the failure type and source.
[4] On site : the operator is on site in case :

1)
the equipment is not managed by a TMN or by a Remote Craft terminal (RCT)
2)
the equipment is not reachable by the remote manager (TMN or RCT) and is therefore isolated
3)
link problems are present
4)
the trouble has been located and a substitution is necessary
In case 1 ) , 2 ), 3 ), the alarmed equipment is checked by means of the local Craft Terminal and of rack
LED indications and station buzzers.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The NE is provided with LEDs which indicate:
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
10 / 76

[3] Station supervisory center: the maintenance technician refers to the Remote Alarms received from
the equipment in a centralized office of the station i.e. :

Units Alarms:
Each port card or access card of the equipment is provided with a bicolor LED (green/red) or multicolor
LED (green/red/yellow) at the bottom of the front coverplate.
Bicolor LED indicates:
when red, internal failure (indicates that the unit concerned must be replaced)
when green, in service unit

Multicolor LED indicates:
when red, internal failure (indicates that the unit concerned must be replaced)
when green, in service unit
when yellow, means that the unit is part of an EPS schema and its status is standby (only available
on 1650SMC and 1660SM)
AC/DC Rectifier Alarms: (only for 1640FOX)

The AC/DC is provided with four LEDs on the front coverplate, which indicate (from top to bottom):
Red LED: detection of an INTERNAL alarm (rectifier failure or rectifier fans failure)
Yellow LED: battery charging
Red LED: AC mains off (missing of AC power)
Green LED: rectifier is operating
ATM unit Alarms:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
All the alarm detected on the unit are related to the ATM traffic management; on the front coverplate are
present optical indication (LEDs) with the following meaning (from the top to the bottom):
ED
Red LED : detection of an MAJOR or CRITICAL (URGENT) alarm
Red LED : detection of a MINOR (NOT URGENT) alarm
Yellow LED : alarm condition ATTENDED
Yellow LED : detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition.
Yellow LED : detection of an WARNING (INDICATIVE) alarm
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
11 / 76
All the alarms detected on the units are collected by the Controller unit (called EQUICO in 1660SM,
SYNHT1N or SYNTH4 in 1640FOX/1650SMC) unit which will deliver centralized optical indications (by
means of LEDs on its front coverplate). Specifically, from the top to the bottom :
Red LED: detection of an URGENT (MAJOR and CRITICAL) alarm
Red LED: detection of a NOT URGENT (MINOR) alarm
Yellow LED: alarm condition ATTENDED
Yellow LED: detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition. Type: active loopbacks, forcing
the unit into service, laser forced ON or OFF, try to restore after ALS
Yellow LED: detection of an INDICATION (WARNING) alarm
The analysis of these LEDs permits to detect the alarm type (Urgent Not Urgent Indication) and
relevant condition (Abnormal condition, Attended).
In case of URGENT or NOT URGENT alarm, after having located the alarmed equipment, the alarm
condition can be attended by pressing the relevant alarm storing push button on the EQUICO, PQ2/EQC,
SYNTH1N, SYNTH4 unit.
This condition causes:
On the rack
the YELLOW LED to light up

the RED LED to go off
On the front coverplate:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
yellow LED (ATTENDED) to light up

red LEDs NOT URGENT (MINOR) and URGENT (MAJOR and CRITICAL) to turn off (free to
accept other alarms)
If both LEDs are on, the Attend command should be given twice : one for attending the NOT
URGENT (MINOR) alarm and one for attending the URGENT (MAJOR) alarm.
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
12 / 76

Centralized Equipment Alarms:
3.3 On site Troubleshooting

The troubleshooting operation proceeds according to the information indicated in the flowcharts:
Figure 1. on page 14: General flowchart
Figure 2. on page 15: FlowChart for 1660SM/1650SMC Power Supply alarm
Figure 3. on page 16: FlowChart for 1640FOX Power Supply alarm
and according to para.3.4 on page 17.

As indicated in the flowcharts the troubleshooting operation is done by means of the Craft Terminal, and
of the optical indicators (LEDs) present on the NE.
The Craft Terminal is cordconnected to the relative connector on the Controller unit
(EQUICO,PQ2/EQC,SYNTH1N,SYNTH4) front coverplate (F interface).
The Craft Terminal applications provide detailed information on the alarm state thus facilitating fault
location and subsequent removal as indicated in para. 3.4 on page 17.
To correctly execute the troubleshooting operations the technician must know the exact
equipment configuration (see Equipment Configuration applications on the Craft Terminal).
The aim of the flowcharts which follow and of the maintenance tables is to locate the faulty unit and to
replace it with a spare as well as to locate a failure along the link.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The flowcharts/tables should be also consulted when the unit LEDs flash, because the flashing condition
might be due to external alarm causes usually related to line problems.
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
13 / 76
AN ALARM
IS PRESENT
IN CASE OF URGENT OR NOT URGENT ALARM

ATTEND IT WITH THE BUTTON
ON THE CONTROLLER UNIT(*)
IS THE
NO
CONTROLLER (*)
BICOLOR LED RED?
IS THE
CONTROLLER(*) UNIT
NO
RED LED URGENT (MAJOR)

ON ?
YES
YES
THROUGH PUSHBUTTON
IS
NO
RESET THE UNIT
DOES
THE ALARM
CONDITION
PERSIST ?
ONE OF THE BICOLOR

LEDS INDICATING UNIT
FAILURE RED?
YES
NO
TRANSITORY
FAILURE
REPLACE THE UNIT IN ALARM.

BY CONNECTING THE PC AND
ACCORDING THE TYPE OF FAILURE
AND THE TRAFFIC DAMAGE
THE FAULTY UNIT CAN BE
REPLACED (OR NOT) IN CASE
OF LOW TRAFFIC .
YES
THE UNIT IS FAULTY. REPLACE IT ACCORDING

TO THE DESCRIBED PROCEDURE
(see chapter 4 on page 49)
CONNECT THE PC TO THE

EQUIPMENT AND, ACCORDING TO
THE TYPE OF DETECTED ALARM,
PROCEED AS STATED IN
PARA 3.4 ON PA GE 17
YES
END
YES
END
IS THE
NO
CONTROLLER (*) UNIT

NOT URGENT (MINOR) YELLOW
LED ON ?
IN CONTROLLER (*) UNIT

THE INDICATION (WARNING)
YELLOW ALARM IS ON.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
MUST BE PERFORMED
ON THE EQUIPMENT CONNECTED
TO THE LOCAL ONE. CONNECT
THE PC AND ACCORDING TO
THE TYPE OF ALARM PROCEED
AS INDICATED IN
PARA 3.4 ON PAGE 17
YES
CONNECT THE PC TO THE EQUIPMENT,

AFTER HAVING DETECTED THE TYPE
OF FAILURE, ESTABLISH IF
INTERVENTION MUST BE IMMEDIATE OR
NOT AS STATED IN THE RELATIVE
PARA 3.4 ON PA GE 17
END
NOTE:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(*) CONTROLLER UNIT IS:
SYNTH1N or SYNTH4 for 1640FOX,1650SMC

_
EQUICO PQ2/EQC for 1660SM
Figure 1. General Flowchart for on site troubleshooting
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
14 / 76

START
WARNING!
Before removing CONGI unit from subrack, switchoff the relevant Station Battery Fuse Breaker
present at the top of the Rack or in the Station Distribution Frame; subsequently remove the
station battery cable if necessary and then extract the CONGI unit.
ALL LEDS OFF
START
IS
REMOTE ALARM
TAND PRESENT ?
(N.B.)
NO
OVERLOAD LIKELY TO HAVE

BEEN CAUSED BY ONE OF THE
ASSEMBLY UNITS.
SUBSTITUTE THE FUSE
ON THE CONGI UNIT
YES
STATION POWER
SUPPLY FAILURE
YES
ARE LEDS ACTIVE?
TRANSITORY
OVERLOAD
YES
END
NO
REMOVE ALL THE UNITS
FROM THE SUBRACK
AND SUBSTITUTE THE FUSE
IF NECESSARY.
INSERT THEM BACK ONE
AT A TIME TILL THE ONE
CAUSING THE FAILURE IS DETECTED.
HENCE REPLACE IT.
SUBSTITUTE THE FUSE
IF NECESSARY.
END
N.B.
IF THE REMOTE ALARMS ARE NOT UTILIZED CHECK FOR PRESENCE OF STATION POWER SUPPLY.
SHOULD IT HAVE FAILED THEN ALL THE UNITS LEDS WILL BE OFF (FOLLOW OUTPUT YES OF THE
FLOWCHART).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
IF POWER SUPPLY IS PRESENT PROCEDE WITH OUTPUT NO.
Figure 2. FlowChart for 1660SM/1650SMC Power Supply alarm
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
15 / 76

ALL LEDS ARE OFF
START
IS
REMOTE ALARM
TAND PRESENT ?
(N.B.)
NO
OVERLOAD LIKELY TO HAVE

BEEN CAUSED BY ONE OF THE
ASSEMBLY UNITS.
YES
STATION POWER
SUPPLY FAILURE.
OR AC/DC RECTIFIER
FAILURE
END
REMOVE ALL THE UNITS

FROM THE SUBRACK,
INSERT THEM BACK ONE
AT A TIME TILL THE ONE
CAUSING THE FAILURE IS DETECTED,
HENCE REPLACE IT.
SUBSTITUTE THE SHELF,
IF THE ALARM PERSISTS.
END
N.B.
IF THE REMOTE ALARMS ARE NOT UTILIZED, CHECK FOR PROBLEMS ON STATION POWER SUPPLY (OR ON
AC/DC RECTIFIER)
SHOULD IT HAVE FAILED, THEN ALL THE UNITS LEDS WILL BE OFF (FOLLOW OUTPUT YES OF THE
FLOWCHART).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
IF POWER SUPPLY IS PRESENT PROCEDE WITH OUTPUT NO.
Figure 3. FlowChart for 1640FOX Power Supply alarm
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
16 / 76

3.4 Troubleshooting by means of the Craft Terminal.

The troubleshoot proceeds checking the detailed information on the NE alarm by means of the craft
terminal.
The information on the NE alarm will be mainly obtained by means of the craft terminal through the Alarm
Surveillance data and the alarms/status indications presented in the various views, depending on the
level of the structure under observation.
Navigation across the various level views is done from higher to lower levels, by double clicking on the
objects (see instructions on NE management section).
The NE hierarchy is organized in the following order: NE > rack > subrack > board > port > TP.
The troubleshoot procedure with the the Craft Terminal consists of the following steps:
a)
An example of alarms/status view organization is shown in Figure 5. pg. 19. Observe the active
alarms on the Severity Alarm Synthesis, Domain Alarm Synthesis and Management States
Control Panel always present on the window (it resumes all the NE alarms).
Table 2. on page 20 describes the meaning of these alarms/statuses and the relevant maintenance
actions.
b)
in case of alarm presence, access the Alarm Surveillance to troubleshoot. This application gives
the details of the detected alarms and helps for their localization.
Para 3.4.4 on page 22 describes this view.
c)
It is possible to analyze the detailed alarm presence on the TPs of each ports of the NE, following
the indication of para 3.4.5 on page 30.
d)
It is also possible to check alarm and status at Board view, Subrack view and Equipment view
are also supplied following the indication of para 3.4.6 on page 37 and para 3.4.9 on page 44.
e)
Eventual housekeeping alarms can be localized following the indications given in para. 3.4.10 on
page 47.
f)
These above said paragraphs describe general aspect of alarms meaning and relevant maintenance
actions that can be done with the information given in the applications.
g)
The history of past events can be obtained by means of the Event log option of the Diagnosis pull
down menu (see NE management section).
In case of unit replacement, follow the indications reported in Chapter. 4 on page 49.
Troubleshooting with Automatic Laser Shutdown
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) is used to protect the operator who is working with the optical fiber.
When the ALS is active, it may be difficult to detect the link failed.
To locate it, it is necessary to force on the ALS, thus enabling the optical power transmission on the
opposite direction of the failed link.
WARNING: During this phase the operator has to pay attention when working with fibers and connectors.
The ABNORMAL indication inform the operator of the ALS forced condition.
After having completed the maintenance, enable the ALS.
The ALS states are indicated in the port view, as described in para. 3.4.5 on pg. 30.
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
17 / 76
The following concepts and definitions are considered useful to facilitate maintenance operations with the
aid of the previously indicated tables.
The various units specified in the synchronous multiplexing hierarchy imply structuring the Transmission
network into three levels (sublevels of the physical OSI level):
Transmission bearer level. It is the support for the path level and can be further split into physical
level (Transmission media) and Transmission section level. The sections can be either regenerator
or multiplexer and utilized for specific functions associated to the EOW channels of the SDH frame.
The interface alarms (or section alarms, indicated in the tables) belong to this level (example: Line
LOS, LOS, B2etc.).
Path level It concerns the data transfer between the access points and the path. It does not depend
on the service nor on the type of Transmission media. It constitutes the circuit level support. The path
can be either lower order (LO) or higher order (HO) depending on the capacity of data transferring.
Like the regenerator and multiplexer sections, the paths too have specific functions associated to the
EOW channels of the SDH frame. The alarms listed in the cited tables, where path level
troubleshooting is required, belong to this level (example:TUAIS, TU LOP).
Circuit level. This level concerns the transfer of information between the access points and the
circuit proper. It is a direct support for the telecommunication services. It superimposes the SDH
function and is considered as the transport agent hence no SDH orderwire channel associated
functions are required. An example of this level alarm is Tributary LOS.
The above level structuring in the Transmission network is depicted in Figure 4.
G.703
STMN
G.703
SDH
MUX
STMN
TRIBUTARIES
SDH MUX
STMN
SDH MUX
TRIBUTARIES
REGENERATOR
RSOH
REGENERATOR
SECTION
RSOH
REGENERATOR
SECTION
MSOH
MULTIPLEXER
SECTION
MSOH
MULTIPLEXER
SECTION
MSOH
MULTIPLEXER
SECTION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
POH PATH
Figure 4. Transmission network level structure
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
18 / 76

3.4.1 Preliminary Concepts and Definitions
3.4.2 Alarms/states view Organization (subrack view)

Severity alarms
synthesis
Menu bar
View title
LCA
Boards
Alarms
View area
Message/status area
Administrative
state indications
Management
status control panel
Figure 5. Alarms/status view Organization (subrack view example)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
the critical (CRI) or major (MAJ) alarms indicate severe alarms that could have impact on the
current traffic (interruption or degrade). Thus requiring a rapid intervention to restore the
regular working condition of the equipment.
A message under the mouse facility provides the alarm or status complete denomination. A message
appears in the message area in the bottom left corner of the view.
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
19 / 76
3.4.3 Alarm synthesis indication
The alarms CRI, MAJ, MIN, WNG, IND are part of the Severity Alarms Synthesis area, presented in
Table 2. on page 20.
The alarms EXTP, EQP, TRNS are part of the Domain Alarms Synthesis area, presented inTable 3. on
page 21.
The alarms SUP, ALI, LAC, COM, OS, MGR, NTP and AC are part of the Management States Control
Panel, presented in Table 4. on page 21.
All these indications (except for SUP, ALI, LAC, COM, OS, MGR and NTP) are the summaries of particular
types of alarms detected by the equipment, hence the specific cause of alarm is to be found as indicated
in the following paragraphs: 3.4.4, 3.4.5, 3.4.6, 3.4.7, 3.4.10.
Table 1. reports the association between the colors of the Alarms and their Severity.
For the Domain Alarms Synthesis the color corresponds to the highest severity among the set of the
active alarms for the relevant domain, according to the same rules of previous Table 1.
Table 1. Alarms colors and Severity association
Alarm Color
RED
Severity
CRITICAL
ORANGE
MAJOR
YELLOW
MINOR
CYAN
WARNING
WHITE
INDETERMINATE
GREEN
NO ALARM
Table 2. Alarm Synthesis indication

Mnemonic
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Maintenance
CRI
Critical alarm
Synthesis of alarms that needs immediate troubleshooting (typical: NE isolation). NB1.

See detailed indication in the following para.
MAJ
Major (Urgent) alarm
Synthesis of alarms that needs immediate troubleshooting. NB1. See detailed indication in the following para.
MIN
Minor (Not urgent) alarm
Synthesis of alarms for which a delayed troubleshooting can be defined. NB1.

Warning alarm
Synthesis of alarms due to failure of other NE in the

network. NB1.
Indeterminate alarm
Synthesis of alarms not associated to the previous

severities. Not operative.
WNG
IND
ED
Alarm/Status Description
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
20 / 76

Alarms and Statuses synthesis are given in all the screens.
Table 3. Domain Alarm Synthesis indication

Mnemonic
EXTP
External Point
(Housekeeping alarm)
SYNC
Synchronization alarm
EQP
TRNS
Equipment alarm
Transmission alarm
Maintenance
Check the relevant station alarm associated to the
input housekeeping indication. See detailed indication
in the following para.
Synthesis of alarms of the Synchronization domain.
See unit detailed indication in the following para.
Synthesis of alarms of the Equipment domain.
Synthesis of alarms of the Transmission domain.
Table 4. Management States Control Panel.

Mnemonic
Supervision state
ALI
Alignment state
(not operative on Craft
Terminal)
LCA
Local Control Access
COM
NE unreachable/unreachable
Operational System Isolation
MGR
Manager level
NTP
Network Time Protocol
AC
ED
Description
SUP
OS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Alarm/Status Description
02
Abnormal Condition
Maintenance
GREEN: NE is under supervision.
BROWN: NE is not under supervision.
Used in the OS.
GREEN: configuration is aligned (is equal between
EML manager and NE MIB).
ORANGE: configuration is not aligned (is not equal
between EML manager and NE MIB).
GREEN: Indicates that the Craft Terminal has the OS
permission to manage the NE (Granted).
CYAN: Indicates that the Craft Terminal has not the
OS permission to manage the NE (Denied).
BLUE: Indicates that the Craft Terminal has requested OS permission to manage the NE (Requested).
GREEN: Identifies the Enable operational state of
the connection between NE and Craft Terminal (SDH
service link up)
RED: Identifies the Disable operational state of the
connection between NE and Craft Terminal (SDH
service link down)
GREEN: Indicates that the N.E. is not managed by the
1353SH
CYAN: Indicates that the N.E. is managed by the
1353SH.
GREEN: Indicates that the N.E. is not managed by
the 1354RM
CYAN: Indicates that the N.E. is not managed by the
1354RM
GREEN: NTP protocol enabled and both NTP servers
(main and spare) are unreachable.
BROWN: NTP protocol disabled.
CYAN: NTP protocol enabled and at least one NTP
servers (main or spare) are reachable.
GREEN: normal operating condition.
CYAN: detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition. Type: active loopbacks, forcing the unit into service, laser forced ON or OFF, try to restore after ALS
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
21 / 76
Alarm Severity Assignment Profile can modify the assignment of each alarm root to the various
synthesis.
3.4.4 Alarm Surveillance (AS)
In case of alarm presence, access the Alarm Surveillance (AS) to troubleshoot. For this purpose
select the Diagnosis pull down menu. With the Alarm pull down menu (see Figure 6. ). It is possible
to show all the NE Alarms or filter the alarms report, for example displaying only the alarms of a
specific domain (i.e. only alarms of the Equipment domain).
Figure 6. Alarm pull down menu.

After the selection a list with a synthesis of the Alarm Surveillance is presented and immediately after also
the detailed list of the Alarm Surveillance (see Figure 7. ).
In the synthesis list it is possible to filter the data to show with the detailed view, double clicking on the
selected row of the sublist of Figure 7.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
LCA
Figure 7. Alarm Surveillance
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
22 / 76

NB1:

Detailed information of each alarm are supplied.

The alarms scenario is indicated by the colors of the alarms and by the information displayed in the table.
For instance, if an alarm is still active, the whole row has the same color of its relevant Perceived Severity;
else if it has been cleared, the color of the row is green (except the Perceived Severity). The same
information is reported in the Clearing Status column.
In the following are shortly described the main information obtained in the AS view, starting from the left
column:
Table 5. Alarm Surveillance information general description
TITLE
DESCRIPTION
Perceived Severity
The severity assigned to the alarm is indicated, with the relevant color,
i.e.: MAJOR, MINOR, WARNING....
Event date and time
Indicates year, month, day and hour of the alarm.
Friendly Name
Identify the rack, subrack, board, port, and TP in which the alarm is detected,
i.e.: / r01sr1sl09/#port01E1S
Event Type
Indicates the family type of the alarm as subdivided in the ASAP list, i.e.:
EQUIPMENT, COMMUNICATION,
Probable Cause
The fault/problem is indicated, i.e.: loss of signal, transmitter degraded, replaceable unit missing,resource isolation, ...
Reservation Status
Indicates if the alarm is reserved (RSV) or not (NRSV) according security

management.
Clearing status
Indicates if the alarm condition is terminated (CLR) or is still active (NCLR).

If cleared it has a green background,
Acknowledge status
Indicates if the alarm has been acknowledge (ACK) with the button on the
Controller unit ( EQUICO/ PQ2/EQC / SYNTH1N / SYNTH4) or not ( NACK).
Correlated notification
Not used
flag
Repetition counter
Not used
The information supplied help the operator during the troubleshooting operation.
Table 6. on page 24 supply general indications of alarms meaning and relevant maintenance actions that
can be done with the information given in the applications.
The maintenance action must take into account the board where the alarm is detected.
External Points alarms are referred to the input external point relevant to the Housekeeping signals. They
are available for the customer by connecting them to a dedicated subrack connector.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Detailed description of this application is given in the AS Operators Handbook.
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
23 / 76
PROBABLE CAUSE
NAME AND/OR ACRONYM
OF DISPLAYED ALARM

Table 6. General aspect of alarms meaning and relevant maintenance actions
MAINTENANCE
Loss of signal (LOS)
Check line
Transmitter Signal (TF)
Replace unit
Transmitter degraded (TD)
Replace unit when possible (laser degrade)
Loss of frame (LOF)
Check line (alignment problems due to line error)
AIS
Check connected equipment
Excessive BER (EBER)
Check line (excessive line BER)
Degraded Signal (DS)
Check line (line signal degrade)
Loss of Pointer (LOP)
Check line
Payload Mismatch (PLM)
Configuration error
Far End Received Failure

(FERF)
Check farend equipment
Server Signal Failure (SSF)
Check all the TU path. Alarm indicates AIS signal received on

the TU
Frequency offset (DRIFT)
Check reference and connection between it and the equipment
Loss of timing source (LOSS)
Check reference and connection between it and the equipment
Resource Isolation
Check connection between NE and Craft Terminal
Communication Subsystem
Isolation (CSF)
Check Communication configuration (LAPD)
Unequipped (U)
Referred to Signal Label
Configuration error
Unconfigured Equipment
Present (UEP)
Unit inserted but not declared
Internal Communication Prob- Reset NE. If persists substitute EQUICO / PQ2/EQC SYNTH1N /
lem
SYNTH4 unit according to the NE type.
URU Underlying Resource
Insert the board
Unavailable
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
PM_AS Performance
Monitoring Alarm Synthesis
Check path / line section interested to the indication.
CPECommunication protocol Check MSP protocol (architecture type, switch fail)

error
LOMF Loss Of MultiFrame
ED
02
Check payload structure
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
24 / 76

PROBABLE CAUSE
NAME AND/OR ACRONYM
OF DISPLAYED ALARM
AUXP
Remote Node Transmission

error (RNTE)
Table 7. Boards alarms
NAME AND
ACRONYM
OF DISPLAYED
ALARM
Unit missing
(RUM)
Unit Problem
(RUP)
Unit type mismatch

(RUTM)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MAINTENANCE
ED
02
BOARD
ACRONYM
A2S1
A21E1
A3E3
A3T3
A4ES1
AFOX
ETHATX
ETHMB
GETHAG
HPROT
L41
L41N
L42
L42N
M4E1
M1E3
M1T3
P3E3/T3
P4ES1N
P4S1
P4S1N
P21E1
P21E1N
P21E1NM4
P63E1
P63E1N
P63E1NM4
S41
S41N
ES18FE
ES48FE
SERVICE
COADM1
COADM2
COWLA2
COMDX8
MAINTENANCE
Insert missing unit
Replace unit
Insert right unit (unit inserted into a slot set with another type of
unit)
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
25 / 76
Unit Problem
(RUP)
BOARD
ACRONYM
EQUICO
PQ2/EQC
Unit missing
(RUM)
Replace unit
Insert missing unit
Unit Problem
(RUP)
Replace unit
Unit type mismatch

(RUTM)
unit)
PR16
Power Problem
(POP)
Replace unit
Pump failure
(PF)
Replace unit
Enclosure Door Open

(EDO)
Check that the protection cover in front of the unit has been correctly placed.
Unit missing
(RUM)
Insert missing unit
Unit Problem
(RUP)
Unit type mismatch
(RUTM)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MAINTENANCE
Replace unit
BST10
BST15
BST17
unit)
Pump failure
(PF)
Replace unit
Enclosure Door Open

(EDO)
Check that the protection cover in front of the unit has been correctly placed.
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
26 / 76

NAME AND
ACRONYM
OF DISPLAYED
ALARM

NAME AND
ACRONYM
OF DISPLAYED
ALARM
BOARD
ACRONYM
Unit missing
(RUM)
Insert missing unit
Unit Problem
(RUP)
Unit type mismatch
(RUTM)
GETHMB
ES18FE
ES18FX
ES48FE
ES16
Replace unit
unit)
Internal
communication
problem
(ICP)
Internal dialogue problem in the unit. It indicates a temporary condition which will be restored. If the condition persists it is due to a
unit hardware failure: in this case it will activate the RUP alarm
Unit missing
(RUM)
Insert missing unit
Unit Problem
(RUP)
Unit type mismatch
(RUTM)
Version Mismatch
Internal
communication
problem
(ICP)
Unit missing
(RUM)
Unit Problem
(RUP)
Unit type mismatch
(RUTM)
High Laser
Temperature
(HLT)
MATRIX
MATRIXN
MATRIXE
PREA1GBE
PREA4ETH
ATM8X8
ATM4X4
SYNTH1
SYNTH1N
SYNTH4
S161
S161N
S161ND
L161
L161N
L161ND
L162
L162N
L162ND
I161ND
Cooling Fans Failure

(CFF)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MAINTENANCE
Replace unit
unit)
Update software version by means of SW download
Internal dialogue problem in the unit. It indicates a temporary condition which will be restored. If the condition persists it is due to a
unit hardware failure: in this case it will activate the RUP alarm
Insert missing unit
Replace unit
unit)
Replace unit
Check the fan units and substitute the faulty one

FAN
Unit missing
(RUM)
ED
02
Insert missing unit
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
27 / 76
BOARD
ACRONYM
MAINTENANCE
Unit missing
(RUM)
Insert missing unit
Unit Problem
(RUP)
Replace unit
Unit type mismatch

(RUTM)
unit)
CONGI
LAN problem
(LAN)
This alarm type is present only on 1650SMC or 1660sm.

Check LAN interconnection or substitute CONGI unit
Battery Failure
(BF)
According to the CONGI slot check the station battery.

(Battery A or Battery B)
Fuse Failure
(FF)
Substitute the fuse on the CONGI unit.
Unit missing
(RUM)
Insert missing unit
Unit Problem
(RUP)
Replace unit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Unit type mismatch

(RUTM)
SERGI
unit)
Battery Failure
(BF)
Check the Station Battery connected to the unit
Fuse Failure
(FF)
Substitute the fuse on the CONGI unit.
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
28 / 76

NAME AND
ACRONYM
OF DISPLAYED
ALARM
Table 8. Module alarm

NAME AND
ACRONYM
OF DISPLAYED
ALARM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Unconfigured
Equipment Present
(UEP)
ED
02
MODULE
ACRONYM
ICMI
IS1.1
IL1.1
IL1.2
MM1
IS4.1
IL4.1
IL4.2
1000B
1000B
100B
OHI
OLIN
OHMM
OLMM
SS162E
SL162E
SS162C
SL162C
SL162
SL161
SI161
SS161
MAINTENANCE
Unit inserted but not configured; Configure the board.
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
29 / 76
It is also possible to analyze the detailed alarm presence on the TPs of each ports of the NE, following
the indication of the Port View chapter on the previous Section of this Handbook.
Figure 8. to Figure 12. are examples of Port view.
For each TP of the Port a detail of the relevant alarms is presented.
On the port view the messages displayed at the bottom provide information about:
MSP protection (if enable); refer to Figure 9.
Automatic Laser Shutdown state; refer to Figure 8.
State of the connection for Ethernet port (available only if an ethernet port has been selected); refer
to Figure 11. and Figure 12.
A message under the mouse indicator provides the name of the alarm or object on which it is located, in
this way facilitating the identification of the alarm or status or object.
The nonalarmed condition of an alarm icon is represented by a green color and a sign in the box.
The alarmed condition is represented by the color of its severity (as assigned by the ASAP) and an X
sign in the box.
The alarms which can be found in the Port view are listed in Table 7. on page 25, where the relevant
maintenance actions are reported too.
The information regarding ALS states and Laser state useful for operators safety purpose are
reported in the following:
ALS states:
Inactive = No ALS has been activated (Off) or the laser has been Forced ON/OFF.
In test = The laser restart has been automatically activated .
Active = The ALS has been activated (On).
Undefined = The ALS is not present (not created).
Laser state:
On = all OK or ALS not present (not created).
Off = Laser off (when ALS is created).
Forced on = ALS forced on by operator command.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Forced off = ALS forced off by operator command.
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
30 / 76

3.4.5 Port View alarms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Alarms
TPs
Alarms
Mouse message
Protection message
Figure 8. Example of SDH Port View alarms (without MSP schema)
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
31 / 76

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Alarms
TPs
Alarms
Mouse message
ED
02
MSP Iinformation message
Figure 9. Example of SDH Port View alarms (with MSP schema)
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
32 / 76
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Alarms
TPs
Mouse message
Figure 10. Example of ATM Port View alarms
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
33 / 76
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
LCA
Alarms
TPs
Mouse message
State of connection for Ethernet port
Figure 11. Example of 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet Port View alarms
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
34 / 76

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Alarms
LCA
TPs
Alarms
TPs
Mouse message
State of connection for Ethernet port
Figure 12. Gigabit/s Ethernet Port View alarms
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
35 / 76
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
36 / 76

3.4.6 Board view alarms and states

The alarm and status indications at Board level can be obtained, following the indication of the Board View
chapter on the previous Section of this Handbook.
Figure 14. and Figure 15. are examples of Board view.
The alarm and status indications depend on the unit type; for example SDH units is organized on two levels
of presentation (in the first is selected one of the available ports) and each view contains dedicated indications.
An alarm box is displayed on each port, to indicate whether the port is alarmed.
An indication in the message/status area provides information about the board Administrative State: in
service or outofservice.
The alarms of the board are reported at the bottom of the message/status area, by means of various
boxes containing relevant acronyms.
The nonalarmed condition of an alarm icon is represented by a green color.
The alarmed condition is represented by the color of its severity (as assigned by the ASAP).
In the view is present the Administrative State information: in service or out of service.
The alarms which can be found in the Board view are listed in Table 6. page 24, where the relevant maintenance actions are reported too.
In the view can also be present EPS indications (if supported by the equipment)
Subboard alarms
In case of board with multi access points (i.e. containing subboards) another view permits to select the
contained port, named daughter or subboard (see example of Figure 14. page 38).
An example of daughter (subboard) view with the presented ports is in Figure 13. on page 38. It is displayed after clicking on it.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The alarms which can be found in the subboard view are listed in Table 6. page 24, where the relevant
maintenance actions are reported too.
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
37 / 76

port alarm synthesis
daughters
Board alarms
Figure 13. Example of board view alarms and status
port alarm synthesis
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Board alarms
Figure 14. Example of daughter View alarms and status
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
38 / 76
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
02
EPS State
Board alarms
Figure 15. Example of PDH Board View alarms and status
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
39 / 76
The alarms and status indications at subrack and rack level can be obtained, following the indications
given on the previous Section of this Handbook (NE management).
Figure 16. and Figure 17. are examples of Subrack and Rack view.
An alarm box is displayed on each board, to indicate whether the board is alarmed. This board alarm summarization is activated when one of the board alarms (those reported at the bottom of the Board view) is
active.
A lock symbol on a board indicates that it is inservice. Else, the lack of this symbol indicates its outof
service state . (Administrative State information).
Severity alarms
synthesis
Menu bar
View title
LCA
Boards
Alarms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
View area
Message/status area
Administrative
state indications
Management
Figure 16. 1660SM Subrack view alarms and status example
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
40 / 76

3.4.7 Subrack and Rack view alarms

Severity alarms
synthesis
Menu bar
View title
LCA
View area
Fans subrack
Alarms
Administrative
state indications
Management
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Message/status area
Figure 17. 1660SM Rack view alarm and status example
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
41 / 76
3.4.7.1 Fans Subrack alarms view
To obtain Fan Subrack alarms indications click twice with the mouse on the relevant subrack drawing
in the rack level view.
Figure 18. on page 42 is presented:
Battery Failure (BF):
check that the station battery cables are right connected
Cabling Problem (CAP): check that the alarms cable between the Fans Subrack and the CONGI
unit is right connected; check also the configuration in the Equipment
menu (Connected FAN to CONGI#10 for 1660SM or Connected FAN to
CONGI#5 for 1650SMC)
Fans subrack can only be connected to CONGI#10 in 1660SM
and CONGI#5 in 1650SMC.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Temperature Out of Range (TOOR): verify the Fan unit alarm and in presence of faulty substitute the
relevant unit; clean also the Dust filter if necessary.
Figure 18. 1660SM Fans subrack alarms view example
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
42 / 76

This option is only available on 1650SMC and 1660SM.
3.4.8 AC/DC Rectifier alarms view

This option is available only for 1640FOX

The alarms indications of the AC/DC Rectifier (SR40R) can be obtained selecting, on the menu bar, the
items:
Views > Equipment and then by double clicking on the body of the SR40R, displayed beneath
the SR40M .
Figure 19. shows the SR40R alarms view, where the following alarms indications are displayed:
RLV (Rectifier Low Voltage): it indicates loss of AC power > Check AC connection.
BC (Battery Charging).
RCF (Rectifier Failure): it indicates internal fault, or fans failure >
if the remote alarm FANSOFF2 is active, then replace the rectifier fans, as
stated in Technical Handbook.
otherwise, if the remote alarm FANSOFF2 is not active, then replace the AC/
DC Rectifier (in this case all the traffic will be lost).
BD (Battery Degraded) > replace the batteries, as stated in Technical Handbook.
RUM (Replaceable Unit Missing) > check the Rectifier alarms connection.
LCA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Rectifier alarms
Figure 19. AC/DC Rectifier View alarms and status
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
43 / 76
3.4.9 Equipment View alarms
The alarm indications at Equipment level can be obtained, following the indication of the Equipment View
Figure 20. shows the Equipment view, with the alarm indications presented:
Fuse Failure (FF):
Substitute the fuse in the CONGI unit and search for a cause.
AND Battery Failure (ABF):
Failure of the Service Power Supply connected to the CONGI Rack

connector.
Backplane Failure (BKF):
Substitute the Termination BUS
Specific Hardware Diagnostic (SHD): Indicate the presence of link failure between the MATRIX and
one of the units; for details choose the Internal Link Monitor option of the
Diagnosis menu.
These alarms can be observed at OS level.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Equipment alarms
Figure 20. Example of Equipment View alarms and status
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
44 / 76

3.4.9.1 1660SM equipment view alarms

3.4.9.2 1650SMC equipment view alarms

The alarm indications at Equipment level can be obtained, following the indication of the Equipment View
Figure 20. shows the Equipment view, with the alarm indications presented:
Fuse Failure
Substitute the fuse in the CONGI or SERGI unit and search for a cause.
AND Battery Failure
Specific Hardware Diagnostic (SHD): Indicate the presence of link failure between the SYNTH1N /
SYNTH4.
ADM and one of the units; for details choose the Internal Link Monitor
option of the Diagnosis menu.
Failure of the Service Power Supply connected to the CONGI Rack

connector.
These alarms can be observed at OS level.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Equipment alarms
Figure 21. Example of 1650SMC Equipment View alarms and status
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
45 / 76
The alarms indications at Equipment level can be obtained selecting, on the menu bar, the items:
Views > Equipment and then Equipment > Show Supporting Equipment.
Figure 22. shows the Equipment view, where the following alarms indications are displayed
(FF, ABF, BKF alarms are not used):
Cooling Fans Failure (CFF)
Substitute the fans of the 1640FOX, as explained in the 1640FOX

Technical Handbook.
Specific Hardware Diagnostic (SHD): it indicates the presence of link failure between
the SYNTH1N /SYNTH4 unit and one of the other units; for details check
the fault by means of the Internal Link Monitor option of the Diagnosis
menu.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Equipment alarms
Figure 22. Example of 1640FOX equipment View alarms and status
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
46 / 76

3.4.9.3 1640FOX equipment view alarms

3.4.10 External Points alarms (HouseKeepings)

The alarms and status indications relevant to External Points (housekeepings) can be obtained, following
the indication of the External Points chapter on the previous Section of this Handbook.
The external state represents the alarm state. On when the alarm is raised, else Off.
If the external point is active (On), a red flag is represented near the state of the concerned point.
In case of input point the alarm state is reported also in the user label column, by the box near its name:
green color and sign > means nonalarmed condition.
the change of color, as assigned by the severity (ASAP) > means alarmed condition.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 23. Example of External Points alarms and status
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
47 / 76
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
48 / 76
4 UNIT REPLACEMENT WITH A SPARE

No particular indication is given as to spare handling which is left to the Maintenance Administration.
The replacement procedures are executed as follows:
Hardware set the spare unit exactly as the unit to replace. Settings are specified in the MS documents. Here a layout figure indicates the exact location of all the setting arrangements and a table
relate the operations to achieve with the settings.
The cited documents are enclosed in the Technical Handbook.
Simply replace those units not provided with any software settings
With regard to the EQUICO / PQ2/EQC unit refer to paragraph 4.1 on page 50.(Only for 1660SM)
With regard to the COMPACT ADM (also called SYNTH1, SYNTH1N, SYNTH4) unit refer to paragraph 4.2 on page 52.(Only for 1650SMC and 1640FOX)
With regard to the ATM MATRIX 4X4 and 4x4 V2 units refer to paragraph 4.3 on page 56.
With regard to the ATM MATRIX 8X8 unit refer to paragraph 4.4 on page 58.(Only for 1660SM)
With regard to the ISAPR MATRIX and ISAPR_EA MATRIX unit refer to the specific Operators
Handbook.
With regard to the ISAES unit refer to the specific Operators Handbook.
When upgrading an equipment with New Hardware (for example MATRIXN unit) that substitute the
old units (for example MATRIX unit), follow the indication given in paragraph 5 on page 59.
With regard to the CONGI unit refer to paragraph 4.5 on page 58.(Only for 1660SM and 1650SMC)
WARNING!:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
When substituting the CONGI unit strictly observe the following procedure:
ED
02
In order to avoid shortcircuit, before substituting the CONGI unit, switchoff the relevant Station battery fuse breaker . Subsequently remove the Station Battery cable
and extract the CONGI unit.
Before inserting the new spare unit carefully check the settings and the integrity of
the relative connectors.
Dont insert the units that have been damaged during the transport/storing or in a
phase before their replacing.
Insert the new CONGI unit in the subrack without the Station Battery cable conneted
to it.
Connect the Station Battery cable to the power connector present in front of the
CONGI board.
Switchon the relevant Station battery fuse breaker .
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
49 / 76
4.1 EQUICO or PQ2/EQC unit replacement
PQ2/EQC unit can be equipped only in 1660SM Rel 5.1

Various procedures are utilized to replace a EQUICO or PQ2/EQC faulty unit. They depend on the type
of spares available:
Spare without software installed. This is the normal condition.
Spares with installed software, belonging to the same type of equipment and with SW release
identical to the unit to replace
Spares with installed software, belonging to the same type of equipment but with SW release
differing from the one of the unit to replace, or belonging to other types of equipment or unknown.
Spares with installed software, belonging to the another type of equipment (example 1670SM)
or unknown SW.
CONGI unit version (read NOTE in Figure 24. on page 51)
MIB store in the Craft Terminal or O.S.
The flowchart of Figure 24. on page 51 illustrates the procedures to follow for the EQUICO or PQ2/EQC
substitution.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The procedure aim is to replace the faulty unit without causing configuration changes and/or unwanted
faults; when not possible this is indicated in the flow chart.
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
50 / 76

EQUICO unit can be equipped only in 1660SM Rel.4.3

Substitute EQUICO or
PQ2/EQC unit
HWPRESET THE NEW UNIT WITH:

I11 OFF
THIS PROCEDURE IS
APPLICABLE ONLY ON
1660SM
I12 ON (Reset Data Base)
INSERT THE NEW UNIT
NEW UNIT HW
CONDITION:
software of the same
release and NE
NEW UNIT HW
CONDITION:
unit with different
software
NEW UNIT HW
CONDITION:
unit without
software
NEW UNIT HW
CONDITION:
unit with wrong or
unknown software
REMOVE AND HW PRESET THE NEW UNIT WITH:

I11 ON I12 ON
INSERT THE NEW UNIT AGAIN
Download the NE relevant software release
with normal dowload procedure.
(see NE management section)

with SIBDL procedure
(see SIBDL section)

I11 ON I12 OFF (Reset Data Base and upload Comm/Routing Tables)
YES
Is the MIB stored
in the Craft Terminal?
NO
From C.T. send the saved

MIB containing the correct
configuration (NB1)
From O.S. send the saved
configuration (NB1)
From C.T.Activate the sent MIB
From O.S.Activate the sent MIB

I11 OFF
I12 OFF (Normal operating condition)
INSERT AGAIN THE NEW

EQUICO or PQ2/EQC
END
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NOTES:
NB1
NB2: The Comm/Routing tables are automatically retrieved
only with CONGI starting from version 3AL 78830AAAC
Otherwise the Comm/Routing tables must be
configurated manually using the Craft Terminal
Figure 24. EQUICO or PQ2/EQC unit replacement
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
51 / 76
4.2 COMPACT ADM unit replacement
N.B.
In this paragraph for COMPACT ADM is generically intended one of the following unit:
SYNTH1
SYNTH1N
SYNTH4
Various procedures are utilized to replace a COMPACT ADM faulty unit. They depend on the following
maintenance conditions:
EPS protection of the COMPACT ADM unit (only for 1650SMC)
EPS present or not (typically present)

failure on the Main board
failure on the Spare board
type of spares available:
Spare without software installed. This is the normal condition.

Spares with installed software, belonging to the same type of equipment and with SW release
identical to the unit to replace.
Spares with installed software, belonging to the same type of equipment but with SW release
differing from the one of the unit to replace, or belonging to other types of equipment or unknown.
Spares with installed software, belonging to the another type of equipment or unknown SW.
CONGI unit version (read NOTES in Figure 26. on page 54 and Figure 27. on page 55)
MIB store in the Craft Terminal or O.S.
The flowcharts of Figure 25. on page 53, Figure 26. on page 54, Figure 27. on page 55 illustrates the
procedures to follow for the COMPACT ADM substitution.
The procedure aim is to replace the faulty unit without causing configuration changes and/or unwanted
faults; when not possible this is indicated in the flow chart.
Replacement problems:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
When replacing the COMPACT ADM unit the traffic of the two SDH ports is lost when not SNCP
protected.
Then it is suggested to replace in low traffic condition.
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
52 / 76

COMPACT ADM unit can be equipped only in 1640FOX and 1650SMC.

THIS PROCEDURE IS
APLLICABLE ONLY TO
1650SMC
PROTECTED
COMPACT ADM unit
FAILURE
ON SPARE
Substitute
COMPACT ADM
FAILURE
ON MAIN
NO
Craft Terminal
manages the NE?
YES
Force EPS on spare
COMPACT ADM
END
Substitute main
COMPACT ADM

(Reset Data Base)
I11 OFF
I12 ON
INSERT THE NEW UNIT
WAIT UNTIL THE ACCESS

WILL BE RETURNED TO THE C.T.
NEW UNIT HW
CONDITION:
release and NE
NEW UNIT HW
CONDITION:
unit with different
software
NEW UNIT HW
CONDITION:
unit without
software
NEW UNIT HW
CONDITION:
unit with wrong or
unknown software

I11 ON I12 ON


(see SIBDL section)
CONTINUE
REFER TO
Figure 26. on page 54
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 25. COMPACT ADM unit replacement (EPS protected) part A
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
53 / 76
CONTINUE
FROM
Figure 25. on page 53
I11 ON
REMOVE AND HWPRESET THE NEW UNIT WITH:

I12 OFF (Reset Data Base and upload Comm/Routing Tables)
NO
Is the MIB stored

YES

configuration (NB1)

configuration (NB1)
From O.S. Activate the sent MIB
From C.T. Activate the sent MIB

(Normal operating condition)
I11 OFF
I12 OFF
INSERT THE NEW

COMPACT ADM
IN CASE OF EPS THE DECISION

TO FORCE OR NOT TO THE main
COMPACT ADM IS LEFT TO THE OPERATOR
END
NOTE:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 26. COMPACT ADM unit replacement (EPS protected) part B
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
54 / 76

THIS PROCEDURE IS
APLLICABLE ONLY TO
1650SMC

NOT PROTECTED
COMPACT ADM unit
Substitute main
COMPACT ADM (NB1)
THIS PROCEDURE IS
APLLICABLE ONLY TO
1650SMC AND 1640FOX

I11 OFF I12 ON (Reset Data Base)
INSERT THE NEW UNIT

NEW UNIT HW
CONDITION:
release and NE
NEW UNIT HW
CONDITION:
unit with different
software
NEW UNIT HW
CONDITION:
unit without
software
NEW UNIT HW
CONDITION:
unit with wrong or
unknown software

I11 ON I12 ON

(see SIBDL section)

I11 ON
I12 OFF
(Reset Data Base and upload Comm/Routing Tables)
NO
Is the MIB stored

YES

configuration (NB2)
configuration (NB2)

I11 OFF
NOTES:
I12 OFF
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NB1: with not protected Compact ADM all traffic is lost

INSERT THE NEW

COMPACT ADM
END
Figure 27. COMPACT ADM unit replacement (EPS not protected)
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
55 / 76
4.3 ATM MATRIX 4X4, 4x4 V2, 4X4 D3 units replacement
ATM MATRIX 4X4 EPS schema is not supported by 1640FOX so, the flow chart of Figure 29.
cannot be applied to this equipment.
The flowcharts of Figure 28. on page 56 illustrates the procedures to follow for the ATM MATRIX 4X4
when it is not EPS protected.
The flowcharts of Figure 29. on page 57 illustrates the procedures to follow for the ATM MATRIX 4X4
when it is EPS protected.
The procedures aim is to replace the faulty unit without causing configuration changes and/or unwanted
faults.
NOT EPS PROTECTED
ATM MATRIX unit
Substitute the faulty unit

with a spare ATM MATRIX
TO RESET THE DATA BASE

I14 ON
INSERT THE NEW UNIT AND


I14 OFF
INSERT THE NEW UNIT AND

From ATM Craft application Restore the data dase

previously saved (see ATM OPERATORS HANDBOOK)
or otherwise reconfigure all the ATM connections
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
END
Figure 28. ATM MATRIX 4X4 and 4x4 V2 units replacement without EPS protection
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
56 / 76

Two different procedure are available for ATM MATRIX 4X4 substitution according to the EPS schema.

THIS PROCEDURE IS
APLLICABLE ONLY TO
1650SMC AND 1660SM
ATM MATRIX unit

EPS PROTECTED
FAILURE
ON SPARE
Substitute
ATM MATRIX unit
END
FAILURE
ON MAIN
The Spare unit become active
Substitute the faulty uni
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
END
Figure 29. ATM MATRIX 4X4 unit replacement with EPS protection
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
57 / 76
4.4 ATM MATRIX 8X8 unit replacement
Two different procedure are available for ATM MATRIX 8X8 substitution according to the EPS schema.
For ATM MATRIX 8X8 substitution can be applied the same rules used for ATM MATRIX 4X4 , so refer
to flow chart of Figure 28. on page 56 and Figure 29. on page 57.
4.5 CONGI unit replacement

CONGI unit can be equipped only on 1660SM and 1650SMC.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
When substituting an old CONGI unit (from code 3AL 78830 AAAA to code 3AL 78830 AAAE) with a
new CONGI unit (starting from code 3AL 78830 AAAF) must be taken into account the rules reported
in the following; this is necessary for the right management of the Fuse Broken alarm on the CONGI
(1650SMC and 1660SM) and SERGI (1650SMC) units.
[1]
The alarm Fuse Broken is meaningful (hence it is active) only if two batteries connections (this
means that two CONGI in1660SM or one CONGI and one SERGI in 1650SMC has been equipped)
are present.
[2]
If old CONGI units are present in main slot (slot 10 for 1660SM and slot 4 for 1650SMC) it is mandatory to connect the service battery to the front connector (refer to Installation Handbook for details)
to correctly activate the alarms.
[3]
In presence of configurations having 2 CONGI units composed of an old and new type it is mandatory to open TC5 setting (refer to Technical Handbook for details on Hardware settings) on the soldering side of the old type CONGI if the latter is placed in the spare position (slot 12 in 1660SM and
slot 5 in 1650SMC).
If the old CONGI is maintained in a main slot (slot 10 in 1660SM and slot 4 in 1650SMC), TC5 can
be nevertheless closed or open.
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
58 / 76

ATM MATRIX 8X8 unit can be equipped only in 1660SM.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

5 UPGRADING WITH NEW HARDWARE

In the next paragraphs is indicated the procedure to follow when upgrading an equipment with New Hardware .
The new Hardware is identify by the N letter at the end of the acronym unit (for example MATRIXN is
the new version, MATRIX without N is the old version).
This procedure permits, if the equipment is EPS protected and inserted in a protected network (linear or
ring protection), to maintain the system in service
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
59 / 76
5.1 MATRIX substitution with MATRIXN
According to the MATRIX EPS protection scheme different procedure are available:
[1]
Upgrading with a new MATRIXN EPS not protected

Substituting the old MATRIX all the traffic is lost!
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
[2]
ED
Remove the old MATRIX in slot 23 from the subrack
Insert the new MATRIX into the subrack slot 23; on Craft Terminal a RUTM (unit type mismatch)
alarm will be present.
On Craft Terminal in the Subrack level view select the slot where the new unit has been inserted
Select the Modify option from the Equipment menu and select the acronym of the new unit
( MATRIXN) from the list, then click on ok.
Verify that the RUTM alarm disappear
Upgrading with a new MATRIXN EPS protected
Remove first the Standby MATRIX from the subrack
Insert the new MATRIXN into the subrack slot previously occupied by the old MATRIX; a RUTM
(unit type mismatch) alarm will be present.
Select the Modify option from the Equipment menu and select the MATRIXN acronym from
the list then click on ok.
Force the EPS Switching to the Standby MATRIXN by selecting the Switch option from the
EPS menu. For details see the paragraph Switching EPS in the NE MANAGEMENT section
of this Handbook.
After having verify that the MATRIXN (previously in Standby) is now working, remove the MATRIX unit (previously working) from the subrack.
Insert the new MATRIXN into the subrack slot previously occupied by the old MATRIX; a RUTM
(unit type mismatch) alarm will be present.
Select the Modify option from the Equipment menu and select the MATRIXN acronym from
The decision to force again the EPS MATRIXN switching to restore the original working condition is left to the operator.
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
60 / 76

MATRIX unit can be equipped only in 1660SM Rel. 4.3.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

5.2 SYNTH1 substitution with SYNTH1N

5.2.1 Procedure for 1650SMC
According to the EPS and SNCP SYNTH1 protection scheme different procedure are available:
[1]
Upgrading with a new SYNTH1N EPS not protected

Substituting the old SYNTH1 all the traffic is lost!
ED
Remove the old SYNTH1 in slot 9 from the subrack
Before inserting the new SYNTH1N in subrack slot 9, follow the instruction described in
Figure 30. on page 62. At the end of the procedure a RUTM (unit type mismatch) alarm will be
present.
On Craft Terminal in the Subrack level view select the SYNTHN unit in slot 9
Select the Modify option from the Equipment menu and select the SYNTH1N acronym from
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
61 / 76

NEW UNIT HW
CONDITION:
release and NE
NEW UNIT HW
CONDITION:
unit with different
software
NEW UNIT HW
CONDITION:
unit without
software
NEW UNIT HW
CONDITION:
unit with wrong or
unknown software

I11 ON I12 ON

(see SIBDL section)

I11 ON
I12 OFF
NO
Is the MIB stored

YES

configuration (NB1)
configuration (NB1)

I11 OFF
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NOTES:
I12 OFF
INSERT THE NEW

COMPACT ADM
END
Figure 30. 1650SMC: Upgrading with a new SYNTH1N EPS not protected
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
62 / 76


INSERT THE NEW UNIT
[2]
Supposing that the two STM1 ports are not network protected, their traffic will be lost during the
substitution; the traffic of all the other board will not be lost.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Upgrading with a new SYNTH1N EPS protected
ED
Remove first the old SYNTH1 in slot 10 from the subrack
Insert the new SYNTH1N into the subrack slot 10; a RUTM (unit type mismatch) alarm will be
present.
On Craft Terminal in the Subrack level view select the SYNTH1N unit in slot 10
Select the Modify option from the Equipment menu and select the SYNTH acronym from the
list then click on ok.
Force the EPS Switching on SYNTH1N in slot 10 by selecting the Switch option from the EPS
menu. For details see the paragraph Switching EPS in the NE MANAGEMENT section of
this Handbook.
Remove the old SYNT1H in slot 9 from the subrack
Before inserting the new SYNTH1N in subrack slot 9, follow the instruction described in
Figure 31. on page 64. At the end of the procedure a RUTM (unit type mismatch) alarm will be
present.
On Craft Terminal in the Subrack level view select the SYNTH1N unit in slot 9
Select the Modify option from the Equipment menu and select the SYNTH1N acronym from
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
63 / 76

NEW UNIT HW
CONDITION:
release and NE
NEW UNIT HW
CONDITION:
unit with different
software
NEW UNIT HW
CONDITION:
unit without
software
NEW UNIT HW
CONDITION:
unit with wrong or
unknown software

I11 ON I12 ON
I11 ON

(see SIBDL section)

I12 OFF (Reset Data Base and upload Comm/Routing Tables)
NO
Is the MIB stored

YES

configuration (NB1)

configuration (NB1)

I11 OFF
I12 OFF
INSERT THE NEW

COMPACT ADM
IN CASE OF EPS THE DECISION

TO FORCE OR NOT TO THE main
COMPACT ADM IS LEFT TO THE OPERATOR
NOTES:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

END
Figure 31. 1650SMC: Upgrading with a new SYNTH1N EPS protected
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
64 / 76


(Reset Data Base)
I11 OFF
I12 ON
INSERT THE NEW UNIT
5.2.2 Procedure for 1640FOX
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Substituting the old SYNTH all the traffic is lost!
ED
Remove the old SYNTH in slot 2 from the subrack
Before inserting the new SYNTHN in subrack slot 2, follow the instructions described in
Figure 32. on page 66 (Compact ADM replacement). At the end of the procedure a RUTM (unit
type mismatch) alarm, relevant to the replaced unit, will be present on the C.T.
On Craft Terminal, in the Subrack level view, select the Compact ADM unit (slot 2).
Select the Modify option from the Equipment menu and select the SYNTHN acronym from
Verify that the RUTM alarm disappears.
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
65 / 76

NEW UNIT HW
CONDITION:
release and NE
NEW UNIT HW
CONDITION:
unit with different
software
NEW UNIT HW
CONDITION:
unit without
software
NEW UNIT HW
CONDITION:
unit with wrong or
unknown software

I11 ON I12 ON

(see SIBDL section)

I11 ON
I12 OFF
NO
Is the MIB stored

YES

configuration (NB1)
configuration (NB1)

I11 OFF
NOTE:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

(from the shelf of the equipment)
I12 OFF
INSERT THE NEW

COMPACT ADM
END
Figure 32. 1640FOX: Upgrading with a new SYNTH1N
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
66 / 76


INSERT THE NEW UNIT
5.3 P4S1, S41, L41, L42, S161, L161, L162 substitution with P4S1N,
S41N, L41N, L42N , S161N, L161N, L162N
During the substitution the traffic carried by the units will be lost if not SNCP or MSP protected
In the following an example will be given substituting a P4S1 with a P4S1N; the same procedure can
be applied to substitute the S41, L41, L42, S161, L161, L162 units respectively with S41N,
L41N, L42N , S161N, L161N, L162N units; the same procedure can be applied to substitute
a generic xyz unit with its upgraded xyzN version.
Remove the old unit( example P4S1 ) from the subrack
Insert the new unit (example P4S1N) into the subrack slot previously occupied by the old unit;
on Craft Terminal a RUTM (unit type mismatch) alarm will be present.
( in our example P4S1N) from the list, then click on ok.
5.4 P21E1 substitution with P21E1N (only for 1640FOX)

During the substitution, the traffic carried by the involved units will be lost.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In the following an example will be given, substituting a P21E1 with a P21E1N; the same procedure
can be applied to substitute a generic xyz unit with its upgraded xyzN version.
ED
Remove the old unit (example P21E1) from the subrack.
Insert the new unit (example P21E1N) into the subrack slot previously occupied by the old unit;
on Craft Terminal a RUTM (unit type mismatch) alarm, relevant to the replaced unit, will be present.
On Craft Terminal, in the Subrack level view, select the slot where the new unit has been inserted.
(in our example P21E1N) from the list, then click on ok.
Verify that the RUTM alarm disappears.
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
67 / 76
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
68 / 76
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

6 FLASH CARD SUBSTITUTION

6.1 Flash card substitution procedure for 1660SM
The FLASH card used up to rel. 2.0A (80 Mbytes) requires to be replaced with one having a higher size
(256 Mbyte) in order to manage the new SDH+ISA (Integrated Service Adapter) services.
N.B.
Before to start with the FLASH card substitution ( flowchart of Figure 33. on page 70) execute
the following instruction:
a)
Save the MIB as explained in Section 3 (NE MANAGEMENT), Paragraph Mib management of this Manual.
b)
Create and install the enhanced software package (SDH+ISA) as explained in 1320 CT
Basic Operators Handbook.
The flowchart of Figure 33. on page 70 illustrates the procedures to follow for the FLASH card substitution without causing loss of traffic.
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
69 / 76

Extract the EQUICO

or PQ2/EQC unit
SUBSTITUTE THE OLD FLASH CARD

WITH A NEW ONE
HWPRESET THE EQUICO OR PQ2/EQC UNIT WITH:

I11 OFF
I12 ON
(Reset Data Base)
INSERT THE EQUICO OR PQ2/EQC UNIT IN THE SUBRACK
Download the NE relevant software package

(see SIBDL section)

I11 ON
I12 OFF
INSERT THE EQUICO OR PQ2/EQC UNIT IN THE SUBRACK
NO
YES
Is the MIB stored
configuration (NB1)

configuration (NB1)

I11 OFF
I12 OFF
INSERT AGAIN THE EQUICO

OR PQ2/EQC IN THE SUBRACK
END
NOTES:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

NB1
Figure 33. FLASH CARD substitution
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
70 / 76
6.2 Flash card substitution procedure for 1650SMC

N.B.
In this paragraph for COMPACT ADM is generically intended one of the following unit:
SYNTH1
SYNTH1N
SYNTH4
The 80 Mbytes FLASH card (housed on COMPACT ADM unit in slot 9) used up to rel. 2.0A requires to
be replaced with one having a higher size (256 Mbyte) in order to manage the new SDH+ATM/IP services.
N.B.
Before to start with the FLASH card substitution ( flowchart of Figure 34. on page 72 or flow
chart of Figure 35. on page 73 ) execute the following instruction:
a)
b)
Create and install the enhanced software package (SDH+ATM/IP) as explained in 1320
CT Basic Operators Handbook.
The flowcharts of Figure 34. on page 72 illustrate the procedures to follow for the FLASH card substitution with COMPACT ADM board EPS protected.
Warning: Substituting the FLASH CARD on COMPACT ADM unit (placed

in slot 9) the traffic of the two SDH ports will be lost if not SNCP protected.
The flowcharts of Figure 35. on page 73 illustrate the procedures to follow for the FLASH card substitution with COMPACT ADM board not EPS protected.
Warning: Substituting the FLASH CARD on COMPACT ADM (placed in

slot 9) unit not EPS protected will cause traffic loss!
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
71 / 76

BY CRAFT TERMINAL FORCE THE COMPACT ADM IN SLOT 10 TO BECAME ACTIVE

USING THE EPS RELEVANT EPS COMMAND
Extract the COMPACT ADM unit in slot 9

WITH A NEW ONE
HWPRESET THE COMPACT ADM UNIT WITH:

I11 OFF
I12 ON
(Reset Data Base)
INSERT THE COMPACT ADM UNIT IN THE SUBRACK

(see SIBDL section)
EXTRACT AND HW PRESET THE COMPACT ADM UNIT WITH:

I11 ON
I12 OFF
NO
YES
Is the MIB stored
configuration (NB1)

configuration (NB1)

I11 OFF
I12 OFF
INSERT AGAIN THE

COMPACT ADM UNIT IN THE SUBRACK
THE DECISION TO FORCE ACTIVE THE COMPACT ADM

UNIT IN SLOT 9 IS LEFT TO THE OPERATOR
END
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NOTES:
NB1
Figure 34. FLASH CARD substitution (COMPACT ADM EPS protected)
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
72 / 76

WARNING: Substituting the FLASH CARD on the SYNTHN board not EPS protected will cause traffic loss!
Extract the COMPACT ADM unit in slot 9

WITH A NEW ONE

I11 OFF
I12 ON
(Reset Data Base)

(see SIBDL section)

I11 ON
I12 OFF
NO
YES
Is the MIB stored
configuration (NB1)

configuration (NB1)

I11 OFF
I12 OFF
INSERT AGAIN THE

END
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NOTES:
NB1
Figure 35. FLASH CARD substitution (COMPACT ADM EPS not protected)
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
73 / 76
The 80 Mbytes FLASH card (housed on COMPACT ADM unit in slot 2) used up to rel. 2.0A requires to
be replaced with one having a bigger size (256 Mbyte), in order to manage the new SDH+ATM/IP services.
N.B.
Before starting with the FLASH card substitution (flowchart of Figure 36. on page 75 ) execute
the following instruction:
a)
b)
Create and install the enhanced software package (SDH+ATM/IP) as explained in 1320
CT Basic Operators Handbook.
The flowchart of Figure 36. on page 75 illustrates the procedures to follow for the FLASH card substitution.
Warning: Substituting the FLASH CARD on COMPACT ADM unit will

cause traffic loss!
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Then it is suggested to replace it in low traffic condition.
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
74 / 76

6.3 Flash card substitution procedure for 1640FOX

WARNING: Substituting the FLASH CARD on the COMPACTADM will cause traffic loss
Extract the COMPACT ADM unit

WITH A NEW ONE

I11 OFF
I12 ON
(Reset Data Base)

(see SIBDL section)

I11 ON
I12 OFF
NO
YES
Is the MIB stored
configuration (NB1)

configuration (NB1)

I11 OFF
I12 OFF
INSERT AGAIN THE

END
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NOTES:
NB1: the Comm/Routing tables are automatically retrieved from the shelf of the equipment
Figure 36. FLASH CARD substitution (on COMPACT ADM unit)
ED
02
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
75 / 76
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
END OF DOCUMENT
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 91670 AA AA
76
76 / 76
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.1 Document scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.2 Target audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2 DOWNLOAD WITH SIBDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.1 SIBDL download procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
5
5
3 CONFIGURATION FOR SIBDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1.1 Remote Access Service configuration (only needed for Windows NT environment) . .
3.1.2 Serial Cable Modem configuration for Windows NT environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.3 Serial Cable Modem configuration for Windows 2000 environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
11
11
11
12
02
050414
01
041119
ED
DATE
ECR 23082
CHANGE NOTE
C. FAVERO ITAVE
J.MIR S. MAGGIO
C. FAVERO ITAVE
J.MIR S. MAGGIO
P.GHELFI ITAVE
APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
ORIGINATOR
P.GHELFI ITAVE
METRO OMSN
Rel. 4.4/5.2A
OPERATORS HANDBOOK
ED
02
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 91670 AA AA
16
1 / 16
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FIGURES
Figure 1. SIBDL download procedure step 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 8. Serial Cable Modem configuration step 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 9. Serial Cable Modem configuration step 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 10. Serial Cable Modem configuration step 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
02
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
12
13
14
14
15
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 91670 AA AA
16
2 / 16


1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope
The SIBDL Manual describes the SIBDL application, used to download the NE software via Q or F
interface.
The SIBDL (Standard Image Binary DownLoad) procedure contains the following operative descriptions:
Download with SIBDL. The complete procedure is indicated. See Chapter 2 on page 5
Configuration for SIBDL. Configurations to be performed for SIBDL operation are described. See
Chapter 3 on page 11.

The SIBDL Manual is intended for all users.
1.2 Terminology
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 91670 AA AA
16
3 / 16
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 91670 AA AA
16
4 / 16

2 DOWNLOAD WITH SIBDL

This procedure describes how to download a NE software with the SIBDL (Standard Image Binary
DownLoad) program.
2.1.1 SIBDL download procedure
Download with SIBDL program is performed in the following phases:
Turn on phase, when activating the NE.
Maintenance phase, when substituting the EQUICO (1660SM rel. 4.x), PQ2EQC (1660SM
Rel.5.x) or SYNTH1N/SYNTH4 (1650SMC and 1640FOX) unit with a spare, and the spare one
doesnt contain software.
ATTENTION:
Download with SIBDL program put the EQUICO, PQ2EQC or SYNTH1N/SYNTH4 unit out of
service regarding to the supervision and control function, while the traffic is not lost.
It must not be executed to download a spare unit that contains software; in this case use the
Download option of the EMLUSM, presented in the previous section.
SIBDL tool permits to download the software towards the NE using the Q interface (Ethernet connection)
or the F interface RS232 (serial line) of the NE .
When using the Q interface the time necessary to the operation is reduced to some minute (Q interface
is available only on 1650SMC and 1660SM)
WARNING:
in Windows NT environment, it should have configured, before to use SIBDL:
TCP/IP protocol, Protocol Service, TEL NET Accessory, defined by the NT

Administrator.
RAS (Remote Access Service) and Serial Cable Modem presented at chapter 3 on
page 11.
in Windows 2000 environment, it should have configured, before to use SIBDL:
TCP/IP protocol, Protocol Service, TEL NET Accessory, defined by the

Administrator.
Serial Cable Modem refer to paragraph 3.1.3 on page 12.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
02
RAS (Remote Access Service) is not necessary in Windows 2000 environment
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 91670 AA AA
16
5 / 16
Note: the example in the following is referred to a 1660SM; the same rules can be applied to
1640FOX and 1650SMC.
1)
Connect the Craft Terminal with the NE:
when download by means of Q interface, always connect both the F and Q interface
(1650SMC and 1660SM).
when download by means of F interface, connect only the F interface (1640FOX,

1650SMC and 1660SM).
2)
Start SIBDL, selecting Start > Program>Alcatel>SIBDLversion>SIBDL
3)
In the screen which appears (see Figure 1. ) with the command menu, select automatic mode
command typing 8 and then ENTER.
Figure 1. SIBDL download procedure step 1

4)
In the field source file at the bottom write the path name of the NE descriptor file (see
Figure 2. ).
The path name has typically the following format (see the example in the figure):
<directory>/<NE name and release number>/<file descriptor>
Note:In current release it is possible to download two types of file descriptor according to
the following rules:
1) Create the NE software package as explained in the paragraph NE Software
package installation procedure SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT of this Manual.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
2) If the software to download manage only the SDH functionality, select the file descriptor
in the directory 1660SM.
(example: /ALCATEL/Q3CT_Pv1.3.05/FTservices/data/1660SM/2.1b.09/1660.dsc)
3) If the software to download manage the SDH + ATM/IP functionality, select the file
descriptor in the directory 1660SME
(example: /ALCATEL/Q3CT_Pv1.3.05/FTservices/data/1660SME/2.1b.09/1660.dsc)
ED
02
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 91670 AA AA
16
6 / 16

To download with SIBDL execute the following steps:

C:\ALCATEL\Q3CT_Pv1.3.05/FTservices/data/1660SME/2.1b.09/1660.dsc

5)
Press ENTER
6)
This step (see Figure 3. ) ask for the IP Address insertion.

In the field NE_IP_address[ PPP TEL NET] at the bottom:
with F interface: write PPP and press ENTER
with Q interface (only1650SMC and 1660SM):
first possibility: write TELNET and press ENTER

In next step which appears write the IP Address of the Craft Terminal
second possibility: write the IP Address of the NE and press ENTER
ervices/data/1660SME/2.1b.09/1660.dsc
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

7)
This step ( see Figure 4. ) ask if the flash card must be formatted.
Type y to format the flash card; as result of this action the program ask for a confirmation (see
Figure 5. )
ED
02
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 91670 AA AA
16
7 / 16

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
8)
ED
02
Type y . The screen shows the automatic download evolution with a final message indicating
the completed download (see Figure 6. ).
On the contrary repeat the procedure.
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 91670 AA AA
16
8 / 16


9)
Press ENTER.
10 ) In the presented screen type 4 (see Figure 7. ) and ENTER.

11 ) Extract and reinsert the EQUICO (for 1660SM Rel. 4.3), PQ2EQC (fro 1660SM Rel. 5.1) or
SYNTH1N/SYNTH4 (1650SMC or 1640FOX) unit to complete the operation.
12 ) Extract and reinsert again the EQUICO (for 1660SM Rel. 4.3), PQ2EQC (fro 1660SM Rel. 5.1)
or SYNTH1N/SYNTH4 (1650SMC or 1640FOX) unit to complete the operation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
13 ) Run the 1320CT application, execute Start supervision and NE login
ED
02
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 91670 AA AA
16
9 / 16
N.B.
Check that no RUTM alarm is present in the slot reserved to the main MATRIXN for
1660SM Rel. 4.3 or SYNTH1N for 1650SMC.
If RUTM alarm is present means that the board type inserted in the subrack (typically
MATRIXN or SYNTH1N in this release) and the board type software configurated
(typically MATRIX or SYNTH1) is not the same; under this condition the user must
change the board type with the Equipment>Set menu.
Select Init download from Download menu
Select the SW package to Download and click on OK button
In this condition the download is executed immediately.
Select Unit info from Download menu
Select the Software Package loaded as explained above and activate it
Press OK to complete the operation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In this condition the download is executed immediately.
ED
02
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 91670 AA AA
16
10 / 16

14 ) From Craft Terminal ( EMLUSM view) execute the normal download procedure:

3 CONFIGURATION FOR SIBDL

This chapter describes the configurations to be performed for SIBDL operation.
3.1.1 Remote Access Service configuration (only needed for Windows NT environment)
To install a new modem, the user should have administrator privileges and need the installation CDROM
of Windows NT, then execute:
Double click on My computer icon on the PC desktop and double click on Control panel icon;
double click on Network icon;
select the folder Services in the Network window and push the button Add: start the Select
Network Service window;
select Remote Access Service (RAS) in the dialog box;
follow the instructions.
3.1.2 Serial Cable Modem configuration for Windows NT environment
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To install a new modem, the user should have administrator privileges, then execute:
Double click on My computer icon on the PC desktop and double click on Control panel icon;
double click on Network icon;

select the folder Services in the Network window;
select Remote Access Service and push button Properties...;
push the button add in Remote Access Setup window;
push the button Install Modem in Add RAS Device window: start the Install New Modem window;
put a tick against Dont detect my modem; I will select him from a list and push the Next > button;
push the button Have disk...: start the window Install from disk;
push the button Browse...;

search the folder where SIBDL is installed (Alcatel / SIBDL version / SIBDL /)and select the file
mdmalca.inf, after push the button Open;
push the button OK in window Install from disk;

select the modem named Serial cable in the dialog box of window Install New Modem and push
the button Next >;
put a tick against Selected ports and select only one port (the port must be available, i.e. not used
by another RAS modem) and push the button Next >;
follow the instructions;
push the button OK in Add RAS Device window;
push the button Continue in Remote Access Setup window;
push the button OK in Network window;
ED
02
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 91670 AA AA
16
11 / 16
3.1.3 Serial Cable Modem configuration for Windows 2000 environment
Double click on My computer icon on your PC desktop and double click on Control panel icon;
Double click on Phone and Modem Options icon and select the Modems folder;
Push the button Add: Add/Remove Hardware Wizard: Install New Modem window will appear;
Put a tick against Dont detect my modem; I will select it from a list and push the button Next > ;
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 8. Serial Cable Modem configuration step 1
Push the button Have disk...: the window Install from disk will appear;
Push the button Browse...;
Search the folder where SIBDL is installed and select the file mdmalca.inf, after push the button
Open;
Push the button OK on the Install from disk window;
Select the modem named Serial cable into dialog box from Install New Modem window and push
the button Next >;
ED
02
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 91670 AA AA
16
12 / 16

To install a new modem, you should have administrator privileges;
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 91670 AA AA
16
13 / 16

Put a tick against Selected ports and select only one port (the serial port must be available, i.e. not
used by another RAS modem) and push the button Next >;
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The window Digital Signature Not found will appear: push the button Yes, and after the button
Finish to end modem installation;
ED
02
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 91670 AA AA
16
14 / 16
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
At the end, the Phone and Modem Options window will display the installed modem
02
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 91670 AA AA
16
15 / 16
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
END OF DOCUMENT
ED
02
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 91670 AA AA
16
16 / 16

LABELS AND ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

TARGHETTE E INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA
QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK
COD.MANUALE HDBK P/N:
Alcatel
METRO OMSN Rel. 4.4/5.2A
OPERATORS HANDBOOK
ORIGINALE INTERLEAF: FILE ARCHIVIAZIONE: cod ANV (PD1-PD2)
NUMERO PAGINE TOTALI PER ARCHIVIAZIONE: 588+4=602

DIMENSIONE BINDER SORGENTE (du ks): 324.288 Kbyte
INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA - ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
STAMPARE FRONTE / RETRO RECTO-VERSO PRINTING

COMPOSIZIONE ED ASSIEMAGGIO DEL MANUALE:
HANDBOOK COMPOSITION AND ASSEMBLY:
SERVONO 5 SEPARATORI NUMERATI DA 1 A 5
5 REGISTERS FROM 1 TO 5 ARE NECESSARY
No pagine
(facciate)
No pages
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
fase
step
ED
da from
a to
24
1/24
24/24
22
1/22
22/22
448
1/448
448/448
76
1/76
76/76
1/16
16/16
TARGHETTE - LABELS
FRONTESPIZIO - FRONT
INSERIRE SEPARATORE 1 - INSERT REGISTER 1
SC.1: HANDBOOK GUIDE
SC.2: INTRODUCTION
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
10
SC.4: NE MAINTENANCE
11
12
SC.5: SIBDL
16
TOTALE PAGINE A4 (FACCIATE) TOTAL A4 PAGES:
586
TOTALE FOGLI A4 TOTAL A4 SHEETS:
293
02
numerate
numbered
RELEASED
3AL 91670 AAAA TQZZA
4
1/ 4
QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE
Site
VIMERCATE

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK
FCG
Originators
P. GHELFI
METRO OMSN
REL. 4.4/5.2A
C.T. OPERATORS HANDBOOK
Domain
Division
Rubric
Type
Distribution Codes
:
:
:
:
OND
SDH
METRO OMSN
Internal :
External
:
Approvals
Name
App.
J. MIR
C. FAVERO
S. MAGGIO
Name
App.
WARNING FOR A-UNITS OTHER THAN A-ITALY
Labels are done according to A-Italy binder format.

Source files: ALICE 6.10 ARCHIVED BY GAPI 4.1
I SEGUENTI DATI SONO RIPORTATI IN AUTOMATICO SULLE ETICHETTE

Alcatel
1640FOX 1650SMC 1660SM
OPERATORS HANDBOOK
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
VOL. 1/1
ED
02
RELEASED
4
2/ 4
Alcatel

1640FOX
1650SMC
1660SM
OPERATORS HANDBOOK
VOL. 1/1
Alcatel
1640FOX
1650SMC
1660SM
OPERATORS HANDBOOK
VOL. 1/1
Alcatel
1640FOX
1650SMC
1660SM
OPERATORS HANDBOOK
VOL. 1/1
Alcatel
1640FOX
1650SMC
1660SM
OPERATORS HANDBOOK
VOL. 1/1
Alcatel
1640FOX
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
1650SMC
1660SM
OPERATORS HANDBOOK
VOL. 1/1
RELEASED
4
3/ 4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FINE DEL DOCUMENTO INTERNO END OF INTERNAL DOCUMENT
ED
02
RELEASED
4/ 4

Operator's Handbook (3AL91670AAAATQZZA - ED02)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operator's Handbook (3AL91670AAAATQZZA - ED02)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OPERATORS HANDBOOK

1640FOX Rel. 4.4B

1650SMC Rel. 4.4B

1660SM Rel. 4.4B

1660SM Rel. 5.2B

3AL 91670 AAAA Ed.02

3AL 91670 AAAA Ed.02

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

METRO OMSN REL. 4.4/5.2A OPERATORS HDBK

1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK

1.2 Handbook applicability

1640FOX (Rel. 4.4)

3AL 37491 AAAA

1650SMC (Rel. 4.4)

3AL 36641 AAAA

1660SM (Rel. 4.4)

3AL 36301 AAAA

1660SM (Rel. 5.2)

3AL 36301 AAAA

3AL 80997 AEAA

3AL 81018 AEAA

3AL 81025 AEAA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS

1.3 Purpose of the handbook

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

When using this handbook it is assumed that the Operators know:

how to use a PC and the Windows ambient applications

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

1.4 Handbook configuration check

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

REGISTER AND SECTION TITLE

1.4.1 Notes on Ed. 01

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ISA ES48FE SMII mode and GMII mode

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

3AL 91666 AAAA

3AL 91666 BAAA

3AL 91667 AAAA

3AL 91667 BAAA

3AL 91667 CAAA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Provide information regarding Equipment TurnOn, Test and Operation,

3AL 91668 BAAA

3AL 91669 BAAA

3AL 91669 CAAA

3AL 91670 AAAA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Provides METRO OMSN SDH Craft Terminal screens and operational

Table 3. Handbooks related to ATM specific product SW

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

3AL 80814 AAAA

3AL 81826 AAAA

3AL 89777 AAAA